Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

The majority of the content written and mentioned in this story is not canon. Most characters belong rightfully to the creators of the Ninjago series and its related media. Some locations, events, and elements in this tale were added by the author purely for entertainment purposes and do not exist in the original canon.

This is a work of fiction. None of the events are meant to insult, offend, or harm readers. This story exists out of a love for storytelling and creative expansion.

* * *

Chapter Text

Chapter Text

PART I

Najimi no Senritsu - “A Familiar Tune”

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 1

Half-Remembered Song

There was this one dream that constantly kept repeating in my sleep. It became more and more persistent every year that every night it became more vivid like it was some kind of memory that I had forgotten.

It was a woman playing a shamisen.

The tune always gentle to the point that it was magical but also with a hint of somberness. It seemed to tell a story that I can’t explain. Yet, it captured an emotion that I knew—whoever was the musician—did it with an intention of showing their affection and care to whoever they were playing the tune for.

Was it for a loved one? Their child? It did almost sound like a story about some kind of mysterious history. Sometimes I can’t help but think it was for me, but that’s a stupid thought. My mother might’ve been the one who taught me how to play the shamisen when I was about eight. But I knew for a fact (call it a gut feeling) that it wasn’t her who played it. She would’ve taught it to me already.

The dream was mostly blurry. The shamisen that the woman used appeared to be something important to them as she was almost hugging it. Her hands were soft looking and delicate, fingers long enough that she could play the instrument with ease. But I can’t make out her appearance.

What made it more odd was that I could feel the soft breeze and hear the rustling of the leaves as we sat under it. There was a river somewhere in that dream since I heard rushing water too. The morning dew of spring present, adding an extra confirmation that the season had barely started. Fresh air with hint of finished rain and earth mixed together. The brightness from the sun making it more dream-like.

Who was that person? 

I stopped strumming. The note echoed on the strings of the shamisen I was holding as if waiting for the next verse. I didn’t. I didn’t know what was next as my dream always ended halfway through the song and something else would take its place. But it would linger when I wake up.

My grip on the shamisen and bachi tightened as I tried to continue the music based on the notes that were used; trying to see if the memory would come back and recognize it. It didn’t work. It never worked. There was always something missing. I can’t explain it, but it was almost like I was playing the wrong instrument even though it was clear that this was same instrument that was used.

I let out a huff, stopping as I put down the shamisen.

Why do I keep having that dream?

Another deep sigh as I stared at it, inspecting its three strings as if they would tell me the answers that I needed. I reached a hand for it and plucked one of the strings as a colorless wave radiated out of it.

There was one other thing that I forgot to mention: I could see sounds.

Stupid, I know, but it’s true. It just came into my life when I was playing with my dolls and I began to see different waves of colors coming out of our radio. That was it, and ever since I didn’t know what to do with it.

The whole world—the city of Ninjago—in my eyes became a colorful world that constantly blinded me and made my ears ring. It was both beautiful, yet irritating that I have a love-hate relationship with this… so called illness that our doctor told us. Until now, I don’t believe it but who am I to argue to a professional?

“Satomi!”

I perked up, my thoughts snapping as I stood and opened my bedroom door. “Yes, kā-san?”

“Are you ready? I’m dropping you off to school.”

“Um,” I looked behind me, seeing the time and the bit of mess in my room. “Give me a moment!”

“Isoide! We don’t want you to be late.”

Without another moment’s hesitation, I began to pack up my shamisen, putting it back to its usual stand in my bedroom, and smoothed the sheets of my bed before shouldering my bag. I opened the door to head off, when I caught myself in the mirror and noticed my dark, black hair all over the place. I groaned, fixing my hair quickly and straightening my black and white flannel. Nodding with content, I exited and went down the stairs two steps at a time as I soon came to the front door.

My mother stood there, her purple cardigan eating her for how small her frame was. Unlike me, she had a much darker brown eyes and her hair a similar color. She looked sickly wearing that, especially her looking almost pale, but I would oppose to the word ‘sickly’ to describe her.

“Be more careful. I told you not to run down the stairs.” She crossed her arms, a frown on her face.

“Yes, Ma,” I said, putting on my shoes.

She let out a huff, muttering something under her breath as I followed her out the house. The moment the door opened, my breath puffed out smoke, making me shiver a little as I pulled my jacket closer from the blowing wind.

Another one of those mornings.

“I told you to put on an extra layer yesterday,” she said, unlocking the car as the two of us went inside.

I released a relieved sigh as the car roared to life and she turned on the heater. “I thought it wasn’t going to be this cold.”

“Well, now you do. That’s why you check the weather forecast.”

I hummed, looking out the window as I watched everything pass by. Waves upon waves of colors came, either a green color for nature and the almost grayish-white shade of the wind. It followed the shape of the car as it passed by before disappearing and replaced by another row. My mind began to drift off.

It always puzzled me how I got to have this… ‘ability.’ I once told my parents about it when I first had them when I was five, but they assumed it was just my imagination. Another time, I tried again when I was nine. Instead, they didn’t believe me and brought me to the doctor as they gave each other that worried glance.

How did it end? I was diagnosed with music-color synesthesia. The doctor even said something about having hyperacusis.

“You’re not wearing your headphones,” Mom said, breaking the silence. I caught her glancing at me before looking back in front.

“It’s in my bag, don’t worry.”

“Is it getting any better?”

Nope. “It’s getting more… tolerable.”

“That’s good. You’re not hurting your ears while you’re playing your instruments, are you?”

“Yes, kā-san. I know what to do.”

She nodded. “Iine.”

Another pause came between us. A silence that was comfortable as the outside noise filled our space. Ever since my parents had learned of my “condition,” the use of radios, TVs, or anything that seemed to bother me had been less and limited. Whenever we do watch movies or the television, they would always put it below the fifty percent volume. Due to that, I had never gone to a movie theater, and I always declined when my friends suggested it to hang out.

Of course, I still do use my phone, listen to music, and so on; but, my parents thought it was good to keep everything at a certain time. It’s understandable that they do this, but sometimes I can’t help but point out some things. Music and nature never seemed to make my head ache, unlike the rest of the sounds from electronics and vehicles.

We soon arrived at my school, students coming in and out of cars and buses as I watched for a moment. Ninjago High School. Sure was filled with weird classmates and over the top students. I took out my headphones, wearing it as it muffled some of the noise.

“Be careful and have fun. Say hi to Mika for me,” Mom said, turning her body to my direction.

I unbuckled my belt, ready to get off. “I will. I’ll see you later.”

“Oh, Satomi.”

I stopped, glancing at her.

Mom stared at me for a moment too long, her mouth parted. Her hands tightened on the steering wheel, knuckles white, as she looked away—from me, to the dashboard, to the kids walking by, and then back again. Her expression was unreadable, but something in her silence unsettled me.

It was hesitation. Not the kind that came from being unsure what to say—but the kind that came from holding something back. A secret too heavy to name.

And then I saw it. That strange ripple. A sudden, sharp wave radiated from around her, curling outward like light through water. I’ve seen it before—colors, patterns, movements that were’t there when you blink, but lingered if you watched long enough. Yellow mixed with a shade of blue: fear, tangled with sadness. It was stronger than anything I’d ever seen before.

These waves started showing up a year ago. I didn’t tell anyone. At first I thought I was just tired or seeing things, but they kept appearing—especially when people were emotional.

The first time I really noticed it was with my friend Mika. We were about to give a final presentation, and she was trying to act calm. But when I looked at her, I saw it—spiked, jittery patterns of orange and white energy flickering off her like static. I told her to breathe, and she stared at me like I’d read her mind.

But this wave from Mom... it wasn’t like Mika’s. It was deeper. Heavier. Almost like something she had been keeping to herself for a long time and had been meaning to say out loud.

“What is it, kā-san?” I began.

That seemed to snap Mom off her reverie. She shook her head a little and gave a small smile. “Oh. I forgot. Sorry about that, honey.”

I inspected her, knowing that she was lying but I also knew when not to press for answers. “Drive home safe, Ma.”

“I will. You have fun now.”

I stepped back to close the door, watching her drive off the parking lot before I began to head inside the campus. My eyes darted around the halls as groups of people stood by their lockers, some leaning as they talked and laughed together. Even with the headphones, the sounds still went past its barrier, causing a mild headache as I tried to ignore the constant waves of sounds.

A vibrate came from my pocket, making me to look down as I pulled out my phone.

It was Mika.

We’re at the cafeteria.

Of course they were in the cafeteria. They were always waiting in the cafeteria—not that I blamed them, but one of the things that I hate about school was the cafeteria.

I stared at it for a moment before pocketing my phone again and heading to the direction of the mentioned place. I took a deep breath, preparing myself to be blinded more and for the extra pain in my head. My hand instinctively brushed against the headphones, making sure that it was secured.

The more I got near the place, the more the sounds began to deafen me and the waves of colors more in sharp ends than its usual softness. I took a deep breath in, placing my hand on my chest and focused on my heartbeat than the crowd. I entered with a held breath, the sounds around me muffled as I felt my heart bump, bump, bumping.

My headache began to subside a little, becoming a bit more tolerable as I slowly opened my eyes that the colors had calm down now.

I discovered this tactic when I attended Chelsey’s birthday party, where everything was loud and boisterous that my headphones wouldn’t even help. I had closed my eyes that time and went to a corner, trying to calm myself down and stop the ringing and the sickening vivid colors.

It had worked, to my surprise, focusing on my heartbeat and being able to calm it down. I began to use that technique ever since. It wasn’t permanent and would only last for a minute or two at best, but it was enough to get me adjusted.

After a few more moments of looking around, a familiar olive face came into view close by the end of the room. I made my way to our usual place, instantly catching Mika’s attention.

“Satomi!” She smiled, moving aside to give me room.

“Hey,” I smiled at them, taking my bag off to rest my shoulders. “Did I miss anything?”

“Nope, not really—”

“Except her being a usual fan of a certain boy,” Yuna cut in, looking up from her phone, her bob hair framing her sharp face perfectly as well as her brown eyes.

“Hey, I was not.”

A hum escaped me, already knowing who she was talking about. Of course Mika would be thinking of him.

“You were, Mik,” Chelsey said, glancing at her from the corner of her eye as she continued to apply blush to her cheeks. “Always talking about that certain blonde boy.”

“What? Everyone does,” Mika said, a slight pout on her face. She turned to me with a pleading look. “Back me up on this.”

“I can’t argue with them,” I said, adjusting my headphones with a shrug. “You do talk about Lloyd a lot, especially after the whole city found out he was the Green Ninja.”

“In my defense, the other girls talk about him, too—even the guys! You know how many people started liking him? The whole school just went into a full blown one-eighty when we all found that out.”

I sighed, leaning my chin on my palm as the others continued to argue. I watched them for a moment before glancing out of the window of the cafeteria.

One thing was for certain, the whole school did start treating the boy differently. I still remembered the day he first came here. How everyone stayed away from him like he was some kind of plague—even the teachers—just because he was the son of Lord Garmadon, someone who caused constant havoc in our city.

I won’t deny it, I was part of those people and so was my group.

It might’ve been because how unsure we were on how we should treat him. Or we don’t want to get dragged into the bullying, especially the popular groups are always after him taking turns making his life a living hell. But, during those times as well, whenever I do catch sight of him, I do see him alone and he looked utterly harmless.

Sometimes, I would take glances, always having that sickening pang of guilt in my chest for how people would treat him. Relief flooded me when five other people began to hang out with him without any judgement, and he appeared to be at his happiest in those times. I saw those waves. The difference of his usual gloom and slow, faint waves that radiated out of him turned into something more natural and calm. Sooner or later, we also learned that those “classmates” of ours were the rest of his Ninja team. But, by that time, they already graduated.

Still, there was something about him.

It wasn’t because he was the Green Ninja, but something more.

Every time he was around, even when I don’t see him or he wasn’t even in the room yet, there was this sinking feeling in my gut like a defensive mechanism suddenly kicking in. It was the same feeling that I had when the Oni came that one time; where they froze the whole city and a dark cloud covered it. Before it even happened, I already felt it.

The chill.

Just something I can’t explain, but something I knew that wasn’t good.

The bell soon rang, indicating the start of passing period and getting to our classes. A groan came from Mika as she buried her face onto her arms, making me sigh at her dramatic self. I stood, taking my bag with me.

“Come on, we have to get going.”

“But I haven’t even seen him yet,” she groaned.

“You’ll see him later,” I said, taking her arm to drag her up.

“I need my usual dose, Sato. I can’t live without it.”

At the corner of my eye, I caught Yuna rolling her eyes with a hint of a smile. Chelsey on the other hand was too busy texting, for sure, her boyfriend.

With another deep sigh, I pulled her up and dragged her with us as we began to head for our classes. We said our farewells as we split into different hallways. I dropped Mika off to her Government class, dragging her all the way there as she continued to sulk. As I was about to head to my first period, the halls now less crowded, that sinking feeling came to me.

I stopped, instantly glancing behind me as a familiar ash-blonde hair that almost gleamed silver under the light, and green sweater crossed the hall in a silent jog and disappeared to the other.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 2

An Unlikely Classmate

Only one class had always successfully brightened my day; and, mostly, the reason why I look forward to school at all.

And that was music.

Unlike my other classes, music was the elective I loved the most. The moment I saw it on the elective list the first year of high school, I instantly went for it.

It didn’t matter if it was choir or jazz band. All that mattered was that I’m surrounded by notes. Ironic, yes, being sensitive to sound, but there’s something captivating when you see the air filled with different colors and waves from the art of playing music. Like an artist lost in their brushstrokes, my comfort was the tunes.

The ups and downs, the pianos and fortes, the different notes in the measures, how fast or slow the time measures should be. It’s just so beautiful. It’s difficult to put into words. But the way the music can change a person’s emotions just by listening to it, was something that caught my attention the most. Especially if it’s something you, yourself, had composed. Besides, natural music didn’t seemed to have bothered me as much—instead, it made me feel more at home.

But, there was one thing that I never mentioned to Mika.

Lloyd Garmadon was in my class.

Did other students know? Well, that’s the thing. They know that he’s in the class since the teacher calls everyone for attendance, but he’s barely there.

But, at the end of the class, I had to stay a little longer.

The reason, I had to catch him up with the class.

I caught him once coming in at the end of the day to do his part. At first, he looked caught off guard, the mask he wore halfway down with his eyes wide open. He just stood in place for almost a whole minute, almost as if he was bracing for the screaming and attention. I even noticed a little bit of his waves going into nervous thumps, edged out and sharp, as if his heartbeat spiked up when I squinted my eyes.

Noting his nervousness I simply said, “You need help?”

So, that’s how it started. How the two of us knew each other and became… classmates.

I watched as he played the guitar; observing quietly while watching the progress as he played a major scale on the music sheet the teacher gave before he left.

“Keep your three fingers on the first three strings,” I said.

He nodded, readjusting his right hand posture and trying again.

He played for a bit more, going to chords before letting out a hiss and pulled away from the strings as he shook his left hand. “Being the Green Ninja, I’ve been through so much pain. But for some reason, pressing the strings down with the tips of my fingers hurts more than getting thrown to the other side of a room.”

I chuckled at his joke, shaking my head. “It hurts at first, but it looks like you’re getting used to it.”

“Hm-mh, I think I am,” he said, trying again as he did a G chord.

He strummed, then changed his position to a C chord, then an F.

“You’re getting faster,” I noted, watching the pivots of his long fingers.

“I’ve been practicing in my free time,” he said, making a face when he made a mistake with his fingering that the sound was off.

I grimaced, watching the colorless waves come out in a disappointed, droopy way. “That’s good. At least you’re able to balance your schedule.”

“Nothing much is happening right now. It’s been quiet the past few months and I hope it stays like that,” he said, a little squint of his eyes as he glanced at the music sheet.

One thing I was utterly grateful for was that he got more comfortable around my presence. Lloyd was an easy student—quiet when focused, nodding along as he played. Occasionally pausing just long enough to ask a question before diving back in. No complaints, just pure determination.

The only reason why he took guitar class—from what he told me—was that he needed an art requirement for graduation. So, he took this class as (to him) sounded the most interesting.

“My uncle plays the flute,” he admitted to me once. “But, I suck at it. I mean—I used it once for the sake of saving Ninjago, but requesting me to play a different song… well, you might as well plug your ears.”

That event was two or three years ago. I can’t believe it had been that long since the Serpentines had tried to take over the world.

A ding snapped me out of my thoughts as I glanced over to him, seeing him staring at his phone. There was a small frown on his face as he read something, his fingers typing through the screen rapidly.

“Your team?” I said after a little pause.

He nodded. “Yeah, they’re calling for me.”

“Something important?”

“Not sure. They just told me to go back to the monastery.”

My eyes darted over to the clock, seeing the time was around three-forty. “We can stop here.”

Lloyd shook his head, pocketing his phone again. “For sure it’s not that important. They do that sometimes to prank me. Besides, we made an agreement. One hour every day. We’ll finish it off then I’ll go.”

Another thing to note about him, he’s incredibly stubborn. Patient, but stubborn.

“We didn’t really learn anything new today, just the regular warm-ups and chords. We can finish ten minutes early.”

“Satomi—”

I shook my head, stopping him. “Just do your scales.”

He sighed in defeat, but there’s a hint of smile on his face as he continued to do his major and minor scales. I watched for a moment, listening as I closed my eyes. I’ll just let the teacher know that he came again so he can get his credits.

The music teacher was aware that Lloyd does his attendance after class. Thankfully, the teacher understood why Lloyd doesn’t want to be in class; acknowledging the kind of chaos it would cause in the room if the students knew that they had the same class as the Green Ninja. Most of their attention would be on him rather than in front.

As for me, I don’t want that to happen. First reason would make me become deaf with the whole screaming just to get his attention. And two, I wouldn’t be able to understand and focus on what was being taught on how I’m supposed to be playing the instrument and learning.

It was bad enough with the saggy waves that came out from the whole class (except for one or two), to the point that I had the urge to just buy an earplug just for that period. Other than that, it might’ve been my grown habit. Mom never liked it when I spaced out or plucked the strings rather than having my attention on her when she was teaching me to play the shamisen. She disapproves of it. I would always get an earful.

I took some time to keep my eyes on him before taking my own guitar that was resting on my lap; letting out soft melodies as I plucked the strings gently. I closed my eyes, now focusing on the tune as I imagined the different sounds of elements fusing together.

The calmness of the soft breeze that was passing through the slightly open window, the chirps of the birds, and the zooming cars down below. Then, the blend of the peaceful tune between me and Lloyd. A silence that was not fully silent, yet something common in Ninjago City. I kept plucking, then only noticing that it truly did become quiet.

I opened my eyes, seeing Lloyd staring at me with an awed expression on his face as his lips were slightly parted.

“You have a gift,” he muttered as if afraid on breaking whatever he felt that transpired. “In music, I mean.”

“Normal stuff. I guess some people are born with it.”

“Hm, I would like to argue, especially how that changed the mood, but I don’t think you’ll listen,” he chuckled. “From what I remembered, you told me you were sensitive to sound, yet you like playing.”

I nodded.

“Doesn’t it… hurt you?”

“No,” I said, putting the guitar back to its stand. “Not like loud sounds from the outside or from people. Music is almost an exception to it.”

He hummed again, continuing with his task again with a small pause between. “Seriously though, whatever you have, it’s a gift.”

Or a curse.

Lloyd simply went back to playing, our quick conversation seeping into my head. He might think that, but there were other students who were far better than me when it came to composing their own songs. One of them was Thea.

A classmate of ours that won the music competition this Autumn. Upon many opponents, she scored the highest votes from the judges when it came to her composed music, even her voice. It captured many people’s attentions, not just the judges—the teachers and the students alike. After that, she was like a celebrity in this school. She went on competing against other districts, going on constant field trips.

Mika had urged me beforehand to join the competition, knowing my passion for music and composing my own songs that always seemed to make her tear up. But, I declined.

Every year, I declined.

A zing came from my pocket, making me pull out my phone as I saw a text from Mika:

Wya? wanna talk to u bout something.

I sighed, putting my phone back in my pocket as I glanced at the clock again before to Lloyd. “We’re done for today.”

He looked up from the sheet, a slight crease between his brows. “You sure?”

“Yeah, my friend seems to want to talk to me about something anyways. I don’t want to keep you away from your duties, too.”

He nodded, reluctantly packing the guitar and putting the music sheets to his folder. He hoisted the guitar over his shoulder and his backpack strapped in front of him. I soon stood as well, taking my bag.

“Thanks for staying again,” he said, giving me a small smile. “I truly appreciate it.”

“No worries. Glad I could help.”

Lloyd gave a nod, beginning to leave. “I’ll see you tomorrow?”

“Hm-mh. Tomorrow.”

He paused for a moment by the door, giving me a final smile and a wave before leaving. I stayed inside the room for a moment, relishing the silence and getting a breather. I took a deep breath in before making my way out, texting her on the way that I was coming to the front.

I wonder what she wanted to speak to me about. She can be quite abrupt about her texts, and sometimes it doesn’t mean anything but just wanting to hang out after school.

As I stepped out, a squeal made me look up as Mika ran towards me. I flinched a little from the loud sound, double checking if I still had my headphones on. She can be so loud sometimes, still I adore her.

“Did you see him?” She said, a grin on her face.

“See who?”

“Lloyd! He just came out a few seconds ago before you. I saw him running off in the distance. He even had a guitar strapped on his back,” she stared at me, almost skeptical as the waves radiating out of her shows a slight purple to it. “Does he have guitar class? Are you not telling me something?”

I blinked, the wave disappearing as I got my attention back to her. “What? No, of course not. I would’ve told you if I had him in class.”

She hummed, staring for a bit longer before nodding. She would buy that… for now.

“So, why were you looking for me?”

“Oh, right!” She placed her bag down, rummaging through it before taking out a packet. She gave me a sheepish smile and handed it to me.

I took it, reading the contents. My eyes landed on the large, bold letters at the top. “A museum field trip application?”

“Yeah… I need to go for a project. It’s required.” Mika paused for a moment, fidgeting with the sleeves of her long-sleeves. “Can you come with? The teacher said I can bring an extra.”

I stared at the paper for a moment, pressing my lips together before glancing at her. “Mika, seriously? Did you ask Yuna?”

“You know her, she doesn’t want to go. Said it was too boring for her,” she groaned. “She also said she has practice with her band.”

“What about Chelsey?”

“Has a date with her boyfriend. It’s their anniversary.”

I sighed, rubbing my temple.

That left me.

I get that she needed me, but there’s something about the thought of going to the museum just… irks me. Something about the thought of going there at this current time doesn’t sit well with me. Besides, I still had to figure out that tune from my dream.

A strange unease settled in my stomach, an instinctual warning I couldn’t explain. It wasn’t fear, just a feeling that going to the museum now was… wrong.

I had nothing against museums. Not at all! I appreciated the things they had and the constant silence that they give in such an enormous room. But as of currently, I didn’t had the energy.

“Mika, look, I know you need to go, but—” I glanced over to her again, to tell her that I can’t and make up a lie, but her pleading look made me hesitate.

She kept staring at me with that look, her hands clasped together and pressed against her chest. I seriously hate her sometimes. Always knowing what to do to get me to agree. Why did I let her know the kind of weakness that I had?

“Please, Sato? Pleeease?”

I opened and closed my mouth before groaning. “Fine! Just this once.”

A grin came up to her lips, tackling me into a tight hug that I almost fell. I released a strained breath out, patting her back.

“Great! The teacher’s still here, so let’s get the paperwork done and hand it to her so that you’ll be added as an extra!” Mika said, already dragging me back into the school without even another warning.

I stumbled, but let her drag me as I shook my head. She would someday be the death of me.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 3

A Letter

The travel back to the monastery usually took a few hours, but being able to conjure up a dragon had always been a huge blessing to me.

I could’ve taken my car, but I don’t think driving around without a license was a good idea. The officers may know me, but getting that kind of special treatment just didn’t sit right with me. If I were in duty and it was an emergency, that’s the only time I used that privilege.

I dismounted in the middle of the monastery, my landing quiet out of habit and constant practice. I released a sigh, feeling the slight tension in my body leave.

Home, finally.

Readjusting the guitar strap on my back and the backpack on the other, I made sure it was secured before heading to my room. The air was calm this afternoon, but something about it didn’t feel right. It might’ve been how still the last few months had become—so quiet that not even a small crime had happened. Or maybe, and a more possible explanation, I was just so used to moving a lot.

In all honesty, I didn’t want to leave Satomi and our session this early, but thank the First she was understanding. I couldn’t thank her enough that she kept my secret of doing my work for guitar after school to the point she offered me help.

I entered my room, placing my bag to its usual corner as well as the guitar before looking around.

I’ll admit, it was a bit of a mess and I could already hear Mom telling me to clean it up. After all, an organized room means a focused mind. Being the Green Ninja and the leader, there were two things I needed: patience and focus.

I rolled my shoulders, hearing the bones pop while I massaged the muscle between my neck and shoulder with a soft groan. The tension was evident, knowing for a fact that the cause of it wasn’t carrying my bag all day. It barely had anything in it, unlike the weights I carried yesterday.

A cold shower sounded incredible right now, but duty calls. No breaks for a ninja.

My thoughts drifted back to the immediate text, making me sigh as I closed my eyes.

I stood still, doing a quick meditation before heading down the hall. It was odd hearing the place so quiet. Usually Jay would’ve been running through the halls, trying to find something. Nya trying to help him and giving him an earful for always losing things; Zane and Pixal would be at the hangar, but it might’ve been because the others were out on patrol.

Noises came from the common room, almost aggressive, already knowing who it was coming from. I entered, spotting Kai and Cole playing Prime Empire. I could practically hear them abusing the controller buttons. It always surprised me they haven’t broken those yet.

“You guys said you were looking for me?” I said, entering and watching them for a moment as the characters spout out their lines and fought one another.

“Huh? Oh, yeah,” Kai began, his attention still focused on the screen with a deep frown on his face and leaning forward. “Master Wu was looking for you.”

“And Misako,” Cole added, his posture more relaxed.

“Mom?” I said, frowning. “What’d they need me for?”

“Said something like needing to discuss with you about something—what? No fair! I totally pressed for my special attack,” Kai groaned, leaning back on the couch in defeat.

“Ha! Told you you can’t beat me,” Cole smirked.

I shook my head, sighing deeply but feeling that tug from the corner of my lips. These two can be children sometimes. My whole team was. I shifted a little to get my position better, but I felt that dull ache on my shoulder again as it pulsed in protest. A small groan escaped me as I massaged it again.

Kai glanced up to me, his eyes squinted. “Ya good?”

“Fine. Just a bit of an ache.”

“You shouldn’t have pushed yourself with yesterday’s workout, y’know,” Cole said, drinking a bottle of water.

“Maybe, but I needed it. Where’s Mom and Master Wu?”

“In the library,” they both said in unison.

I gave a little nod, beginning to make my way to the library. “Alright. Thanks.”

From behind me, I heard the two of them going for another round of their game; Kai already letting out a frustrated groan. I shook my head, silently making my way down the halls and arriving at the library.

It was a slight mess as I spotted Uncle at the top of the ladder, throwing down some scrolls as they thudded on the wooden floor. The ladder creaked a little, putting me on the edge in case he fell—but he was our master.

“Where is it? Where is it?” He muttered, continuing to search through the shelves.

I raised a brow before spotting my mother at the table with scrolls wide open. “Mom.”

She looked up, a gentle smile coming up her face as she brushed a loose strand of gray hair behind her ear. “Lloyd, how was school?”

“The usual,” I shrugged, going over to her as I gave her a quick kiss on the cheek before focusing on what she was looking at. “What are you two doing? The others said you two were looking for me?”

“Oh, yes, we were,” she continued, her attention back on the scrolls with a deep frown. “We received a letter from an unknown sender.”

“A letter?”

“An ominous one,” Uncle said, coming down the steps of the ladder as he held a blue scroll. “Something that I deem critical.”

I gave him space while he began to untie the scroll and I fixed my posture. “What’s in the letter?”

“This,” Mom said, handing me a piece of paper.

I took the paper and unfold it:

Nine tails, but only four.

One has passed, three remain.

The Mother has caged thousands with a melody

The last song of the Fox.

A cage shut, yet yearns to sing free.

Its locks written in blood and played on strings.

Forged in unity, the symphony that binds—

A new song must rise, echoing for two bloodlines entwined.

One, a pulse of shadow. The other, a melody of Harmony.

Should they falter, the ancient harmony unravels,

Threatening to consume more than just one realm.

Two in war

For a title that is deserted.

The realm unattended.

Once in Harmony, now in chaos.

Shall it come again

When the four instruments

Are together once more in symphony.

Only one blessed by the Mother—

Where the symphonies listen to their command

And they hear and see them—

May she find her true song, and bring balance back to broken notes.

I put down the paper, frowning as the words repeated in my head. ‘Should they falter, the ancient harmony unravels, threatening to consume more than just one realm.’

I looked up at them and said, “The realms will be in trouble because of… whatever is happening in whichever realm this is?”

“Indeed. That is why we called you,” Uncle said. “My father once discovered a realm that he considered the most peaceful out of the sixteen. He believed it not once went to war with any other, unlike the rest.”

I became silent, listening to my uncle’s words as he put down the scroll in his hands on the table.

“He said that it was a realm ruled by one king, or what they call the Father, who is open and always neutral to any wars. They are jumpers of realms—”

“What do you mean ‘jumpers’?” I said, frowning a little.

“They can travel from one realm to another with ease.”

“Is that even possible?”

“For them, yes, by using their songs.”

I paused, staying quiet again to keep on listening. Was it possible for people to do that? But now that I thought about it, it reminded me of some creatures.

“Just like the Dragons,” I muttered.

“Indeed,” my uncle smiled. “Just like the Dragons.”

I looked up at him again, his words dawning on me. “Then, that means…”

He nodded, now spreading the light blue scroll onto the table as it revealed an illustration filled with…

“The Kitsune,” he said. “In other words, those mythical foxes that we hear from stories.”

I stared at the scroll with awe, my breath hitching seeing foxes with different colored tails spread out like a peacock’s. There were humans as well, the only difference were the ears on top their heads and tails behind them. A huge palace was atop a mountain from the very right of the page and villages from below. There were blue flames around the Kitsune, floating like lanterns.

“Master shapeshifters, once believed that the Element of Shapeshifting came from them,” Uncle continued. “But, it was soon told to my father that they are instead something else entirely.” He glanced at me. “The Dragon are known as Creation and the Oni as Destruction… the Kitsune are known as Harmony. The one believed to balance both.”

A pause came into the library as I processed the information. The Dragons and the Oni weren’t the only mythological beings in this world. Beings that can go from one realm to another and have a larger role in the realms.

“There is another,” I said, still a bit shocked.

“Indeed, but we don’t have that blood. The Kitsune mostly stick to themselves, building their empire in isolation. But, they are open beings, curious, when someone or something visits their realm. But, barely anyone can travel there, not even the Dragons.”

“Why not?”

“It doesn’t say much,” Mom soon joined. “But, I have a hunch that the only way to travel into that realm is through their music.”

“Then, how did Grandfather get there?” I said, looking from Mom to Uncle.

“I’m only guessing from what he told me,” Uncle said, “but, I remembered him mentioning something about meeting a woman who called herself the Caretaker, and that he was able to get to that realm through her music.”

I hummed, looking back down at the scroll as I ran my hand through the page. Another beings in another realm, living and breathing like us. I couldn’t process it properly. It was both exciting and worrying. “Do you think the one who sent the message could possibly be the Caretaker?” I said, looking up at them again.

“Could be. But, we’re not certain. Many years has passed, my father only met these Kitsune once and he was the one who drew this scroll, not them. They do not give out their history, even how kind and grateful a person can be. And even if the Kitsune trust that outsider.”

I clenched my hands, frowning a little as I stared at the illustration again.

“It only made it worse when they felt his Oni blood.”

My head snapped up, my eyes landing on him instantly. “What do you mean?”

“They can feel an Oni’s presences from miles away. It’s kind of their instinct. Ever since that day, no signs of a Kistune ever came to Ninjago.”

They can do that? I looked down at my hands, staring straight at my veins as if I could see the Oni blood in them. That wasn’t a good sign was it? If we ever do encounter a Kitsune, I don’t think they would be so thrilled to have me there.

I released my held breath, something I didn’t even noticed I was doing. “What makes it different now? Especially we got this message?”

“That’s what we’re trying to find out, son,” Mom said, putting a hand on my shoulder. “We have a speculation that… there’s some kind of war between them.”

I looked back down at the paper in my hand, landing at those three words. “‘Two in war.’”

She nodded.

“Does that mean they’re in big trouble?” I said, glancing up at my uncle. “Do we need to do something?”

“We are not so certain yet, Lloyd, but I do believe they will need some assistance,” he said, glancing back down at the scroll on the table. “But, what can we do when we don’t even have access to their world? When we haven’t even encountered one in years? We’re not certain if they do, and this message just arrived.”

My grip on the paper tightened when I heard those words. Uncle was right, how can we even help when we had no access to that realm? The Realm Crystal had been destroyed during the time when the Oni invaded Ninjago through it.

Father and I even shattered it ourselves, yet it didn’t do anything. Either way, from what Uncle and Mom told me, it wouldn’t have worked either. That realm, whatever the Kitsune’s called their realm, seemed too far to reach without their music.

I looked back down at the message. But, how did this letter get here?

A ding on my phone pulled me off my thoughts as I checked the notification, making me sigh heavily as I read what it was written on my calendar for tomorrow. Right, I had a field trip to the museum for my Biology project. Seriously, why did the teacher had to make it a requirement?

“What is it, Lloyd?” Mom said, peeking over to see the screen.

“I have a field trip tomorrow,” I said, looking back at them. “It’s important. Half my project’s grade.”

“Oh, well,” she glanced at Master Wu then back at me. “You can take a break today. You don’t have to do tonight’s—”

“I’ll take care of it,” I said, cutting her off as I shoved my phone back to my pocket. “It’s during the morning, not at night. I can still to my usual patrols at the evening.”

My mother stared at me for a moment, inspecting me with that worried look in her eyes. I stared back, trying to give a silent plea that I can do it. I still had my responsibilities, just because I’m getting my education and I have an important field trip tomorrow doesn’t mean I can’t do my obligations as the Green Ninja as well.

She continued to stare for a moment, her eyes flickering around my face before letting out a sigh. Uncle and her glanced at one another. He simply nodded before turning to me.

“We’ll talk more about this tomorrow when you get back. For now, rest before it’s your turn to do your rounds for tonight,” he said, putting his hands behind his back. “Don’t strain yourself too much, Lloyd.”

I nodded, doing a slight bow at the two of them. “I know.”

I placed the piece of paper back onto the table beside the scroll with the illustration of the Kitsune, making me stare at it for a moment as my eyes wandered to each tailed humanoids. I turned, soon after, heading out of the library as Mom and Uncle went back to a murmured chatter.

My thoughts wandered back to what he said, that the Kitsune can feel an Oni’s presence from miles away. Why even have that kind of alertness if they never seemed to have encountered them before? Whatever it might intel in the future, I just hope it wouldn’t be a problem for any of us.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 4

Behind the Glass

Before the bus even arrived at our destination, the first thing I felt was that familiar chill and drop in my stomach, guessing right that Lloyd Garmadon was part of this field trip. Thank the gods he had a mask on, his hood up with his gray hoodie. At least he was smart enough to swap out his signature green—otherwise, people would’ve mistaken other students for him, as they often did.

Even if he was wearing that, I still recognized him from afar, yet no one else seemed to have noticed as he stood at the back. It might’ve been that sinking feeling I always felt that made it easy for me to catch him even with his disguise. Though, it was still shocking no one noticed from his basically glowing strands of hair poking out.

Mika had been pulling on my arm since earlier, dragging her as she kept on groaning and whining the words ‘I don’t want to be here’ before the buses even arrived. To be honest, I didn’t want to be here either. I would’ve rather continued understanding my dream’s song than being here. But I made a promise.

We stood in front of a gigantic skeleton of a whale—whatever species of whale it may be—as I forced Mika to take her notes while I glanced around. The people were silent or talking to each other in hushed whispers as they huddled in small groups with their friends. The waves were gently moving around like the waters tenderly rocking a boat in the middle of a calm sea. For once, I didn’t need to wear my headphones, which I was grateful of.

In the distance, I spotted Lloyd again as he took his own notes. Alone and seeming to be avoiding his peers as much as he could that he always ducked his head down when his classmates passed by.

I glanced at Mika, seeing her going to a girl that she recognized as they spoke to one another and exchanged notes. As best as I could, I silently slipped away and went towards him, glancing behind my shoulder once in a while to make sure that she was still preoccupied with her friend.

His back was turned to me when I tapped his shoulder. His emotional waves spiked a bit—a sudden fluctuation in them than his usual green aura. He turned around quickly, then his waves came back to normal.

“Satomi,” he whispered, the corner of his eyes crinkling. “I wasn’t expecting to see you here. Are you here for the project as well?”

“No,” I whispered back, standing beside him and nudged my head over to Mika’s direction. “My friend dragged me here. She wanted someone to accompany her.”

He glanced to her direction, seeming to recognize her as his eyes squinted. “Oh… she’s one of my fans.”

I chuckled a little at how he sounded a bit hesitant on what to say as if he didn’t want to offend me or her. “Yes, she is.” I glanced at his notes. “You’re almost finished.”

He looked down before back at me. “I am. It’s not that difficult. Just copying what it says here, changing a few words, and answering a few questions about how these animals could’ve possibly evolved over the years.” He paused for a moment, a heavy sigh coming from him. “After that, I just need to make a presentation about it.”

I raised a brow, noticing the slight shift of his mood before saying, “Doesn’t sound that difficult.”

He hummed, but it didn’t sound much of a joyful agreement. We stayed there for a few more moments as he finished his current paragraph before he glanced up and surveyed. I did the same, noticing Mika walking away with the girl as they seemed to be now invested in whatever they were talking about.

Looks like she forgot about me, that was typical of her. She always gets distracted by the littlest of things.

Lloyd began to move, glancing over to me as if telling me to follow him. I did, walking beside him.

There was a silence between us. A bit of awkwardness as I noticed his waves seeming to speed up a little. I looked down, noting the way he fidgeted with his pencil as he flawlessly let it travel from his index to his pinky then back again. It was a mesmerizing motion, something I tried to do but constantly failed at doing.

I won’t blame him, we don’t really have anything else to talk about outside the music room. We never truly asked each other about anything else other than me teaching him how to play the guitar and what happened in class. The silence stretched on as I kept following him, letting him do his work while the serenity of the area placed us in a calming mood.

But, somewhere along the line, I kept noticing him glancing around constantly. Sometimes staring at one direction longer than the other as if he was looking for someone or something.

His waves suggested he was a bit alert, making me glance around to see if he spotted anything. There was nothing. Everything looked the same. I turned back to him.

“You alright?” I whispered, making him look back at me.

“Huh? Yeah, sorry, I was just… thinking,” he muttered, making me raise a brow.

“Is it something about what your team said? About the whole text from yesterday?”

Lloyd shrugged, but his fidgeting had stopped. “Somewhat—but, don’t worry about me. I can handle it. We’ve been through worse, you know it and seen it,” he said, seeming to offer a smile from the way his eyes creased a little behind the mask.

With a nod, I squinted my eyes a little to read more of his aura. “I won’t pry as much, but it seems like you’re putting most of your work to yourself. Don’t the others help?”

He looked down on the floor, now gripping his pencil. “I mean… they do, but it’s mostly my responsibility.”

I opened my mouth to make a comment, but he held up a hand.

“Please, don’t say more. I know you’re going to tell me that I shouldn’t strain myself too much, but this is my burden. No one else’s.”

I didn’t say more, noticing the creases between his brows as he kept staring on the floor and looked lost in thought. I began to drift off as well, simply looking around the room and keeping tabs on Mika from far away. I pressed my lips together, listening to the soft tapping of my shoes and watching its clear waves dance away in a steady rhythm.

Just as I was about to look up when Lloyd passed by me and stopped at another plaque, a movement from the corner of my eye caught my attention.

Glancing over, I frowned when I saw what seemed like a tail disappearing into a bend of the hallway to my left. I blinked, peeking into the corner. What was that?

Standing still for a second, I looked over to Lloyd who wasn’t that far away, taking notes again. I debated on calling after him, but I noticed the tail disappearing into another corner, already losing track of it.

I didn’t want to distract him with something so trivial, a mere curiosity that might just be my imagination. But, then again, I would just keep thinking about it if I don’t follow. It wouldn’t hurt, I’ll just be quick.

After some hesitation, I followed whatever I saw, going through the quiet hallways as I began to leave the vertebrate section of the museum and into the secluded parts.

Another movement from the corner of my eye. My attention snapped to it quickly. The same white, red tipped… tail? What animal had white fur with their tips red?

With growing curiosity, I kept following.

It wasn’t a good idea to follow an unknown creature and go alone—but there was a warm, fluttering feeling in my chest that told me to do so. Almost like a melody that I used to know but can’t remember.

It went like that for a few more turns, the same tail appearing from a turn of a hall. Disappearing, then appearing, and repeat; while I followed like some kind of mouse chasing the scent of cheese. After what seemed like minutes, it finally led me to a room filled with what appeared to be forgotten items and historical instruments.

My breath caught upon seeing them in glass cases, showing off their beauty with flutes carved in ancient wood; an Arabian lute with its eleven strings, a Mesopotamian lyre carved in silver and red limestone, and an intricately designed hunting horn.

This room was like some kind of secret jewel of the museum. In my opinion, something ethereal.

Many might disagree and simply glance and pass by, but I took my time to take them all in—remembering each and every detail of everything that I was seeing.

As I was about to walk over to another glass case, an area of the room captured my interest, making me recognize their instruments from the Edo period of Ninjago. But there was one that mostly took my attention, making me stop in the middle of the room as I saw it at the corner. I made my way to it, slowly—almost cautiously—as my gaze locked onto it.

A shamisen.

It was a shamisen.

The more I got closer, the more it held my gaze and nothing else mattered.

It was beautiful—no…

It was divine.

I stood in front of the glass case, looking up at the shamisen resting in its stand like a throne. The bachi was on a pillow, lounging beside almost as if the shamisen was silently being worshiped at the corner of the room. A jewel that many can easily miss in a hurry.

The sao was a dark color of red sandalwood, polished to perfection that it sparkled underneath the light, reaching until to the dō. The dō kakke, also known as the body cover of the shamisen, was designed by the image of what looked like a white fox with nine tails spread out; there were hints and flecks of gold around it like scattered stars.

Its three strings were enticing to pluck, making my fingers itch to take the bachi and play at least one string. I wondered how it would sound like even though I knew what its tune would be. It just seemed to me that this shamisen will emit more than a simple note.

More than just a normal melody.

I kept staring for a while longer before reaching over to the glass case. Something called to me to take it, told me to pluck the strings. Everything else blurred, and all that focused was the shamisen itself.

The tip of my finger was only an inch away from the glass, and the pull—the call—became louder and stronger. It filled my head with the thoughts of opening the lock. Free it from its years of confinement and play it like it’s supposed to be.

“Beautiful, is it not?”

My heart jumped, snapping out of my reverie as I instantly turned around.

A woman stood there with sharp eyes as if observing me that made me freeze. But, the smile on her face contrasted the edge that she had as it softened her stern features. I relaxed, my heart beginning to calm down.

She was beautiful. Beautiful than any woman I had ever seen in Ninjago City from her fair, soft-looking skin to her charcoal hair. She was young, but seemed like the same age as Mom.

She was wearing a large, fur coat. A bit too large that it dragged against the floor and a little too thick to be wore inside. Why was she wearing that? Wasn’t she feeling hot or sweating at all?

“I apologize for scaring you,” she said, walking to my direction to stand beside me and look at the shamisen. “It simply excited me to have someone visit this area of the museum. Barely anyone comes here.”

“I… noticed,” I said, looking around the empty room before turning back to her.

She was tall, an inch or two taller than me and she had this air around her. Something heavy that I didn’t want to utter a word until she does first. I squinted my eyes, focusing on her as I tried to see her aura. The waves that usually let me know people’s emotions, at least a glance of them, just to get a hint of what she was feeling. But, something was different.

There was nothing. She didn’t have one as if something wasn’t letting me—or blocking me. This wasn’t right. Her presence seemed… off, but I can’t tell why and what. My stare seemed to catch her attention as she looked down at me, startling me as I looked away in shame for being caught.

“Miho,” she said.

“Sorry?”

“My name is Miho. I am one of the curators of this museum. Mostly, I am assigned in this section.”

I let out a silent ‘oh’ and nodded.

There was another heavy silence between us, and I can feel her eying me. I shifted a little, switching my weight from one leg to another as her gaze burned. Why was she staring at me like that?

My eyes went down to the empty plaque where the information about the instrument usually was located, but nothing was there. No words, no dates, just blank.

“Why isn’t there information about this one?” I said, curious but also wanting to get Miho to stop gazing at me.

“There is not much information about this shamisen,” she began, grateful that she had turned her attention back to the case. “But, I do know most of its truths.”

I glanced at her, narrowing my eyes at her. I still couldn’t read her. “Truths?”

“Yes. Truths. Things only I know of this shamisen.”

A heavy silence came between us, making me hesitate as I swallowed the lump in my throat. We stared at one another, my eyes locking with hers that I held my breath. Something about the way she smiled with that intense gaze in the silence was meant to not be trifled with. And whatever she wanted to tell me, I knew she wouldn’t lie.

I might not be able to see her emotions and identify from a glance whether she was nervous or calm, but somewhere deep within me told me to trust her. An unconscious part of myself that seemed familiar with her presence, yet I don’t remember ever seeing her in my life.

“What kind of truths?” I said after a second had passed.

“The kind of truths that involves the history of this shamisen and its lineage.”

Miho’s comment suddenly made me think of my dream… and the questioned shamisen.

I glanced back to the instrument, trying to figure out whether I would recognize it from my dream. Nothing, but it was still familiar.

“Does the shamisen have a name?” I muttered, my eyes still glued to it.

I doubt it had any. Not a lot of people name their instruments as if they were sentient beings. Though, sometimes I had urges to name my shamisen at home, but it wasn’t fully mine and Mom never named it.

“Shikisha.”

My attention snapped back to her. I understood what she had just said, having parents who were Japanese and being forced to speak to my grandparents in that language. I knew what it meant—but it was still out of context.

“Shikisha?”

“As in a conductor of music,” Miho confirmed.

I hummed. So, I was right. “Did you name it?”

“The previous owner,” she whispered, so softly I almost missed it.

Her mood had shifted, her eyes seeming distant as if remembering a past memory that haunted her. Even without using whatever this diagnosis I had, I could tell just from her expression that she was living through something that had happened. Any person would’ve caught it. Her eyes were glazed over while I kept silent as I took the time to observe her again.

“The past owner of this shamisen was a ruler,” she began, making me blink. “She was known throughout the land and respected by her people. She favored the instrument to the point she would take it with her anywhere. She played it with such passion and precision that it captured people’s attention and successfully caused every fight to settle back into peace. Most of the time, a stalemate.”

Miho paused for a moment, appearing to be catching her breath. “They would always resume back into discussion without any intense disagreement. That shamisen was not just an instrument, but a weapon to the eyes of her people. A weapon that releases symphonies that could never be ignored.”

I kept staring at her, processing the information that she had given me. An instrument being a weapon? That sounded almost like some kind of fairy tale. The whole story about this… mysterious ruler who favored this Shikisha in front of us, locked in a glass case, sounded like some kind of myth. Was this woman playing with me?

“You do not believe me, do you?” She said, putting me back to the present and catching me off guard from being able to be read so easily. “I do not blame you. After all, who would believe such a tale that sounded like it came out of a children’s novel? But, believe me when I say that it is not, Satomi.”

Wait... I didn’t tell her my name. I snapped my attention to her, frowning. “How did you—”

Before I could even finish, Miho grabbed my arm and pulled me aside, making me stumble and fall on the floor as something zoomed past me, missing me by an inch. My breath hitched as I looked back, seeing a dart pierced onto the wall behind me that it buried itself deep onto the marble. Blood pumped up my ears, staying in place as I looked over to where it came from.

In front of us, a portal had opened, a man wearing a kamishimo stepped out with a blow dart on his hand, appearing out of nowhere like those epic scenes in movies. I noticed the katana strapped on his hakama, making me shudder at the sight. But, what was strange were the ears atop of his head like some kind of fox’s. And it only made it more strange when I saw four silver tails behind him move as they spread out slightly.

“Caretaker Miho,” the man said, putting the blow dart away.

“Ginko Aoki, a surprise to see you again,” Miho said, her expression unreadable.

“So, this is where you have been hiding, hm?” Aoki’s eyes flickered over to me, making me stiffen.

He appeared to assess me, staring at me for a long time as if trying to read my very soul as we locked eyes. I couldn’t look away as if he had froze me in place. After what seemed like a whole second, it darted beside me. I followed his gaze, staring right up at the shamisen.

“And both are here,” he said, looking back to Miho. “Looks like luck is on my side.”

“You will not dare touch the girl and the shamisen, Aoki,” Miho said, her voice booming inside the room.

“I have orders to follow, Shūei Miho, and I will do so even if it means fighting you.”

“You are young… but, you forget your place amongst your elders,” she said, taking off her oversized coat as it fell on the floor.

The moment it pooled below her, I finally understood why she wore it. Whatever they were, she was the same as the man in front of us now. Her tails were eight instead of four, and the color of her fur a shade of snow with the tips crimson.

She wore a miko outfit, something I had seen from shrine maidens that I constantly see whenever I visited Grandmother in the summer from the outskirts. We would always go to the shrines to pray for another virtuous year.

And then, I realized. It was her! The one from before—the tail that I saw. The one I followed was her all along.

Aoki’s expression fell into a stoic one, even when I tried to squint my eyes to figure out what he was feeling.

“It wouldn’t work, kogitsune,” Aoki said, making me hold my breath. “I can feel you trying to read me. It wouldn’t work.”

‘Kogitsune?’ ‘Little fox?’ Feel me reading him? What was he talking about?

“Shall we see if you had done your training, Aoki?” Miho said, her true colors finally appearing as her own set of fox ears appeared and her eyes sharper with a hint of gold.

Aoki reached for his katana, slowly unsheathing it as if some kind of divine weapon and went into a stance. I stood, backing away as I felt the air shift as if the wind itself was making an arena for the two. The portal behind Aoki had now closed and the two stared at one another in silence.

“An honor to fight you again, Shūei.”

I should’ve called Lloyd to come with me.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 5

Unexpected Visitors

Satomi was gone. I hadn’t even noticed when she disappeared as I was too busy writing notes and stressing over what I was going to do about the presentation. Only did I noticed when I looked up, expecting her to be right there beside me; instead, I was greeted by air.

Alarms flared in my head, scanning the area. At first, I thought she’d gone back to her friend, but she wasn’t with the others either. I scanned the museum—bathroom? I stood close by, staring at my watch without blinking. Five minutes passed without a sign, I shut my notebook.

There was something strange about today. The kind of strange that will make the hairs on the back of your neck stand, causing you to be on the edge of your toes. I had been feeling it the moment I stepped out of the bus. The feeling of someone watching me.

None of them were my classmates, I knew that for a fact. They were on the other side of the room, and I was on the other. I knew that sensation too well—this wasn’t just someone watching. It was someone who didn’t belong.

I began my search, retracing our steps where she and I had walked together. Knowing the possible threat in this museum—which seemed to always start in the museum—the thought of having her alone and wandering wasn’t a good sign.

My senses heightened, more alert than before, as my steps became silent while I looked around each corner of the halls.

But, with every turn, I didn’t spot her familiar form. I sighed heavily, twirling my pencil faster between my fingers as my eyes flickered around.

Where are you?

Just as I was about to go back and try again, a clang from one of the halls I had passed by caught my attention.

My body moved on its own, already dropping my stuff on the ground and running before I could even process it.

The wind pushed my hood back as I took off my mask to make it easier to breathe. I turned every corner sharply that I skidded and my sneakers squeaked on the marble floors.

As I was about to enter a room, something gleamed from my peripheral. I rolled just in time as a blade struck the marble boulder behind me. Heaving, I squinted at it.

I recognized that weapon—just from its slight curve in its steel blade and short length. It was a wakizashi.

My attention darted to where it originated, seeing a man holding a katana in one hand, scowling at me. I froze when I saw his four tails and ears atop his head.

A Kitsune!

His glare sharpened as he growled. “Oni.”

Right, they can identify an Oni from miles away, which meant he sensed me coming.

I clenched my jaws, rolled my shoulders back, got into a fighting stance, ready to spar and ask questions. He turned his body towards my direction, already getting to a posture where I knew he was about to take off towards me.

Alright then. Let’s see what he can do.

He already shifted his feet when a blue flame stopped him as it flew over to the him, close to hitting him. He blocked it easily with his katana, the blade turning a shade of blue, then back to its metallic color as if it absorbed the magic.

Another Kitsune appeared, female this time, older from her appearance, though still young, around the age of forty. Her tails are more in number than the male’s, making me stare in awe as they spread behind her and made her look more intimidating.

She fought the man, dodging his attacks with ease as she continued to throw her blue flames. She was a natural fighter, years of experience evident in her movements.

Quick and nimble that she was able to step back or sideways easily, constantly almost landing hits. Though, the other had good reflexes, moving away in time.

She almost disappeared with each step; I can’t even keep up with her with my eyes. Whoever she was, she wasn’t someone I hoped I would be fighting.

I watched for a moment, stunned to see Kitsunes so early when they were only introduced to me yesterday. Why were they here?

“Boy,” the woman said, startling me with her commanding voice, “get her out of here. Take the shamisen as well and go.”

My eyes darted to where she was gesturing, seeing Satomi at the corner beside the shamisen, the woman was talking about. I didn’t hesitate, going straight to Satomi as I grabbed her arm, gentle but firm.

“We need to leave,” I said, trying to keep my voice steady. I wouldn’t lie, I was nervous.

She seemed dumbfounded to speak as her eyes were locked on the other two, but I noticed the small nod that came from her. That was enough of an answer for me.

I glanced over to the intricate shamisen, inspecting it.

Why would that woman want me to take it? What would an instrument benefit her with?

“Hurry up, boy!” The woman yelled, landing a hit on the other. “Stop ogling and move.”

I snapped out of it, coming back to life as I punched the glass, aiming to where it would break easily. And it did as I calculated.

The alarm instantly blared, but I didn’t wait as I grabbed the instrument and whatever it was on the pillow that seemed important. I strapped it behind me before tugging at Satomi’s wrist.

“Let’s go, Satomi. We have to move.”

She snapped out of her dazed state, her eyes finally locking with mine, then it flickered to the instrument strapped to me. There was a distant look in them before she gave a small nod and followed me out of the room.

The fight echoed throughout the halls, glass shattering from behind, but I didn’t dare look back. Whatever was happening, it wasn’t good, and this instrument had something to do with it.

We soon emerged back into the main hall of the museum while I scanned around, trying to remember where the exits were.

The students looked at one another, seeming to be confused yet intrigued by what was happening now. The supervisors tried to get them to the nearest exit.

I soon spotted one to my right, nudging my head towards her.

“Come on, this way!” I said, going back into a sprint to guide her out.

Before I could even get my momentum back, a portal opened in front of us, making me skid to a halt. I put myself in front of Satomi.

Another Kitsune appeared, wearing the same uniform as the man from earlier. But this one, he appeared more grim.

Posture straight, confident, his fur the same color as the guy from earlier; but three tails more than the other and appeared older. They even almost looked the same. I wouldn’t be surprised if they were related.

More portals opened, and more of them emerged. Male and female Kitsune surrounded us. I counted a total of ten, their tails in different numbers and shades, but mostly a mix of gold and brown. Though their expressions were the same stoic ones.

This wasn’t good.

I stepped closer to Satomi, my hand clutching the strap and the item in my hand for the instrument as I assessed them. I have fought countless enemies, ranging from serpents to even my own kind. But, if these Kitsune were the same as that woman back where we came from, I don’t think I would be able to handle this on my own.

“Satomi,” I said, taking off the instrument and handing it to her, “hold this for me.”

She took it without a word, her eyes locking into the instrument almost in a trance. I let it be, knowing I had more pressing matters than asking her questions right now. I had to protect her and the instrument.

The Kitsune stood their ground, seeming to observe the whole interaction while I got ready and went into my fighting stance.

“Oni,” the man in front of me said, that same angered expression on his face. He looked like their leader based on his face, which looked as if it had seen years of battle. “You will step aside.”

“No, I don’t think so,” I said, glaring back.

“I am not suggesting, it is a command,” he declared, now drawing his katana and tails spreading.

The others followed suit, each unsheathing their weapons while I tried to think. I don’t know how they fight. We never encountered a Kitsune, nor do we have much information about them, except being master shapeshifters and musicians. Creatures skilled at magic—but the kind of magic they use, we don’t even know.

How am I suppose to win this?

A Kitsune lunged from my right, katana raised high. I rolled to the side, narrowly avoiding the blade, and kicked out hard, sending him stumbling backward—only to face another charging immediately behind.

I caught their wrist, spun, and shoved them into the one charging from my left.

Some aimed for Satomi—one of them two steps away from her. I simply kicked them aside, forcing them away while she distanced herself from them.

I didn’t want to hurt them. I believed what Uncle said about them—that they were allies. But they were all so relentless. They charged at me with vigor, pure animosity in their eyes and from the way they moved.

They were trying to force us away from the exit, and they were winning. Even almost backing us against the wall.

One had successfully cut my arm when I noticed what they were trying to do, making me frown as the blood seeped into my hoodie.

Really? I just bought this last weekend! With Kai’s money...

In return, as the same Kitsune aimed for me again, I was able to quickly step aside and disarm them, shoving them away.

They were getting quicker, coordinated that it was difficult to keep up. I could feel my muscles aching just trying to take them all together and keeping track. Heaving now as sweat trickled down my forehead.

My power wasn’t an option. I wouldn’t go to that decision… yet.

“Why are you all here?” I said, trying to get answers.

“None of it is your right to know, Oni,” a female Kitsune scowled.

I continued to fight, twisting her arm when she reached for Satomi before pushing her over to her team who was following after her. The two collided and tumbled.

Satomi, I noticed, still clutched the instrument close while staring at it with fascination written all over her eyes. What was she doing?

“This is my home,” I said, upping my game. “It’s my duty to protect it.”

“An Oni protecting a realm?” Another said, a male with a naginata. “Don’t make me laugh.”

He charged at me, but I successfully dodged away from him; another came after, though I was able to trip them with my leg when I ducked.

Great. Just what I needed—being surrounded by magical foxes in a museum after a classmate of mine and an instrument. Another day in Ninjago.

Just as I kept on fighting and pushing them back, a shade of blue from the corner of my eye caught my attention. Reflex flared as I used my elemental power. I summoned a barrier—solid, sure. But the instant the flame hit, a sharp sound split the air.

A crack. My barrier cracked

That wasn’t possible. It was just fire—how could a single, simple attack do that?

Another blast came at me. I threw my shield up to block it.

The moment it collided, the impact ripped through me, draining so much of my energy that I could barely breathe as it felt as if my body was burning. My legs trembled, nearly dropping to my knees.

But I held my ground, fists tightly balled, forcing myself to stand.

How were they doing this?

“Your determination is strong, but your wit is lacking… for an Oni,” their leader said.

I panted, shaking my head to keep my senses in the moment. I had to think. We had to get out of here. Fast.

From far ahead, my classmates seemed to have noticed the commotion, and they all now stood there stunned. Some had pulled out their phones, for sure putting it on a live stream.

I spotted Satomi’s friend amongst the crowd, a worried expression on her face as she stared at Satomi, who was behind me.

She was still distracted with the shamisen, noting how she slowly put it on and her fingers brushed against the strings.

My eyes flickered over to the crowd again, frowning.

Weren’t they supposed to be evacuating? Was staying for the drama more important than living?

“Last warning, Oni,” the man continued, the others standing their ground and surrounding us again.

I simply frowned, firming my stance. I couldn’t face them head-on, I’ll die if I do. Defense was the best option, I’ll just have to continue doing what I’ve been doing.

He scoffed, his hand hovering now on the blade. He did a quick movement on it, following the curve of his katana while his hand hovered above.

As he did so, and when he reached the tip—the blade burst into blue flames, consuming the steel as he gripped the handle of the weapon with both hands again. His stance screamed offense.

Well, I’m screwed.

I activated my power, using most of my energy to make another barrier that now surrounded both me and Satomi as he charged.

I hoped that it was enough to block it, enough to last for a second or two while I tried to think of another way to get us both out of here.

But with just one swipe of his katana, my barrier shattered like glass.

The shock ripped through me; my knees buckling as if the flame had set fire to my bones and lungs.

Gravity pulled me down from the sudden drain in energy, and I fell to my knees. I wheezed, trying to suck in as much air while I choked and coughed.

What was with that fire?

The man stood in front of me while I glared up at him, panting and heaving.

“Yoku tatakatta. Shikashi jyubun de wa nakatta.”

You fought well. But it wasn’t enough? Well, he sure was into dramatics.

He placed his katana on my neck, feeling that fire brush at my skin. It was warm, but it didn’t burn though it only drained more of my energy, and I almost fell flat to the ground.

He raised his katana high, aiming straight for my neck.

My mind screamed. Told me to move aside—roll, get out of there!

I tried using my power, but I was too weak. It just flickered—appearing for a second, then disappearing.

Shit.

From his shadow, I knew he was about to strike down, and I shut my eyes. Squeezing them tight as I heard the pounding of my heart.

I failed.

Just as I braced for it to happen, a sound came from behind me. A single note struck.

Gentle...

Calming...

And suddenly, energy surged through my body.

I gasped—alive again, like I’d just meditated for hours in a single breath. Rejuvenated and ready to fight, to the point it felt as if I can take all of them down. That made me frown.

My head snapped behind me, eyes flying open, only to see that Satomi had struck the instrument, and the note lingered in the air.

The room had quieted down, and the Kitsune were frozen on their spots as they all stared at her.

Some even seemed like they were on the verge of falling to their knees.

“Blessed Mother,” their leader muttered, noting how his hold on his katana had faltered and his arms began to lower.

Taking advantage of the moment of pause, I rolled away, swiping his feet off balance with my own.

I instantly stood, grabbing Satomi by her wrist and forcing us both to run towards the entrance. I reached into my pocket, putting on my earpiece.

Should’ve done that earlier.

“Hello? Does anyone copy?” I called.

There was a staticky silence for a moment before a voice came in.

“Lloyd?”

“Nya,” I released a relieved sigh. Thank the First. “I need some backup in the museum.”

“What’s happening?” Zane joined.

“There’s some mess,” I said, unsure of how to explain the situation without sounding stupid. “Let’s just say we have unexpected visitors. The Kitsune are here.”

“Kitsune?” Jay shouted, making me flinch. “Aren’t they just from… stories?”

“Well, they aren’t. They’re here, fighting, and trying to kill us. I need you all here. ASAP.”

“We’re on our way. Please hold a bit longer,” Zane said as the comm soon died to silence.

It won’t be long.

I glanced back, seeing Satomi still following me. She seemed back to reality now, her hand keeping the instrument close to her. “We’re almost there. My team is coming,” I said, trying to reassure her.

Her expression was blank, unreadable. I had never seen her like this before—quiet and deep in thought that she barely acknowledged anything.

What was happening right now?

The exit got nearer, a few more sprints and we’ll be able to burst outside. But, of course, somehow that always never happens. The leader appeared again; it was so quick I would’ve mistaken that he had teleported with his katana leveled to my neck.

I knew for a fact that I wouldn’t be able to dodge that, and we were still in mid run.

Damn it, and here I thought I knew everything already.

Just in time, the woman I saw earlier with Satomi appeared; she pushed him out of the way with her hands blazing with her own flames.

She was collected and calm as if she hadn’t been fighting earlier. Her nails were now longer that they looked like claws. She whipped her attention to me. I flinched, coming to a halt.

“You do not have the power to fight these enemies,” she said, her fangs showing that I didn’t notice earlier. “We are different. None in your records, but simple tales that are not even true. Your elemental powers are nothing to us, as you are not trained to counter ours.”

I frowned. “What do you mean not—”

She pushed Satomi and I aside, Satomi almost tumbling over but I caught her in time and helped her gain her balance again. The woman blocked the leader’s attack, the blade between her hands as he seemed to struggle to push it forward.

“Shūei Miho,” the man seethed. “You are quite late to appear. Has my son held you down?”

“Aoki is a formidable opponent,” Miho said calmly. “Strong and intelligent, but he still lacks control of his arrogance and emotions, Ginko Isamu. You, being the leader of this quadrant and his father, you must teach him proper control.”

Isamu scoffed, pushing back and successfully pried the blade free from her grip. It still blazed with the fire, but it didn’t seem to have affected or appeared to worry Miho.

A familiar form passed from above, causing a looming shadow that passed down from the glass roofs. Samurai X.

Pixal!

“Lloyd,” the comms started again, “I’m outside.”

“Right,” I said, turning to Miho. “My teammate’s here, she can take Satomi out of here.”

Miho nodded, looking over to Satomi with a nod of her head. “Ike!”

Satomi hesitated, clutching the instrument closer to her. They stared at one another, a silent exchange as if one wanted answers and the other commanded her to stop standing still. I inspected both of them; Miho’s eyes narrowed more. Satomi stared back as she slowly began to walk backwards.

But a Kitsune suddenly appeared, blocking her way and making her step back to us again. I stepped in front of her as the others began to surround us again, cornering together.

Miho snarled, her eyes darting from one to another. “Hontou ni uzari!”

“It is what we have been instructed to do. We are only following orders,” Isamu said.

“From Hiroshi-dono?” Miho shouted. “You all need to stop. This is futile!”

Hiroshi-dono? Who was that?

Isamu ignored her, continuing, “Give us the shamisen and the girl.”

That made me shift closer to Satomi.

Miho hummed, relaxing as she puffed out her chest; the flames on her hands disappeared. “Then precautions must be made.”

Without even being able to process it, the instrument that Satomi had been holding close to her had disappeared and was now in Miho’s arms.

I froze, surprised at how quick she was than she had let on. I noticed Satomi tense up, having the same expression as Miho held it against her.

The Kitsune surrounding us appeared to have frozen. I noticed them grip their weapons tightly, even Isamu had become rigid when Miho held it.

Whatever that thing held, it meant a great deal to them. This was the second time they had frozen like this.

“Let us see if the shamisen still grants me my last wish to put you all away,” Miho said, raising the bachi, ready to strike.

“Stop her!” Isamu shouted.

They charged. A dozen of them.

My instincts kicked in—throwing up a barrier around us three. The energy crackled, just enough to hold, or I hoped it would. But before the Kitsune could even get close, Miho struck the instrument.

The sound echoed throughout the whole museum, and the building had gone still. The strings of the instrument glowed in gold as it worked its magic, and some kind of portal appeared below each of them.

They fell deep, each one caught off guard. Isamu was the only one who moved away on time, going back into hard ground as he glared at us.

The sound of the shamisen continued to ring, but it began to fade alongside the portals as they came to a close. The two stared at one another, the tension palpable as Isamu backed away slowly.

I watched the interaction, not missing a thing. His eyes flickered to each of us. And when they landed on me, his glare deepened. I stood my ground, staring right back at him. He scoffed, turning around as he sheathed his weapon.

But as he turned, I caught something glimmer he was pulling out. Something gold. I recognized it as a suzu bell, something that Uncle sometimes ties around the monastery.

His was attached to a red string that had been tucked under his belt. I frowned as he appeared to be cautious when taking it out from the way he tilted his body a bit to his right, almost as if blocking it from view.

He flicked it, but no sound came from it. In an instant, another portal appeared in front of him.

The moment he stepped in, the portal closed.

A whole second passed that none of us dared to say a word. Satomi stood beside me, breathing hard, her eyes narrowed in the direction where the man had disappeared. I now turned to look to my left.

Miho stood tall, clutching the shamisen; her hands paler than they already were. But I noted the way she breathed unevenly, as if her playing that one note had taken most of her energy.

My eyes squinted at the shamisen, staring at it before it flickered back to Miho. She seemed to have noticed as she glanced at me, making us stare at one another for a moment.

I looked away, glancing at my hands, feeling the adrenaline finally coming down, and the ghost of how I suddenly felt all that energy rush back to me. A feeling that almost made me believe I could’ve taken down hundreds of those Kitsune on my own in that split second. Even though she had said that I couldn’t.

Then, what in the hell was that?

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 6

Unanswered Questions

The police arrived ten minutes later, closing the museum once again as they began their investigation. I stood a few paces beside Satomi who was sitting on the steps of the stairs with a distant look on her face.

She had been like that for the past few minutes—silent and unmoving even when the breeze gave a little chill. She didn’t even shiver when I felt it. She didn’t even seemed to care when the med team had arrived and gave her a blanket. The only movement she did was hold onto it tighter. Her friend stayed beside her, Miho just a few distance behind.

The med team had come to me to treat my wound, forcing me to take off my hoodie and just hold onto it as they wrapped my injured arm with bandage. It wasn’t huge, just a scratch on my upper arm and a couple of smaller ones from being grazed by blades. But, it sure ruined my favorite white shirt with blood. By the time they finished, they focused on the rest.

I wanted to ask Satomi if she was okay—to talk to her about what happened and what caused this. But I knew better than to pry on her when she was at this state. It was new to see her like this, she had always been in the moment that she wouldn’t miss a single detail whenever the two of us would practice after class.

Even the littlest of things she would notice, like the small movement of the wind. It always caught me off guard whenever her eyes would dart over the window because it was slightly open that I didn’t even noticed that it was.

Whatever happened back there, something had triggered her.

Miho had retrieved her large coat, hiding her fox features, mostly her nine tails as she was able to make her ears disappear as if they never existed. She still held the shamisen, and I noticed her hands shaking as she clutched the instrument. I didn’t mention anything about it, choosing to leave her while I waited for the others.

I came to conclusions on talking to the others about this first before moving forward. Best to get them on track rather than letting myself know all of it.

That shamisen had something more to it than just play songs. No doubt about it. Pixal had gathered my classmates by the bus, waiting for their parents to arrive while she tried to keep them calm as I had instructed her to do.

She wanted to check up on me first, but I declined and instead told her to prioritize the others. Perfectly, she didn’t argue further.

Soon, another police car approached, one that I recognized. I quickly straightened myself up and brushed my hair back before going down the steps. The commissioner got out of his car, looking around before settling at me with a sigh.

Here we go.

“What happened this time?” he said, closing the door as his mustache twitched in irritation—probably annoyed at being pulled away from working on his boat again.

“That is something we still need to… discuss,” I said, glancing over to Miho then to Satomi who still hadn’t looked up as I met him halfway. I faced the commissioner again. “It’s a topic we’re not sure how to talk about and something entirely new to us as well.”

“Wonderful! More unexplainable things,” he said, crossing his arms. “What is it this time? Ghosts? A new group of Serpentine? More Oni?”

“Kitsune, sir” I said.

That made him stop, arching a brow. “What now? Kitsune? These things you ninjas get yourselves into are getting weirder and weirder.”

“We are aware and we apologize for it, Commissioner. It’s not our intention to create so much mess.”

“I know that much, kid. I know you and your group means well. But you know not everyone here understands that.”

I scanned around, noting some officers eyeing me and shaking their heads before going back to their work. Of course, there were still some that hated us. And me. Not everyone forgets and forgives about what Dad did before. And the amount of property damage that happened and... so on.

He kept his eyes on me before sighing. “Anything else? Any injured?”

“No, sir. No one else got hurt.”

“Good,” he gave me a pat on my good arm. “You did good, kid.”

I opened my mouth to say thank you, when the others arrived. Each one of them jumping off their vehicles and running towards us. The commissioner stepped aside, heading over to the crime scene. Nya was the first to respond, pulling off the mask of her gi.

“Are there more?”

I shook my head. “They retreated, for now.”

Her face was hard as ever, nodding. “Good, that means we have a few seconds of peace.”

“We apologize for not being able to arrive sooner, Lloyd,” Zane said, coming up the steps as well as the others began to gather around.

“No worries, I know you guys were busy with your own things, and the attack was uncalled for,” I said, looking at each of them. “But, I did get some help.”

Jay gave me a questioning look. “Help? From who?”

I turned around, glancing over to Miho who had her eyes trained on Satomi and her friend. Her gaze were oddly soft, yet serious as if ready to jump in again if another attack happens. She had been hovering on her for a while now, almost in a protective gesture.

“A certain someone that I hope will answer our questions,” I muttered, looking back to them as the others followed my gaze before turning to me again.

“Her? Who she?” Jay pointed.

Zane, who had not looked away from her as his eyes had now turned blue, spoke up, “Mihozami Karagu, one of the museum’s curators. She mostly focuses on the music exhibit, specifically on the collections of historical instruments over the centuries. Some of those collections go way back since the beginning of the First Spinjitzu Master and, looks like, she was able to obtain a replica of the flute we used against the Serpentines.

“Thanks to her hard work and using the museum’s funds, she got Cyrus Borg’s help to make it, but it doesn’t seem to play. It’s pure display and for history reasons,” he blinked, his eyes going back to a darker shade that most would consider normal—thanks to his nindroid capabilities.

“Okay? What she got to do with it?” Jay continued, giving me a questioning look.

“Well, I think it’s best to talk about it back in the monastery with Sensei and Mom present,” I said. “She’s not just a museum curator, she’s more than that. And the instrument she’s holding… there’s something about it that she’s so fixated on protecting it at all cost. Even Satomi seemed to have gone in a daze seeing it.”

“Well, she seems like she still is,” Nya said, glancing at Satomi then to me. “Did you feel it?”

I shook my head. “Nothing. I just thought it was just a regular… what is it called again?”

“Shamisen,” Zane said, now staring back at Miho. He blinked, a frown on his face. “There is nothing about it in my records. That specific one that she is holding.”

“Seriously?” Cole raised a brow.

Zane gave a firm nod. “Positive.”

Cole sighed, shaking his head.

“Great! More mysteries that we didn’t ask for,” Jay groaned. “Didn’t we had enough with the whole situation with the Oni? Like, seriously! Give us a break.”

“We had enough of a break. We know this peace won’t last forever,” I pointed out. “This is our duty, and we will see it through.”

“Gee, what got you riled up, Lloyd?” Nya said, crossing her arms. “It’s as if whatever happened in there had put you on edge.”

I sighed, looking away as I glanced at Satomi, she was shaking her head at whatever her friend told her as I watched for a moment. I was on edge, and I wouldn’t deny it.

Everything that had happened in that museum was something far more serious than I thought. I felt useless in there. It felt like I didn’t do my job right—my duty as the Green Ninja right. I wasn’t even able to protect Satomi properly. We had to be constantly saved by something else that wasn’t me. The shamisen and Miho.

When did I become so weak? The Green Ninja was never supposed to falter. This had never happened before. Uncle never mentioned anything about the possibilities of being able to counter our elemental powers that easily, to the point I lost all my energy from one simple swipe of a blazing katana.

“Um, hellooo? Earth to Lloyd,” Kai waved a hand in front of my face, making me snap out of it as I looked back to the others. “Wow, you really are going off. Need help to knock you back to your senses?”

“Sorry,” I shook my head, blinking to get my eyes clear again.

“Perhaps a quick break is required,” Zane said, giving me a worried look.

And he was scanning me... great.

“No, we have so many things to do, we can—”

“We’ll take care of everything until we get back to the monastery,” Cole said, cutting me off. He walked up to me, placing a hand on my shoulder. “Come on, Lloyd, just a quick break. We’ll watch the others until everyone gets picked up by their parents and safe. You’ve done enough for today, man.”

I stared at them, looking from one person to another. They were all giving me those same worried expressions that kept appearing on their faces for the last few days.

Some of them, even Mom, had been telling me lately that I’ve been forcing myself to work so much. I doubt it. It’s what I do.

They have their own responsibilities, but they don’t feel the weight of everything being placed on me, and I was glad. I didn’t want them to feel the burden of always being looked up at and expected to always protect everyone; constantly being pictured as the person who was immune to everything and always had the answers.

After all, I’ve been chosen to be in the position I was in now and I would act like it.

I closed my eyes, giving in as I nodded. “Just until everyone’s safe and picked up.”

Nya gave a small smile, patting me on the shoulder. “Go sit. We’ll talk to the students. Do you want us to talk to Miho as well?”

I shook my head. “I’ll take care of Miho. You guys check up on the others.”

They gave each other silent nods before they went over to Pixal who was now questioning my classmates.

Kai stayed for a moment, squinting his eyes. “You owe me twenty bucks, by the way.”

“What?”

His eyes dropped at the ripped hoodie in my hands, then lifted back to my face with a raised brow. Of course he would know.

“You really think I wouldn’t notice? I check my balance, you idiot. You think I don’t? It was less than before. You have your own, why not use it?”

I shrugged, fidgetting with the hoodie while trying to hold down the grin from coming up my lips. “Saw your card lying around... took advantage. Besides, it was just a hoodie. I chose the cheapest.”

He sighed heavily, rubbing his temple. “Look, if you wanna buy something and use my card, at least let me know. Y’know for a fact I’ll give it to you. ”

“I’ll keep that in mind for next time.”

He shook his head, heading for the others as he placed his hands on his hips. “When you do go, tag me along. Skylor recommended me a place we can buy good stuff. Need a couple new ones anyways.”

I chuckled, nodding while watching as the others interacted with my classmates. Most of them, the students, were easing up now that they saw them. And some looked more excited than they probably should be.

With a silent sigh, I shifted a little and looked back up at the museum. The workers were outside, being investigated by the officers as they took notes at whatever they were saying.

The events replayed again in my mind, making me have mental notes of the reactions of each Kitsune when they saw me, especially that guy Aoki. All of them had the same expression, anger and disgust, even though they barely knew me and I stated that this realm was my home to protect. They didn’t believed a word I said and only scoffed.

Uncle didn’t say anything what was the reason for their kind to hate us. Sure, the Oni were known for their destructive side unlike the Dragons; but it seemed as if there was some kind of dispute that happened when Uncle, specifically, said that the Kitsune kept to themselves.

As if the Oni disrupted their peace.

I shook my head, I was getting too ahead of myself. I’m not even certain if that was the case. We didn’t had enough information for me to get into that conclusion. Though, there was only one Kitsune that didn’t give me glares, even after the chaos.

I glanced over to Miho, who was speaking to her fellow colleagues as she nodded and gave them a small, tight smile.

She took a slight step back when one of them reached out a hand, but they didn’t seem to notice as she let them put their hand on her shoulder—only making me catch her pull the shamisen closer to her. I frowned, wondering why she didn’t push me aside like the rest of them.

A movement from the corner of my eye made me peek to my left. Satomi had stood, leaving her friend on the steps as she excused herself, and made her way to my direction.

Wait... my direction?

I tensed as she got closer, making me roll my shoulders back and dusted off my clothes.

Was she going to call me off? Say something about how many times we could’ve died? Maybe I should apologize for not being able to do my job right. It was my fault after all.

“Lloyd.”

“Yes?” I squeaked, then cleared my throat. Smooth, Lloyd, very smooth.

Her expression was unreadable for a moment, almost as if assessing me. She does that sometimes, squinting her eyes like she’s trying to understand what I was feeling—and she does get it right most of the time.

“Thank you,” she finally said.

I blinked, opening then closing my mouth. That I didn’t expect.

“For getting us out of there,” she continued. “I’m sorry I didn’t help as much... I know I kept zoning out and not cooperating.”

“No, no! It’s fine. Those things can get a bit shocking, I’m not surprised that you wouldn’t know what to do,” I said, giving her a small smile. Thank the First, she didn’t seem to hate me. “But, hey, we got out in one piece.”

She nodded, glancing over to Miho as she fell into silence again.

I pressed my lips together, noticing her expression as I softened my tone. “You okay?”

“Huh?” She looked back at me.

“Still trying to wrap your head on everything?”

“Yes. Sorry about that.”

She was apologizing way too much than she needed to. “No, seriously, like I said it was something out of the blue. You shouldn’t apologize as much, I understand you.”

And it was my fault, anyways.

I took a deep breath in and exhaled as I noticed the silence coming in again. “So, how are you holding up so far? Feeling a tad bit better?”

Satomi gave a tiny nod. “A little.”

I hummed, fidgeting with my sweater. “By the way, thanks for not letting the others know that I was in this field trip. I didn’t want to cause some kind of chaos while being in there.”

“Well, it just happened. The mess that we just went through, I mean.”

I chuckled at her statement as I shrugged. “I guess everywhere I go is chaos.”

A smile came up her lips, looking away again as her attention settled back to Miho. I observed her, noticing the shaky breath she released. She had been glancing at her so many times now, it was as if there were questions that’s been flooding her mind since earlier. I could tell she hesitated from the way she kept shifting on her spot. I reached out a hand, but retracted as my hands turned into fists at my side.

I should just leave her alone, I didn’t want to make her more of a mess than she already was.

But, then again...

“Hey, um...” I began, rubbing  the back of my neck.

Her eyes snapped back to me, silent as if waiting for me to continue.

I swallowed, the pavement looking much more interesting right now than ever. “I know we don’t really talk as much besides after class, but after what happened… do you want to exchange numbers? Just in case something happens, and so that you can call me if there’s an emergency.”

By the First, I sound stupid.

There was a silence that came between us, and I saw her fidget again when I looked back up at her. She wiped her hands on the sides of her thighs, then nodded. “Okay.”

Oh, wow, she said okay. I gave her a reassuring smile as I pulled out my phone. “Just in case.”

She nodded, taking out her phone as well. We exchanged numbers, listening to her as she gave them to me. I added her to my contacts and put her name as I gave her mine.

“There,” I said, gazing back up at her, “that should…” I stopped, noticing her attention at Miho again.

My eyes flickered over to the woman then to her. She’s really that fascinated with her.

I noticed her rocking back and forth as if trying to make a decision to go and talk to her. But, before she could even take a step forward, there was a honk that caused the two of us to look to where it came from. A man and woman came out of a black SUV, making their way to our direction.

“Satomi!” The woman called.

“Kā-san,” Satomi muttered, almost weak as her mother embraced her.

Her mother pulled away, looking her up and down. “Are you okay? Are you hurt?”

Satomi shook her head. “I’m fine.”

“Nakidori,” it was her dad now, going beside them as he cupped her face. “I’m glad you’re well.”

Her mother glanced over at me, now noticing me as she turned to my direction and bowed deeply. Satomi’s dad did the same, soon followed by Satomi herself. “Thank you for protecting her.”

I shook my head rapidly, surprised at the sudden bow and my hands flailing around. “It’s no problem! It’s my job to do so.”

“Still, we are grateful. If you ever need anything, feel free to look for us. We are in your debt.”

“No, please! It’s what I do.”

The three of them soon stood up straight as she faced Satomi again. “Ikuzo?”

Satomi nodded as the two of them began to make their way back to their car. I observed them, seeing her slightly hunched stance from her normal straightened poster as the two talked.

Satomi’s father still stood in his place as he looked down at me; he was slightly bit taller that I had to look up. He pushed his glasses up and gave me a nod as if another thank you. I just did the same, doing a small, respectful bow as he followed the other two.

I watched as her parents get back inside the car while Satomi’s friend go to her, giving her a hug before stepping back to let her inside the car. They waved goodbye to one another as her father begins to drive them off.

I really hoped she would feel better. I didn’t know her that well as we don’t really hang out after school, but I knew her enough to worry about her. I sighed, ruffling my hair a little and pushing it back to brush them away from my eyes.

“You have questions.”

I tensed, my head snapping to my right to see Miho now standing beside me. When did she get here? I didn’t even heard her approach.

Her eyes flickered to me from the corner of her eye. “You will have them, Oni.”

Again, with that title, but her tone was less of disgust. “Why are you here?” I began, now facing her as I frowned. “Why did they come here? Why were they coming after Satomi and the instrument? Who—”

“You will get your answers,” she cut in. “No one here knows who and what I am. So, ask them later, boy.”

I pressed my lips together, nodding as I simply stood beside her in silence. If that’s what she wanted, fine, I will entertain her. “Whatever happened in there, you swear to answer all of our questions and tell us the truth when we get to the monastery?”

Another pause before she nodded. “You have my word, Oni. But I must warn you, some of it you will not like.”

No doubt she was right about that. I don’t doubt that whatever she had in store for us would be something we wouldn’t like. What scared me most was that... I might already know.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 7

The Song Beneath the Name

I stared out the window as we traveled in silence, the radio off as usual, while I watched thoughtlessly as the grayish waves of the wind passed by. My eyes grew heavy the more I stared off without blinking, but my mind ran fast with the memories of what had happened.

I had held Shikisha in my arms—the most intricate, well-crafted shamisen that I had ever seen. I had held it and felt the power it possessed. It was familiar, yet I couldn’t answer how or why. The itch on my fingers remained, a restless need to see it again, to strum it, to feel the strings beneath my fingertips still there.

Its power was something I couldn’t describe, but I knew that what I normally see around me enhanced. The fatigue in Lloyd’s waves were hard to ignore. I could see how much he was struggling and seeking air when he fell to the floor.

It had spiked. His heartbeat fast, and the usual green of his waves had dulled. The melody of it echoed in my thoughts when I saw them, and I just strummed the notes I saw. My mind later had blurred, shocked at the vibration that went through my veins from the instrument as I watched his strength return in an instant.

The shamisen in my dreams instantly came to mind, hearing the ghost of the song the woman always played in that peaceful scenery. I should’ve tried playing that melody on the shamisen when I had the chance—but I had froze, and I couldn’t get my body to move to what I demanded it to do.

But then, the words that man, Aoki, repeated in my head: “It wouldn’t work, kogitsune. I can feel you trying to read me.”

I pressed my lips together, squinting at nothing outside as I kept following the waves. There was something he knew. Something important that might be connected to my dream.

Or even myself.

My eyes trailed over to my parents, landing on my mom on the passenger seat. The memory from yesterday of her wanting to say something brushed it off last minute, now prodding at me. Her waves were calm right now with a slight erratic movement, almost as if she were only settling down after hearing what happened in the museum on the news. Dad’s, as ever, was calm.

There was something they weren’t telling.

The car halted, parking up on our driveway and rumbling to a stop. I unbuckled myself and stepped out, heading to the front door as I took the spare keys in my backpack and went in. The familiar space did little to calm me down as I took off my shoes, placed my keys on the porcelain bowl where I always leave them, and switched into some house slippers before heading up to my room.

With a heavy sigh and putting the bag to its usual corner, I flopped into bed and shut my eyes. I could hear the muffled conversations of my parents from below, followed by the door closing. My mind still ran. Questions upon questions flooded my head that it began to ache.

Who were those people? How do they know me? Why do they want the shamisen? Who was that Miho person?

A knock pulled me out of my thoughts as the door creaked open, seeing the soft patters of colorless waves that radiated inside from the knock and footsteps as Mom came in.

“Daijōbu?”

I nodded, unable to form any words as she stood there. Dad appeared from behind her, leaning against the door frame as he adjusted his glasses and let me see his dark brown eyes. If he was my dad. I do love them dearly. I have known them for eighteen years, but… were they even my real family?

Having those kinds of thoughts was rude, I was aware. But, after everything that had happened, it seemed easier to question everything right now.

“Do you want something to eat? I can whip some kakitamajiru or harusame for you. I know it makes you feel better.”

That sounded nice. Eating something warm and letting it fill your stomach had always had a calming effect, especially kakitamajiru.

But there was one thing that I wanted more than anything.

“Mom, what did you want to tell me yesterday?”

A slight change in her waves caught my attention; I even saw Dad’s soft ones spike up. There was a difference between them; Mom had more of a spike in hers than Dad’s, which made sense when it came to their characteristics. It always showed who was the calmest and who was more insistent.

Mom and Dad glanced at one another, and I noted how Mom intertwined her hands while Dad still had his usual composed stance, but I can see the jumps had worsened. A couple seconds passed, Mom glanced back at me when Dad had given her a nod.

“Satomi,” she began, walking inside my room and sitting on the edge of my bed. She glanced over to her shamisen that I kept in here with me. She never minded it, in fact, she was proud whenever I had it with me.

“There’s something we wanted to speak to you about. You’re old enough, and we think it’s time we should tell you.”

I sat up properly, facing her. My heart was beating faster, and my hands sweating as I grabbed a pillow and pulled it close. “What is it?”

Dad came in as well, sitting beside Mom. I swallowed, looking from one person to another. Dad cleaned his glasses for a moment with his shirt, a bit longer than usual. Mom kept picking on her nails as she glanced at me then to Dad who put on his glasses again. Another silence came between them as they shared a look, then she faced me.

Mom opened her mouth, but nothing came out. She tried a couple of times, and still nothing. She shook her head as her gaze broke away from me and to her lap. Dad wrapped an arm around her, rubbing her arm as he instead looked at me.

“The truth is, Satomi,” he started, pausing for a moment as his waves shifted and he took a deep breath in. “We adopted you.”

My breath hitched, heart skipping a beat, vision blurring as the truth finally came out.

That topic had crossed my mind several times. It had started since the second time I had told them about my situation of seeing the waves of every little sound and element. They didn’t had any answers to it, only bringing me to the doctor as a solution—and I learned that it wasn’t in their family history.

Not only that, I had the same dream twice in a row in one week when I was still a freshman in high school, when it came to the woman playing the shamisen.

My parents’ features were softer than mine, and it was evident in every single family photo we took. Even my own grandparents said that I looked like a whole different person than them, maybe already hinting me something that I just brushed off.

From my sharp eyes, how they kept mentioning that they seemed to have a hint of gold in it when the sun hit them, and—as they mentioned—my beauty molded by the gods. Always saying that if a fox had turned into a human, they would always say that I was the perfect example.

And then, there was today…

After what Aoki had said, it worsened. How those other Kitsune had tried to get me and the shamisen.

He knew what I was doing, trying to read his emotions, and he was aware of what I was trying to do. He even felt it. That was enough confirmation that whatever I had was more than some kind of illness.

But these moments with my parents. I’ve stayed with these people for all my life, and they were the people who stood as my family. Not my real parents, whoever they were.

It was them. These two. I was a Kura. The one thing Dad kept telling me to always be proud of. A name that he said we should store and honor, and to never let anyone disrespect it.

Our name.

Our lineage.

I blinked rapidly, my nose running as I lowered my gaze. I shouldn’t be upset. I had the hunch already, but I can’t help but deny it. It was too hard not to.

A pair of hands took mine; those soft yet a bit calloused hands, showing the weariness of working around the house and constantly scrubbing our clothes clean. I stared at Mom’s hands before looking up, seeing tears in her eyes as she held mine tightly. Some had already run down her cheeks.

“It’s okay, Satomi-chan,” she said, her thumbs rubbing the back of my hands. Those words sounded more like for her than for me. “Daijōbu, ne.”

“Kā-san.”

“Oh, my baby,” she pulled me into a hug as I held her tightly, shutting my eyes and burying my face in her shoulders.

She caressed my back, humming a soft tune that she always sang to me when I was a child. Always soothing me and bringing me back to sleep whenever I awake with a nightmare.

That song had embedded itself into my life. That was the song I knew. The song I played on my instruments, sometimes as warm-ups, or simply because I wanted to see and hear its waves to watch its comforting patterns.

These were the people who had composed that song just for me—Mom mostly. These were the people I deemed my parents, and yet… they weren’t.

The ache in my chest made it harder for me to breath as I hiccuped; my body shuddering every time I tried to get some air into my system. Mom continued to caress me, giving me soft kisses on the forehead while I attempted to calm down.

I’ve always adored the warmth they give me, the comfort that I constantly search for when I was upset without explanation. This was one of them. But as much as I wanted to bury myself in it, the itch on my fingers and the feeling of that shamisen kept nudging me out.

“We’re sorry we didn’t tell you this sooner, nakidori,” Dad said, moving closer to us as he put a hand on my shoulder.

I shook my head, not sure myself if I was shaking my head to reassure him or shaking my head at the revelation.

All that I wanted to know was the truth, now here it was. And I had no idea what to say. After a moment of silence and Mom continuing to rub my back, I began to calm down as I sat straight again, wiping my eyes.

If this was my truth, then I had to know a few more things.

“How did you guys… adopt me?” I began, glancing up at them, and caught their softened gazes.

They glanced at one another as if having a silent conversation on how they should start and where to start.

“Well,” Dad began, sitting beside Mom who held his hand, “you were just one day there on our steps.”

I stared, trying to see if they were lying or not. But their waves had now calmed down, slightly back to their normal patterns.

Just on the steps? I was left there by who?

“You were like a gift to us sent by the gods themselves,” Mom continued, a small smile on her face while her eyes glistened again. “We were at our lowest at that time.”

“We had always planned on having children,” Dad said as I noticed him squeeze Mom’s hand, a small gleam in his eyes present. “We planned it for months. We wanted at least two or three. But even how many times we tried, nothing happened. We went to the doctor a few months later and asked about it. What the doctor told us wasn’t... pleasant.”

They looked at one another, Mom glancing down as she wiped her eyes again. Dad rubbed a hand on her back. A slight shift in his emotion caught my attention, and I saw a small glimpse of guilt.

This was the first time I was hearing about their situation, the fact that they’re unable to have children. I knew what they were talking about and the condition they were in.

I clenched my jaw. My chest ached as I stared at the couple who had raised me. For the first time in my life, for my entire life spent with them, I was able to see who they truly were:

A couple who simply wanted a big family.

I wouldn’t deny it—Dad had a stable job, and Mom could stay home, though she still took clients as a financial planner. I lived in a life that many families wanted, and I was an only child—which explained why I didn’t have any siblings.

What else would I have ever wanted? This was a life any child would’ve wished for, as they can buy anything they want with just permission from their parents.

My thoughts suddenly shifted to the shamisen and that hunting song in my dreams.

“We had planned for everything,” Mom said. “We had thought that if we wanted more than two children, we would get a larger house. But we wanted to stay here for a moment longer. This room—” she looked around the room “—was supposed to be for our first child. We weren’t sure if it was going to be a boy or a girl, but we didn’t care. We began to buy cribs, decorations, and painted this room a color that was good for both genders.” Her body shook, cupping her mouth and shut her eyes.

“We kept praying to whatever god there was in this world,” Dad continued after a second pause. “We prayed to have one. Even a single one would be enough for us. That led to you.”

Mom finally looked at me again, nodding. “This is true, Sato. It was as if a god had heard our prayers and given us you. A beautiful girl in a basket, bundled up warmly with no letter or no name of who you are.” She took my hands. “We tried to know where you came from and who your parents could possibly be, but we found nothing. When you were a year old, we took you in.”

I looked down at our intertwined hands. She squeezed it while rubbing her thumbs soothingly on the back.

Whoever left me on the steps of this couple had no intention of getting found. They left me here for my parents to find, and I couldn’t help but have a feeling that they didn’t just choose these two randomly but with intention.

If I’m right about having the possibility of Kitsune blood in my veins (if ever), whoever left me here did it for a reason without mindlessly handing me over to this family.

As I looked at the two of them again, Mom’s red eyes and Dad’s gentle smile, I finally figured it out. They didn’t know anything about my possible connection to those magical beings.

They said it themselves, they just saw me on their steps one day in a basket with no clue who delivered me there.

No trail, no information on who and what I was. I truly didn’t know who I was.

“Sato,” Mom called softly, making me snap out of my thoughts, “are you okay? Is it too much?”

My smile wavered, but I held it. “I’m okay, Mom. Just trying to wrap my head around it.”

She gave a look that I recognized that she didn’t fully believe me, but she just nodded. She stood, followed by Dad. “I’ll make some soup for you, okay? You rest and get yourself together again.” She leaned and kissed my forehead. “I love you, Satomi Kura.”

“I love you, too, kā-chan,” I smiled, turning to Dad. “Love you, too, tō-san.”

He nodded, leaning as well to kiss my forehead. “Rest, little nakidori.”

“Hai.”

The two of them stood, heading for the door; Mom gave me a final smile before closing it behind her softly. I could hear the faint murmurs behind the door, catching a few words about me handling the news well just as they expected, and Dad saying something about me being a good kid.

I lay back down on my bed, letting out a deep breath and closing my eyes as I tried to wrap my thoughts around everything. It was hard to process, I would admit, especially with everything I knew that my parents didn’t.

My eyes darted over to my bag, suddenly remembering that I had left my phone in there. With a heavy weight on my shoulders, I dragged myself over to it as I rummaged inside.

Soon, I found my phone after some effort, unlocking the screen as I saw some worried texts from our group chat. I figured Mika had told them, so I just sent a quick text of reassurance, not wanting to worry them with more news about my adoption.

I went back to bed, staring at my screen for a moment before opening my gallery.

Family photos scrolled past—trips across Ninjago, deserts and parks, lazy coffee mornings. Some group pictures with friends, grins wide in Chelsey’s loud eighteenth birthday. Those were days to remember and reminisce about; I couldn’t help but chuckle.

I paused at a group photo. Senior year. Us, all smiling by our lockers. Yuna had brought our favorite drinks from a coffee shop we constantly visit, and we were showing it to the camera as if they were the best thing ever to exist—Chelsey having her signature kissy-face.

A soft smile tugged up my lips as I stared at it.

This was before then. Before all of this chaos. Before the truth.

Simple, nothing to worry about, like everything was how it was supposed to be. The vision of that shamisen and its constant appearance was nothing but a dream. But I should’ve known better.

I swallowed the lump in my throat as my eyes began to sting.

What was I supposed to do with everything that I have now known? It’s like I barely knew myself at this point, not like before. Not like how I remembered it. How am I supposed to act now that I’m deep in this?

With a heavy sigh, I was about to turn off my phone when a familiar green hoodie caught my attention in the background. I narrowed my eyes, zooming in and instantly recognizing it was Lloyd.

I hadn’t even realized that we had accidentally taken a picture of him trying to get away from a crowd of students trying to get autographs and pictures.

For goodness’ sake, he wore a green hoodie that can be seen from miles away, what did he expect? Then again, he learned over time not to do that, but he can be stubborn. Again, his choice. Ninjago was a free country... in its own way.

I let out a soft huff for not noticing it sooner, but then it suddenly occurred to me.

There was one person who could possibly answer everything I wanted to know. And that one person was in the possession of Lloyd and his group of ninjas. No doubt Miho was there with them.

I sat up, instantly going through my contacts, scrolling past a list of names before landing at Lloyd’s. His name glowed as I stared at it, almost as if enticing me to do it. Click it.

After a whole second of staring, I pressed it, and that green call button appeared. I directed my thumb to it, but stopped, my finger hovering just a few inches.

My heart began to pound in my ears, louder than the soft shuffling of leaves and the constant honking of cars muffled by the walls of my home.

Loud, too loud. I swore I could even see the waves of my own heart.

With a shake of my head, I exited out of my contacts and plugged my phone in to charge.

I stared at the floor. What was I thinking, going to call Lloyd for that? He just handed it to me in case there was an emergency. This was personal, not some life-or-death situation that would just waste his time.

Wanting to distract myself, I stood and headed out of my room, coming to the conclusion to help Mom make some kakitamajiru.

Knowing myself, I knew for a fact I wouldn’t be able to rest without thinking of being able to make that phone call and ask that simple question of whether Miho was there. I should just let it be and let them handle everything.

Yeah, that’s what I would do. Leave everything as it was. Let the professionals take care of it.

Yeah, that should be swell…

And yet, I kept going back to my phone and staring at his contact. Unable to shake the feeling that it was already my burden to bear.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 8

The Caretaker

Everyone had gathered in the common area as we sat in our respective places in a semi-circle early that afternoon. My team briefly introduced themselves, giving curious glances at Miho in the process.

She sat in front of us, on the right of Uncle and Mom on his left. The shamisen posed in the middle of us with the bachi beside it. The silence was heavy as I kept flickering my attention between it and to Miho.

“You made a promise,” I said, breaking the silence. “You answer our questions with truth.”

“So I have,” she looked over to me and shrugged off her coat, letting out her tails and ears once again.

The others beside me stared, each of them having their own reactions.

Zane’s eyes turned blue, for sure scanning her as he muttered something to Pixal who nodded. Kai shifted in his position, puffing up his chest and looking her up and down. Jay was staring at her with a gaping mouth and murmured a ‘beautiful.’

Nya arched a brow at him, causing him to hold up his hands, but she also kept peeking at Miho as if silently agreeing with Jay. Cole’s eyes were wide, glancing at us as if trying to get confirmation that we were all seeing the same thing. Uncle had his usual gentle and calm expression, as well as Mom, as if this wasn’t something new.

Miho let out a sigh that her tense shoulders relaxed, as if hiding her true form had been draining her energy dry. I squinted my eyes as hers landed on me again.

“What do you want to know, Oni?”

I opened my mouth to begin, but Uncle stopped me by holding up a hand. “First, we would like to say that we are honored to have you here with us in the monastery. Please, have some tea.”

Miho gave a nod, taking the cup that he offered. “A pleasure. You are the son of the First Spinjitzu Master, yes?”

“Indeed, I am. My name is Wu.”

She hummed, taking a sip of the tea. “I have met your father once. He was quite the curious one, but did steer quite a crowd when he came into our realm. A mixed blood of an Oni and a Dragon. Truly a marvel to the point that Father Hinoki was interested in him.”

“He spoke of the place before. He has a painting of your realm. Though, he didn’t know as much,” Uncle smiled. “Would you mind telling us who… this Father Hinoki is?”

“The old ruler of our realm,” she began, her voice calm yet firm. “Many as well say he was the first, similar to your father. He had lived thousands of years and witnessed our kingdom from nothing to what it is now. Truly a wonder he is. I do apologize if he did not let your father gain too much insight of who we are and our history. The Father was quite strict about handing information to outsiders. Even may they be their friend.”

“We surely understand. No need to apologize for it.”

“By thousands of years? How long exactly?” Nya asked, making us all wait for Miho’s answer.

“Three thousand years.”

Jay choked on his tea, coughing as Cole patted his back. Jay’s attention snapped up to Miho. “Three thousand years? He’s old!”

“Yet wise,” she interjected, lifting her chin and puffing her chest. “You do not know the kind of knowledge that man possessed. A divine ruler back in his prime.”

“Wait, wait. Sorry,” Cole held up a hand, making us all go quiet. “If he’s that old, how old are you?”

“Two thousand and a half,” she answered as if it was something not unusual. She even sounded proud.

Cole blinked, opening and closing his mouth. “Wow, you guys are old. No offense.”

“Perhaps, but my age is the same as your sensei’s—in terms of human age.”

I pressed my lips together, pushing my hair back before resting my hands on my lap.

This really wasn’t the time to have this kind of conversation. We had more pressing things to do and no one’s even acknowledging it.

Uncle’s eyes darted to me, almost as if assessing me, but he only smiled. Something that he does whenever he wanted to communicate something in silence. Or one of his mischiefs again. For whatever reason that was, I don’t know.

I tried to ask my original question concerning the shamisen, and what had happened in the museum—and yet again, Uncle got to me first. It was as if he was doing it on purpose.

“I would also like to pry,” he began, making me clamp my lips together. “If you and your kind has kept to themselves, how is it that we still have a bit of information about you all?”

Miho hummed, gesturing to him. “You have known us as Jumpers of Realms as well, correct? The Father did tell that to your father.”

Uncle nodded. “That’s right.”

“Some of those travelers have stayed in many of those realms for a long time as we observe other realms to gain knowledge. Adapt.” She paused, narrowing her eyes. “Some have said more than they needed. Though most twisted it into tales that became quite popular especially in this realm of yours. That is why some are only true and most are false.”

She took another sip of her tea. “Over the centuries, people began to add their own versions, and most of the truth has been blurred.”

“Are you saying that there’re Kitsune living here in Ninjago?” Mom joined, her eyes seeming to brighten.

That said a lot about her excitement. She always do search for answers.

“Used to, but not anymore,” Miho focused on her now. “After the ascendant of Father Hinoki, everyone from all realms came back to ours and never went jumping again. Especially most of our access to travel to other realms are from the Hinokis. Through their music.”

“What? Music?” Jay began.

“When was the last time?” Cole asked.

“Do you think our parents met some?” Nya added, glancing at Kai.

The others began to throw question after question at Miho while she sat there silently sipping her tea. Her eyes flickered to me, stoic as if studying me. It was similar to how Satomi does when she’s trying to find out whether something was bothering me.

I let out another heavy breath through my nose.

None of this was relevant. I’m aware that we’re alleged to welcome guests, but this wasn’t the time.

“I don’t want to be rude, but none of this is helping us to what we’re supposed to be focusing on,” I said, making the others stop their bombarding questions.

Each one of them glanced at one another before they leaned back on their zabutons, almost as if they finally realized it and got themselves together again. Cole cleared his throat, Jay pressing his lips together and fidgeted with the belt of his gi as they all settled down.

My attention snapped to Miho, leaning a bit forward. “You’re fixated on protecting this shamisen to the point that you would sacrifice your own life to not let it get to those other Kitsune’s hands. You even wanted Satomi protected. You even trusted me, a part Oni, to protect it.”

I narrowed my eyes, not once blinking. “From what Sensei told me, and based on the reactions of those Kitsune, they hate us. So, why?”

There was a heavy silence that followed as everyone glanced at one another. From the corner of my eye, I spotted Uncle looking at me. It wasn’t stern or disapproval, but the expression that said that he knew it was time to get serious. He offered another smile to me and a nod before turning his attention to Miho.

Of course he was silently testing my restraint and whether I would be able to get the team to focus again. He always does that.

Miho placed down her cup of tea, straightening the cuffs of her top before her eyes landed on me. “It is the Mother’s.”

My breath hitched, mind drifting to the letter that was sent to us. “The Mother…”

“Lady Natsumi, the past wielder of this shamisen. The eldest daughter of Father Hinoki. The one he chose to become our ruler when he ascended to the clouds and became a Kūko.” Her voice lowered, continuing, “She, as well, is the mother of Senritsu.”

“Senritsu?”

“Who you call Satomi.”

I let out a shaky breath, looking away from her as my eyes went to the instrument.

Satomi, a daughter of a Kitsune? A ruler none other than that. Was that why she kept gawking at the shamisen? Did she recognized it? Had she seen it before? Was she aware of what was happening?

I swallowed the lump in my throat, remembering her shaken form and how she just stared ahead in silence after the incident. She doesn’t even know about this. Just from the way she reacted then, it was shocking to her as it was to me.

“That is why Isamu and Aoki wanted her as well. Presumably, Hiroshi-dono was the one who sent them.”

I shifted back to her, wanting to ask why and who but she seemed to be able to read me already.

“The shamisen was the first instrument created by the Father before he had passed. There are four for his four children: a shamisen, a shakuhachi, a koto, and a taiko. Each has its own power that originated from Father Hinoki and passed to his children to assist them and enhance their power without him when he believed it was time for someone else to take his place.”

She took a breath, her eyes flickering to the shamisen before continuing, “Those instruments are only able to be played by his children—his blood. Us, normal Kitsune, would not be able to play it without getting fatigued. The only way we would not be affected is if they allow us, and the instrument will know that we are permitted to use it.”

My thoughts wandered back to when I saw her hands shaking after striking the instrument. The time where the portals emerged just to get those Kitsune away from us. Her explanation made sense now.

“That’s why you were able to play the shamisen,” I muttered, peeking up at her.

She gave a firm nod. “Hai. But I had been using it excessively. I had a limit after the death of Mother Natsumi. As she is not around anymore with her consent for me to use it, my will to be able to play it is fading.

“As for who Hiroshi-dono is, he is the wielder of the taiko and the fourth child of Father Hinoki. How he knew where Senritsu and I were, I do not know how he gained that information.”

I intertwined my fingers, resting my face on it while processing the information. Lord Hiroshi, huh? At least we knew one of our possible Kitsune to look out for. Not only that, a Hinoki. Satomi’s uncle.

“Okay, hold up,” Kai interjected, leaning forward. “Why’re they going for the shamisen if they already have the other three?”

Miho narrowed her eyes. “The shamisen is the prominent out of the four. With the war happening between two of her siblings, they are trying to gain an advantage. And whoever attains the shamisen is guaranteed be the team that wins.”

“So, there is indeed a war happening in your realm,” Uncle said.

“You know of it?”

“Yes, a message has been sent to us concerning it.” Uncle shifted a little, pulling out the letter from yesterday from inside his robe and handed it to her. “Did you send this to us? I expected it to came from you, the Caretaker, as you’re acquainted with my father. I thought you were seeking help.”

Miho took it, reading its contents with a concentrated expression. After a second, she shook her head. “I have not sent any kind of assistance to anyone. I am aware of the war as I travel back and forth to my realm to here with Shikisha, but… I never sent one.” She handed the letter back to my uncle.

He took it with a nod.

I frowned, pursing my lips. If it wasn’t her, then it was someone who knew what was happening in that realm. And they sent it specifically to us, which meant they knew us.

“Whoever it may be,” she began again, “I would not deny that what is written in that letter is true. The only way for the war to end is through Senritsu.”

“Why her? What’s with the shamisen that they want it so badly?” I said, gesturing at it.

“You have felt it, didn’t you?”

“Sorry?”

She adjusted herself, facing me now so that we locked eyes. Her tails fanned slightly behind her, making me only focus on her. “When she played the shamisen, what did you feel?”

Now that she mentioned it...

I thought back to when my knees gave out—wheezing to get air into my lungs that were forced out of me. That flame had made me weak and had broken through my elemental defenses easily than any enemy we faced.

But when Satomi played a tune through that shamisen…

“I felt my energy come back,” I muttered, squinting my eyes. “I even felt like I could take those Kitsune by my own even though you told me I can’t fight them.”

She let out a hum, almost as if my words proved her point. “Now, imagine that to a whole army. Imagine them feeling that rejuvenated and strong for days on end as long as the musician continues to play.”

I held my breath at the revelation. The shamisen wasn’t just for show, it wasn’t just for traveling, it was a sacred weapon. A weapon strong enough to do something like that. To make people feel that amount of strength and confidence with their own power.

“And the only one who could play it is Senritsu.”

I clenched my jaws, looking at my hands as I balled them into fists.

By the First, they wanted her for that. To end a war. To let one of them win. They just wanted the power and to prove who was better. At what cost? People’s lives and a nonsense of attempted kidnapping from another realm?

Miho’s eyes stayed on me. Spotting her unreadable expression only created more questions than answers.

There was more to this, and one of them was something that had been bothering me since the incident in the museum. And something I was hesitant to ask.

With a deep breath in, I asked, “What exactly happened that the Kitsune began hating the Oni?”

There was a sudden silence in the room, noting how the others glanced at me and then to each other.

Miho may have that stoic expression on her face, but I noticed the way her tails flicked upon the question. There was a small twitch in her brow as she let out a huff. She rolled back her shoulders as if preparing herself to have one of the most serious conversations with us.

“The reason Senritsu and I are here is because of the Oni.”

“May you elaborate?” Pixal said, a questioning look on her face.

“The Oni invaded our realm two centuries ago, and it ended only five years prior. It was an event that no one expected to happen.” Her hand hovered above the shamisen before letting it rest back on her lap. “We knew they were far more skilled at traversing the realms than the Dragons, so there was no doubt they could bypass our defenses of not requiring our music to enter. That was why we have our instincts to detect them in case it ever happens.”

A shadow casted over her eyes, scanning each one of us. The air suddenly shifted, something heavier that I felt the weight press down on my body.

“Then, a portal emerged and a storm covered the clear skies,” she said, her tone grave.

I clenched my jaws, not once looking away from her as I noticed her expression shifted into something more alerting.

And I noticed something, her eyes had turned a slight gold.

Uncle lifted up his chin, his posture stiffening. Mom, on the other hand, clasped her hands together that her knuckles turned white. The others also seemed to brace themselves.

We all knew where this was going, and no one dared to interrupt her.

“Eighteen years ago, Senritsu—or Satomi—was born, and I was tasked by Mother Natsumi to bring her somewhere safe when she was only five months old. She had been warned of it happening. She knew that she would pass upon confronting the Oni and stopping them from causing more havoc.”

Her gaze stopped at me, her voice was calm, but the edge was there. “That is why my kin despises your kind, Oni. They destroyed our peace. Centuries of harmony and left nothing but more grief with the death of another ruler. Now, here I am, protecting her daughter like I had protected and educated the four.”

I looked down at my lap, nails digging on my palm. The revelation churned in my head. I never knew it was that serious. The Oni came to Ninjago a year ago, but it looks like they went to their realm first before ours.

That meant they weren’t just seeking to destroy what Grandfather made, they were also trying to eliminate potential enemies who would stop them. Or they were trying to gain more power and chain up other realms.

That didn’t ease my mind knowing I had the blood of those monsters. Dad might have it as well and passed it down to me—and I know that he had been pulled from good to evil and back again. Yet, I couldn’t help but wonder…

What if I became like that? What if someday I wouldn’t be able to hold that kind of destruction—hold that part of myself that could potentially destroy one realm?

My home. My family. My friends…

I shook my head, biting the inside of my cheek to focus on the pain instead and stay away from those thoughts.

No. I have to stop thinking like that.

This was my home. I was chosen to have this title for a reason. I’m not about to go against my promise and what I was destined to do.

Kai, who was beside me, nudged me softly enough to make me stop lingering on it. I turned to face them, seeing the others had similar expressions of worry to his. I shook my head, a sign to tell them that I was fine. He narrowed his eyes and just gave me a pat on the shoulder as he let it slide.

“Lloyd,” Mom called, making me glance at her. Her expression was gentle, and her voice was so soft that I almost missed it. “I know you and your father,” she mouthed.

I gave her a reassuring smile, already understanding what she meant by it. Mom had always been too kind and always see past those kinds of things. I couldn’t thank her enough for it, and how much it had grounded me over the years.

If the Oni started it and led to this civil war, then it was my priority to fix what my kind had caused. That was the only other way I could think of paying them and as apology to the Kitsune.

Getting myself back together again, I turned to Miho. “What’s the plan now?”

“There is no plan,” she said.

“What?” Kai began, his voice rising. “What do you mean ‘no plan?’ You just gave us a whole damn story that your world is basically at each other’s asses.”

Nya nudged him with a glare, and he just lifted his shoulders as if saying, ‘I’m just saying.’

“That is true,” Miho acknowledged. “But, nothing will happen until one person makes a decision.”

“That summarizes to Satomi,” Pixal said.

She nodded at her. “Correct. Until she decides to join us, we can not move forward.”

“I thought you could… y’know,” Cole gestured at the shamisen and did a playing motion.

“I may. However, the tune from the museum had drained almost all of my energy to play another today. I had summoned multiple portals, not just one. Playing another now will mean not being able to even stand on my own two feet.”

Her eyes narrowed as they stay trained on Cole. “The last scenario we want is to travel there without someone knowing what to do and defend all of you.”

Cole sighed, sagging back on his zabuton.

What she said was true. My team hadn’t encountered the Kitsune before and had never experienced what I had gone through. Without someone like Miho with all her energy and power, no one would be able to defend us and navigate us through their realm.

We would be too defenseless. Out in the open for predators like them to eat us.

“So, you expect us to wait here and do nothing?” Kai began again.

“To summarize it, yes.”

“Bullshit.”

“Kai,” Uncle gave him a look of warning, making Kai bow his head.

“Sorry, Sensei.”

“If that is our circumstances, then we will wait,” Uncle said strongly.

“But, their realm has been at war with each other for who knows how long,” Nya said. “We can’t just sit still and wait for it to get worse. They won’t survive for long. Not when we can do something about it. Maybe at least delay it?”

“Without Satomi there is nothing we can do. Until the child makes a decision, then our mission begins.”

“We can just—I don’t know, convince her?”

Uncle shook his head, making Nya huff loudly.

“Statistically, you ‘convincing’ usually results in shouting at them to cooperate in such a manner, Nya. Most of the outcomes are either them cowering further or fainting,” Zane said, earning a sharp glare from her. His eyes turned blue before nodding and said, “I understand. I shall never mention it again.”

“So, we’re just going to stay put?” I said, glancing over to Miho.

She was silent, her tails resting around her as if in deep contemplation. It didn’t even appear she was weak or in any kind of worry.

She was so difficult to read.

A tense silence rushed into the room, causing me to scan around. Mom and Uncle were inspecting each of us as if assessing us just like I was doing. When she noticed me looking, she just gave another nod and a soft smile. I gave a tiny smile back before checking up on my teammates.

Each of them had worries etched in their faces. Cole gripped his hands together; Nya still pouting a little; Jay sitting there rocking side-to-side; Zane silently talking to Pixal about something; and Kai had his eyes closed and leg bouncing.

I kept focused on him, already having an idea where this might end. And it never ends well.

The creases between Kai’s brows deepened and the bouncing of his leg worsened. It all suddenly stopped and he let out an audible sigh.

He threw his hands up. “That’s it. I can’t stay like this,” he pushed himself up to stand.

“Kai,” Uncle warned, a stern look crossing his face.

Kai turned to him with his own fighting look. “I’m not about to do nothing. I ain’t waiting for some girl to make the decision for us to have the green light.” He turned to head for the door.

“Man, c’mon, just sit down,” Cole said. “I want to do something about it too, but we can’t do anything about this.”

“We can. We won’t if we stay still.”

“Technically, we still can not,” Zane shook his head. “Based on what was given to us by Miho, Satomi is our only key for us to proceed with our mission.”

“Then we do what Nya suggested,” Kai spread his arms wide. “We go to her.”

Great, here we go. I stood up, facing him. “Kai, we’re not going to force her into anything. She doesn’t even know any of this. All that happened was she was dragged into it. She can barely process anything during the incident in the museum—even after.”

“Well, I’m not staying here,” he turned his back on us, already reaching for the sliding door. “If you guys wanna wait, then you guys wait. But, I’m not—”

My phone suddenly buzzed, the ringtone blasting as it cut him off. Everyone’s attention snapped at me that even Kai had halted.

I quickly reached for it, pulling it out from my pocket. I stared at the contact displayed on the screen, arching a brow.

On it was Satomi’s name. The green and red buttons for the call shinning at my face.

She was calling at such a timed moment.

Miho, from the corner of my eye, stared at me as if telling me to answer it. I glanced at Uncle, asking for permission.

He nodded.

With a deep breath in, I accepted it and placed the speaker to my ear. “Satomi, what’s wrong?”

“You picked up,” she said, her voice a bit strained as if she had been holding it

“I did,” I said, a little cautious with my words. “So, why did you call? Is something wrong?” I rested my hand on my hip, staring at the tatami floor.

The other’s had their eyes glued to me, Kai had even moved closer to me as if wanting to listen in.

There was a silence from the other side before a shaky breath out. “No, nothing’s wrong.”

Her voice was sluggish, the pauses on some words longer than the rest. It was almost like she had debated on making this call.

“Are you busy? Sorry if I called at such a bad time. I could do it some other time—”

“No, wait!” I said, heart racing as I cleared my throat and licked my dry lips. I glanced over to the others before focusing on the call again and kept my tone gentle. “I’m free right now. What do you need?”

Another silence from her end before she responded, “Is she there?”

“Who?”

“The woman from the museum. Miho.”

My eyes automatically went to Miho, noting how her ears twitched as if she could hear the conversation. I don’t doubt it.

“Yes, she’s here. Why?”

Another pause.

It lasted longer than before, making me shift from one leg to another and wondered if she was still on the line. I was about to ask when she spoke again with a slight tremor in her voice, but her tone was final.

My breath hitched.

“Take me there… please.”

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 9

An Offered Hand

I finally got my courage to tell my parents that I was going out with some friends after five minutes since the call, getting ready as Lloyd confirmed to pick me up. They were worried about me going out after what occurred hours before, but I reassured them that I would be fine. It took a while to convince them, but they soon permitted me to go and promised to stay safe always.

So, here I was in the park, waiting for a certain Green Ninja to appear.

After hours of debating—thinking deeply about what happened back in the museum and the afternoon sun just making it worse—I couldn’t brush it off. It kept echoing in my mind that I can’t even focus on my food, and I knew then that I needed answers.

I stared ahead as I waited, my headphones up while I assessed the place. A group of friends were having a picnic and throwing frisbees into the slightly warm breeze, a couple riding a bike together, while some were just hanging around and sitting like I was.

But most of my focus were on the merging colors of the waves as it slowly calmed me down. The greens, blues, and grays swirling together almost like they were dancing.

My headphones blared nothing but silence, making me appreciate the calming sounds of everyday life. A peace that almost everyone forgets existed. Then again, I forget about it, too, especially now with the situation I was in.

For the fifth time, I glanced down at the text between Lloyd and I, seeing his instructions to wait for him here.

I’ve been in the park for at least twenty minutes now, and that text was sent to me an hour ago. He told me that he might take a while due to how far the monastery was, and I simply replied an ‘okay, I’ll wait.’

And for those past minutes, all I thought of was Miho and Shikisha—that elegant shamisen.

Gods, just thinking about it made my hands sweat and body warm. I should’ve brought some cold water.

I began to fidget with my phone, glancing around then checking the chat again as if it would magically give me a text.

Maybe this whole thing was dumb.

Knowing Lloyd, I had the hunch he was the type to be kind about something and lie about not being preoccupied. I shouldn’t have called him for something so trivial. Maybe I should just go home.

With a heavy sigh, I was already standing when that familiar feeling of alertness suddenly made me halt.

My heart skipped a beat, stomach dropping as I perked up. I glanced from left to right, trying to search him through the passing bodies. It took a moment for me to spot him from afar, but the moment I did, it just made me more tense.

He was in his Ninja attire, walking with purpose. Shoulders back and chin up high. Some passerby had slowed their pace and stared when they recognized him. They whispered to one another, but none of them stopped him as if noticing he was in a hurry.

A surprised look crossed his face when we locked eyes that his lips parted. It was almost as if spotting him had caught him off guard. He slowed down for a brief second but he instantly picked up his pace again.

His expression shifted as a slight frown appeared into his face. It wasn’t anger or any of that sort from what I can see in his waves, turning a bit more compacted with a hint of calm. It was more of curiosity.

When he got closer, he began to slow down and said, “Ready?”

I nodded, straightening my posture and pressing my lips together.

There was something different about him when he’s in his element—wearing that Ninja gear and all of that. It was a whole different Lloyd than the one in school. More confident, open, unlike when he pulls up his hoodie, hides his face, and barely in class.

A smile came up his face, gentle that made my heart skip from the sudden softness. Unexpected. “Relax, you’ll be safe in my care.”

He began to walk to the direction he appeared, gesturing for me to follow. I did so.

“How are you, by the way?” he began, glancing at me. “Your parents?”

“Oh, we’re fine,” I said, readjusting my headphones. “They were a bit hesitant to let me go around again. But they’re beginning to calm down.”

“That’s good. You didn’t get hurt anywhere, did you? I’m sorry for not being able to check on you properly, I got busy.”

“It’s okay. I can’t thank you enough for keeping us safe.”

A silence came between us as we got near the exit of the park to the lot. I took another peek up at him, noting how the sunlight brushed his features in a way that made him glow. His eyes caught me most—greener than the trees around us, vivid enough that I wondered how I had never noticed them before.

Mika had every right to have a crush on him, I wouldn’t even deny it.

His face was sharply defined, yet softened by something boyish, like he hadn’t fully grown into the weight he carried. Strong cheekbones, a straight nose, and a jaw that tensed whenever he was deep in thought. His height only added to it, enough to make me tilt my head slightly when I looked at him.

There was a steadiness about him—something in his stance, in the quiet way he carried himself—that made it hard to look away.

His eyes flickered to me, catching me off guard. I turned away instantly.

Stared too much.

“Is there something on my face?” he said, noting how he tilted his head a little.

“Oh, no! I was just… nothing,” I stammered, shaking my head. “Sorry for staring.”

He chuckled, another smile appearing. “Don’t worry about it, I get it a lot. I’m used to it by now. Come on, my vehicle’s over here.”

Lloyd lead me to the direction of a large, plated motorcycle, making me stare in awe as I just gawked at it. I never knew he had the taste for massive bikes to the point that it looked like it could climb mountains.

We stopped in front of it, Lloyd rubbing the back of his neck as he pulled out the keys. He stared at it then to the bike before facing me.

“Well, it’s not mine, it’s Cole’s,” he admitted, a sheepish look on his face. “My… ‘car’ has only one person seat, so I had to borrow this.”

I snorted a little. Figured it wasn’t entirely his, it didn’t look right with him. Imagine it, Lloyd driving around in a black, plated motorcycle that was twice his size.

“Hm, I just hope we’ll be fine.”

“Hope so, too. I almost crashed on the way here.”

I glanced at him, opening and closing my mouth.

Was he being serious?

Seeming to notice my distress, his hands flailed around. “No, no! I was just joking. I know how to drive, I just need to tilt my body a bit more than usual to get it to go left or right. I’m not as strong as Cole, this is specially more designed for him.”

He faced away, beginning to walk over to it. I spotted him release a breath as if he had been holding it. He opened the compartment of the bike as he took out an extra pair of helmet, gesturing it over to me. I took and wore it, waiting for him to get ready as he mounted the bike. When he gave me the sign to get in, I trailed behind and sat.

Lloyd turned the key as it roared to life, making me flinch and blink from the amount of bright, brown waves that came from the engine and the loudness of it.

The sound and color replicated the same quakes of the earth, making it easy to truly distinguish that it was truly customized just for Cole. Ragged edges, showing its strength, and almost like a looming wall you can’t bypass.

“You ready?” Lloyd called over the sound that I almost missed it.

I nodded, readjusting my headphones around my neck, hesitating before wrapping my arms around his waist.

His body tensed, but it passed as quickly as he flinched. “Alright, hold tight,” he shouted again and drove.

* * *

Usually, from what Mika had told me, it would take about a whole hour or two to get to the monastery by car. By tour bus, maybe a bit longer because it wouldn’t just cover the monastery but also the sand dunes of Ninjago.

But, by the gods, it only appeared as if less than forty minutes had passed from how quick Lloyd was driving.

He swerved left and right, tilting the motorcycle too much that I feared my knees would scrape against the ground. The air wheezed past us that I could barely keep my eyes open. Cars all around seemed to give him way when he drove by, for sure knowing he was in a hustle because of this. And gods, I just held on.

So much for him saying that he needed to put ‘extra effort’ to tilt it. At least he turns on his blinkers.

By the time we arrived and I got off the bike, my legs were shaking uncontrollably that I almost lost balance.

“Whoa there,” he chuckled, his hands hovering over to me as I caught myself by leaning on the bike. “Too fast?”

I nodded and removed the helmet, unable to find my voice at how dry it had become. I wasn’t even screaming on the way here. My soul left.

“Sorry. I’ll go slow next time,” another awkward chuckle. “I should’ve guessed it from how much you were holding onto me. I almost lost my breath.”

A pause.

Yes, funny. I would’ve laughed if I wasn’t still a bit shaken up. Lloyd’s grin disappeared, his little chuckle trailing off as he cleared his throat and licked his lips.

“Um… uh. Oh! Here, let me get that,” he said, taking the spare helmet and putting it back to the compartment. “Need help walking?”

“I’ll be fine,” I finally replied, pushing myself up.

“Okay. If you’re sure.”

We continued up the remaining few steps of the mountain and, yes, he hovered. He kept repeating ‘watch your step’ every two seconds. And whenever I slightly lost balance, he would step closer with his hands outstretched to me, but he backed away when I caught myself again.

“Thank you,” I muttered.

He nodded, opening the gates of the monastery. “Please, come in.”

I stepped inside, looking around in awe at the magnificent yet ancient structure. It may not be a lot, but this was the place where the protectors of Ninjago lived and trained. And there was this kind of air around this place that screamed inner peace.

The silence was steady and calming. Nothing but the swishing of leaves from air.

No doubt Mika would do anything to switch places with me at this very moment if she knew. She would’ve fainted just seeing those gates.

From behind, the gates closed with a deep thud. I turned to see Lloyd placing a large slab of wood onto it to lock it. He dusted his hands before directing his attention back to me.

“Let us?” he said, going past me as I followed.

Lloyd pushed open the paper doors as he let me in first, giving him a little bow to thank him and stopping at the genkan to take off my shoes. He did the same before we came into steps of the wooden floors as he gave another gesture to follow. I didn’t utter a word as I did what I was told, glancing around the place.

Quiet and well kept for a place that occupied more than one person. Though, I would guess it was part of their training or a strict rule from their sensei.

We turned a couple more halls before stopping at one of the closed doors—voices coming from the other side. I swallowed, intertwining my hands as I began to feel them sweat again.

This was it.

On the other side of that door would be the woman that may have all the answers I needed. They only one I could think who does have those answers.

I closed my eyes, taking deep breaths as I tried to calm myself.

Everything was going to be okay. Calm down.

A hand on my shoulder caused me to jump, glancing over to Lloyd as we locked eyes.

His gaze flickered around my face, concentrated and said, “You’ll be fine. Don’t worry.”

I swallowed, giving a nod and facing the door again. He reached and opened it.

The voices from the other side hushed the moment the doors slid open. And when we stepped in, everyone’s attention directed right on me. I froze, pressing my lips together.

Each of their waves told different stories. Most were kind, some were neutral—the one on the red, Kai if I remembered his name right, narrowed his eyes a little to me. That heavy stare didn’t help, the fire in them only making the air hotter than before.

I wiped my hands on my pants, inspecting around before landing on Miho. My breath hitched when we locked eyes, sharp as I first met her. Not only that, she was in her true form. This was my second time seeing those red-tipped ears and tails; the miko outfit complementing her very being.

Again, I still couldn’t read her waves.

She gave a little nod, her expression resigned as usual.

Even though I couldn’t read her like the rest, the presence she carried was enough confirmation that she was someone who meant business and years of wisdom. There was a slight heaviness in her’s, unlike Lloyd’s or the others in the room. Her’s seemed to dominate the rest, and I don’t know what to make of it.

“You’re Satomi, yes?” An old yet gentle voice said, snapping me out of my thoughts.

My attention directed to their sensei.

Master Wu in the flesh.

He was more grand in person than what I see in pictures and on the news. And, I noted, his aura was a soft flowing of gold. Stable and unbroken. Something that would ground you the moment you see it—him, even.

“Yes… um.” I clamped my lips together. How the hell am I suppose to address him?

“Wu or Sensei Wu is fine, child.” He gave a gentle smile, gesturing at an empty zabuton. “Please, sit. We have a lot to discuss.”

I bowed at all of them, taking a seat in front of Miho. My eyes went over to the shamisen that was beside her, the itch on my fingers blazing to life again. I scratched it.

Peeking up at her, I spotted her staring at me. Eyes trained intently as if noting every one of my movement. I averted my gaze, fixing my posture.

Please, stop staring.

“Nya,” Master Wu began, gesturing at the Water Ninja, “would be so kind and pour our guest some tea?”

“Yes, Sensei.” She poured one into an empty cup, handing it over to me. “Here. Careful, it’s hot.”

“Arigatou gozaimashita,” I said with a small bow of my head, taking it with a smile.

From the corner of my eyes, Miho shifted. “Nihongo oshiete kureta?” she said, her tone exact that it caught me off guard.

I swallowed. She was asking whether my ‘parents’ had taught me Japanese.

The others glanced at one another with arched brows, mostly the one in the black and blue gi—who I remembered from Mika was Cole and Jay. They didn’t seem to understand what we were talking about.

There were only four that seemed to understand which were Zane, Pixal, Kai, and Nya. Even so, Kai seemed to be having a bit of a problem fully understanding it. Lloyd appeared to have been able to recognize most of the words.

“Hai,” I confirmed.

“Good,” she said, picking up her own tea. “It will prove essential if you wish to know more.”

I blinked, staring at her. My lips parted. “Why?”

A small of a smile lifted up the corners of her lips. “If you want to know who you are and where you came from, you must understand and speak it often. It is a skill needed for you to have—especially of who you are.”

Those words echoed in my head.

She wasn’t even hiding it, didn’t even try to wording it any other way. She knew why I was here, and she wasn’t beating around the bush. Maybe she even knew that I would come to this decision of seeking answers that’s why she looked so calm.

“Are you saying that I’m really…”

“Not from here?” she finished, shaking her head. “No, you do not. The only reason why your Kitsune features has not yet shown itself as they are hidden.”

I frowned, trying to make sense of what she said. What does she mean by that?

Miho sighed as she put down her cup, gesturing at me to give me my hands as she reached out hers. I peeked at it then back to her. With a slight hesitation, I put down my cup on the empty space on the floor before resting my hands on top of hers.

They were soft, gentle contrasting with her sharp eyes as if she had never fought once in her life. As if what had happened in the museum was some kind of fever dream.

“Senritsu Hinoki, Daughter of the Mother of the Kitsune. That is your given name,” she said, staring straight at me. “You do not see who you are as you have been suppressed to see it for the sake of your well being. Demo… it is beginning to show. I am pleased you came to the museum before you awoke with it. Not knowing what to do and would only panic as a result.”

“Awoke with what?” I said, holding her hands tighter.

“Your Kitsune form. Usually it shows when one is a year old, but that is suppressed for your sake by your mother herself.” She released a sigh, patting my hands. “It is time.”

She took Shikisha beside her, the bachi resting atop as she held it with both hands and moved it towards my direction.

My fingers twitched, swallowing the lump in my throat as I stared at it. That same sensation of wanting to touch it and play it came bursting through that everything else didn’t matter.

“She is calling to you,” Miho said as I snapped out of it. “It knows it is time for you to have it.”

I pressed my lips together as my eyes went to the shamisen. The room had gone silent, filled with heavy tension as if all of them were waiting for me to take it and see what would happen.

Swallowing again, I reached for it, noticing my hands shaking. I closed my eyes, breathed in then out, and forced to steady my hands as I took it.

A sense of warmth enveloped me, something that I had missed when I first held the shamisen in my arms.

Once again, all sounds and waves were easier to distinguish, making my ears perk up as I heard three birds outside that wasn’t even in view. I could tell just from the sound that it was three. They were supposedly a few miles away.

My eyes flickered around, seeing everyone’s aura more easily without needing to squint.

When I looked back at Miho, I finally saw her own waves.

They were fierce, alert but with a hint of softness—a mix of lavender and red. But, unlike the others, hers were faint as if she was able to tone them down and control it before it fully disappeared again.

How did that disappear?

A second paused, then she reached a hand towards my direction and tapped her clawed finger gently onto the dou.

Suddenly, something erupted deep within me as I stared at the burst of colors that came out of that little tap. I flinched at the sudden brightness, closing my eyes. Something within awoke, and I felt a few tingling sensation all across my body, and heard weak intake of breaths from the others.

The feeling was quick, but present as it lingered. I opened my eyes again, instantly settling on Miho. What did she do?

I was about to ask when something flicked from the corner of my eye.

I paused, glancing over. I almost jumped when a silver-ish colored tail swayed beside me on my right as if saying hello. There was a slight icy blue at the tips, almost dull and desaturated but blending with the silver that I almost missed it.

Another from my left moved.

Two pairs of them.

I reached up to my head, feeling pointed, furred ears.

Oh, gods, I had three tails and ears.

Fox ears!

“How is it?” Miho said, arching a brow.

I blinked, opening my mouth but only ending up with nothing.

“Wow!” one of them exclaimed, making me flinch at the loudness of it. “She can’t even—”

“Quiet!” Miho glared at someone from my right, making me take a glance as I saw Jay clump his mouth shut. She turned to me again. “You do not know how to tune down the sounds?”

Was she talking about how loud everything was? I shook my head. “I only know how to muffle them for just a minute or two.”

“How?”

“I close my eyes and focus everything on my heartbeat.”

“A start,” she muttered, her expression going distant with a slight crease between her brows. “Though not enough. It has to be like second nature to you. No exceptions.”

Like second nature as if I knew what to do.

My grip tightened around the shamisen, eyes locked at its intricate carvings and design.

Not once I had ever encountered something like this—a situation I not once thought would ever happen to me. And yet I was here, in Ninjago, rather than where I supposed to be. Wherever that was.

Where was my mother? My father? What happened to them? Why weren’t they here to teach me themselves? Why did she have to bring me here and away from home?

“Senritsu.”

I looked up, eyes meeting with Miho’s as her expression had gone gentle that it caught me off guard. I wasn’t expecting that.

“I am here now. I will teach you everything you need to know. Everything that you had missed and what you were supposed to learn since you were just a kit.”

Right, she was here. But that still didn’t help. “What about my parents?” I murmured.

Miho had suddenly gone silent.

From my peripheral, I spotted Master Wu whispering something to the others. They all stood, giving a nod to Miho and me as they walked towards the door. I watched them.

Why were they leaving?

Lloyd stayed seated for a second, staring at both of us—lingering on Miho before pushing himself up as well. He glanced at me and gave that reassuring smile of his again. As he followed the others out, he reached for the paper doors before closing it softly.

I turned to Miho again, waiting for her to say something. Explain why the others would all of a sudden leave like that.

She sighed and rolled her shoulders back. “Listen carefully.”

* * *

The conversation between Miho and I was something I didn’t expect—perhaps I should’ve, but not fully.

It took a moment for her to wrap up everything that she had also told the Ninja, that the sun had begun to set, giving the room an orange glow. The silence of the room was loud by the time she finished. She simply excused herself, leaving me in the room alone with the shamisen.

I held it tight, finally knowing what it truly was and what it could do…

And who I was.

Me? Stopping a war? The key to stop all of it and the daughter of some kind of royal Kitsune?

I was just a girl yesterday! A senior in high school with my parents waiting at home in Ninjago City. Alive and well.

They were probably wondering whether I was safe, not knowing I was in another crisis of placing me on the spot of needing to make a decision.

A decision of going to a realm that I never even knew existed. That none of us knew existed. That this woman—Miho—told me to keep the shamisen close and protect it all cost and never let anyone get their hands on it.

Like, what? Just what?

What am I supposed to do now? How am I supposed to carry that?

My senses were still enhanced as everything clashed together, almost ringing at the process. The conversations from a room somewhere in the monastery, the tweeting of birds, the rushing of water.

The wind.

The footsteps.

The—

I let go of Shikisha, putting it down on the floor as the sounds lessened. But, having my true form, nothing changed. It was still all so loud and blinding.

My headphones were useless, and I just placed them down.

If that won’t work, there was still another one…

Reaching up, I flattened my ears with my hands and shut my eyes.

The darkness enveloped me. Everything muffled, distant—but my thoughts kept running while I tried to focus on anything else but the beating of my heart.

Bump-bump.

Bump-bump.

Bump-bump.

A weight on my shoulder caused me to gasp, looking up as I locked eyes with those green ones.

“Lloyd,” I muttered, putting my hands down on my lap. Almost ashamed for letting him see me like this.

Just like back in the museum.

He didn’t say anything as he sat beside me. A silence breaking in as he intertwined his fingers together. His thumb brushed over his knuckle, over and over, like he was steadying himself.

I do wonder, what was he thinking right now? Was he lost just like I was? Or was he silently judging how I couldn’t take all of this and handle it better?

His eyes trailed over to Shikisha. “How are you?”

I shook my head, not even sure. There was nothing else for me to say but that.

He released a deep breath, hearing a shift from him as he looked out the window. The light slowly but surely began to darken.

“It took me a while to understand it, too,” he began, making me glimpse at him. He noticed, letting out an airy chuckle. “Being the Green Ninja, I mean.”

Lloyd turned to face me. “When I discovered that I was the chosen for it—of course, I was excited being a kid back then, having this cool title and able to let out these cool magic thingies and all that,” he waved his hand as if brushing his words off while shaking his head with a grin on his face.

I kept quiet, my tails curling around me that it brushed against my arm.

There a pause as he settled down, his smile slowly fading. His voice lowered. “But… I wasn’t fully aware of my position and what it meant to Ninjago.”

We locked eyes, the last bit of light from the sun reflecting in his eyes.

My breath caught.

They were warm, a forest with a soft breeze, where the trees sang gentle yet powerful songs. I could see the green of his aura spreading a bit further, and… something else? A faint shimmer, almost ethereal gold—similar to Master Wu’s but less.

They seemed to reach out to me like sunlight through leaves, warm and steady. It quieted the pounding in my chest, as if reminding me to breathe.  For a moment, my nerves loosened, as if the weight of everything had grown lighter. I couldn’t explain it—no words could.

But, what I do know, I wanted to stay in that calm.

It was something that I had never seen from Lloyd before. Not when we were at school. This was all so new. A part of himself that he seemed to keep hidden like an unknown treasure.

“It took a while to understand, but I do now thanks to the people I call my team and I call my family,” he continued, leaning a bit forward. “I know I was meant to protect this realm, but also others when it comes to it.”

His expression became serious, and his next few words almost made it sound like he was citing his pledge, “As the Green Ninja and the grandson of the First Spinjitzu Master, it’s passed down to me to make sure all realms are safe. I know my duty, and I know that I must protect what my grandfather created. And I know the dangers of it.”

Those words… carried more than duty; they carried the same quiet determination I had noticed in him since the beginning, when we became classmates and I began teaching him guitar. Even back in school, even when he seemed distant, that resolve never left him. He burned with it, even if others couldn’t see.

And now, sitting beside me, that same determination felt like a steady flame—it didn’t fully release what was worrying me, but it grounded me just enough.

He took a deep breath in, his shoulders sagging. “We’re not that different. I know it’s a lot to process, Satomi, but I swear to you… I will be there to help you in any way I can, including my team. We will protect you, and we will stop the war with you. However that may be.”

Lloyd stood, looking down at me, and offered his hand. Silence passed between us again as I stared up at him; a warmth blossomed in my chest from the words he had told me. My eyes stung.

He was right, I had a lot to learn, and from what I’d been told, this was my duty. Whatever that meant. Whatever else my duty was, I will figure it out—and these people would be there to help.

As the sky turned purple-blue, I grabbed Shikisha and took the offered hand of a friend.

His determination lingered in his gaze, unshaken. The warmth that had settled in me remained steady, like a quiet promise that it made me believe everything was going to be just fine.

At least, I hoped so.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 10

A Hard Decision

The moment I took Lloyd’s hand, I knew something had begun. He helped me up as we left the room and went to the living room where everyone sat. It was silent when we came in, as if they’d been waiting for us. But Miho was already standing as though she had expected us to appear soon.

Maybe she did… maybe she heard what we talked about.

Lloyd put a hand on my shoulder, gave me a smile before heading towards Master Wu and Misako.

“You have made your decision?” Miho began.

I took a step forward, nodding as I held Shikisha closer to me.

“Wait, you’re saying?” Jay turned to face me from the couch, practically kneeling on the seat and leaning on the back of it.

“Yes, I agree to go.”

“Finally!” Kai groaned, pushing himself off the wall. He gestured at me firmly. “Open the portal.”

“Not yet,” Miho cut in with a frown, holding up a hand. “There are still some things that must be done. Including her needing to know how to open one properly.”

“Are you serious?”

“I am.” She turned to me. “If I am correct, your adoptive mother had taught you how to play?”

“She did,” I nodded.

“Iine.”

“There you have it. She knows how to play,” Kai butted in again, arms opening wide. “So, what’s hard ‘bout it? You basically told us you can open one just by playing. Let her do the same thing.”

“If I shall remind you, it is not as simple as it sounds, Master of Fire,” Miho seethed, eyes darkening. “If I became fatigued playing that shamisen, what makes you think she is any different, especially she is new to it?”

Kai became silent, crossing his arms again.

“It is similar to how you all learned to use your elemental powers. It will take time. That is why I am here.”

Her eyes flickered to each of them, almost like challenging them to go on and argue with her. No one spoke, all averting their eyes from her. But Lloyd, Master Wu, and Misako kept still and unwavering with their attention still on her.

Miho’s expression fell for a moment, noticing how her eyes glazed over while she buried her hands deep in the sleeves of her hakue almost like she was deep in thought. Though, it instantly disappeared as quickly as it appeared.

What was that?

Her gaze flicked all over my face. “Hime—”

I grimaced at the title. I didn’t like it. Not one bit. It was too much already on top of everything I’d learned. She didn’t had to go all the way to the point where she would call me ‘princess’ at that very instant.

“—there is another that we must do. And I hope you will understand.”

Dread suddenly gnawed at the back of my mind, causing me to shift on my feet and practically hugged the shamisen. Whatever she was about to say, I had a feeling I wouldn’t like it.

“You must leave your old life,” she muttered. “In other words, we need your adoptive parents and everyone who knew you forget.”

The words hit harder than I could brace for. My throat tightened as if someone clamped it shut, making it hard to swallow. The monastery suddenly colder than it had been ages ago.

Forget? The laughter at the dinner table. The coziness of my house. Dad’s terrible karaoke at birthdays. Mom’s music lessons. The stupid things my friends and I did.

Forget those? All of it?

All of it?

Every smile, tear, and sleeplessness nights under the city lights…

As if those years I had lived could simply be unraveled and cast away like they were never mine. Those were my memories, something I grew up into—a part of me. My name and my family. Years of me building these memories and the hardships and everything.

And it comes to this?

I clutched the shamisen tighter, nails pressing against the wood as if it could anchor me. I stared at Miho, standing there tall as ever and not even wavering. My chest ached at the thought of it all. Everything seeming to ring that I winced.

Was I really going to do this? Let it all dissolve, to become nothing more than a ghost in their memories?

A selfish part of me screamed no—begged to hold on, to deny all of this, push it all away and just go home. Home with Mom and Dad. Go to school and hang out with Chelsey, Mika, and Yuna. Finish high school and graduate.

Forget this day. That this never ever happened.

That the dream ever existed.

That the Kitsune ever existed.

That this shamisen ever existed!

But, instead, I stood frozen as I released the breath I had been holding.

Across the room, Lloyd was watching me where he stood next to his mom. His jaw was tight, his green eyes stormy with something I couldn’t name—fear, anger, maybe even guilt. He took a step forward; his hand twitched like he wanted to reach out but couldn’t.

His waves were all over the place, everyone’s were. I couldn’t even read it properly. Or maybe I didn’t want to. Maybe if I did, I’d see the same storm I was drowning in myself.

Or it was me and my jumbled thoughts.

Within those scattered thoughts, was another part of me. Something deeper and heavier, whispered that this was the cost—and the more I held Shikisha, the more it seemed to tug something within me that this was for the best.

That this had to happen.

Even so, the ache of it gnawed through me until I thought I might come apart.

“What do you mean forget?” I forced out, though my voice trembled with the weight of all that unspoken loss.

“It is obvious,” Miho said, almost too calm. Steady. As if she’d seen this play out a hundred times before. “Erase their memories of you.”

The others shifted, each one giving each other a look.

All of those people to forget me in one day? Was she serious? Was I going to do this in the means of going to a realm I never even knew?

“Whoa, now—hey!” Cole began, holding up his hands in front of him. “You never told us anything about this.”

“Now I did.” Miho frowned, her voice was like stone, unmoved.

“A bit too late now, isn’t it?” Kai took a step closer to her, chest puffed up. “Could’ve given us a fucking warning.”

That earned a stern look from Master Wu. Kai scoffed, backing away and pacing around the room.

“Furthermore, there could be hundreds of people who may know her,” Pixal joined, her eyes flickering from her to me. “Not just people she knows intimately, but strangers, classmates, and—”

Miho held up a hand, making us all stop before she directed her attention back to me. The look she gave me told me everything. She knew this time would come, and she knew what to do. After all, she was someone of a high status. I don’t doubt that she could do that with the snap of her fingers.

“You are a Kitsune. You will be able to make them forget. You have that power. It runs in our magic.”

I looked down, pressing my lips together. By gods, there was more for me to do than I had anticipated. This situation was stupid. Cruel.

I swallowed, shaking my head as I took a step closer. “Maybe there’s—”

“There is no other way,” she finished.

Damn cruel.

“We do not know how long you will be there. It could be days, months, or even years. But even so, Satomi,” she walked closer, tilting my head up to make me look at her, “the chances of you coming back here are low.”

My eyes began to sting again, making me sniff as I faced away from her.

“Make your choice, Hime. We do not have much more time.”

I closed my eyes, shaking a little.

Mom… Dad.

Mika.

Yuna.

Chelsey.

All of it. All of those memories, just… erase them?

“It will take time to heal.”

My eyes flew open, landing on over to Master Wu who stepped closer to me.

“But every door that shuts opens another,” he continued, a hand behind his back while the other supported by his staff. “You know that by now, don’t you?”

My vision blurred, every memory clawing to stay alive inside me. And when I wiped the threatening tears to trickle down, the weight of Shikisha in my hands felt heavier than any past I wanted to keep. With every breath, my old life slipped further away. My heart screamed to hold on, but it just tightened around the shamisen.

“Hai,” I whispered.

 He offered a gentle smile. “This only proves there is more for you out there, Satomi. And it proves how capable you are of facing them. If I were you, I would chase it to gain the answers to know who I am.”

His reassuring words made me relax a little, but the thought of what must happen still lingered. I faced Miho again, swallowing the lump in my throat. This was what I came here for in the first place. Seek answers and know who I truly was. My true identity.

And here I was, given the opportunity.

Years, I had been living in a lie that was decided by my real mom to keep me safe. But, also, ending up to become something more than I was able to comprehend. And all of this—all that I grew up in, it was a lie that I sure believed to be true.

And that felt real to me.

This realm had become my home. My childhood.

But, then there was the other one…

Something new. Something that pulled me in.

Called to me.

With a heavy heart, I released a shaky breath out and nodded. Miho placed a hand on my back and moved swiftly, guiding me out of the room as I trailed her.

***

There was nothing else to be said to know how much that decision was going to affect Satomi. Even the thought of it happening to me—the people that I love to forget me—was too much of a burden just to pursue another that you never heard of. By the way she dragged herself as Miho led her out, and the way she was gripping the shamisen, it was obvious enough.

This was too much for a person in a single day.

No one deserved this much. I never had to go through with this when I was chosen. Never had to make the decision to erase the memories of those that I loved, and needing to give up everything who we believed ourselves to be born as.

“Sensei, are you sure about this?” Nya was the first to speak when Miho and Satomi left, and when we all heard the gates close.

“What they’re about to do could possibly mess her up entirely,” Jay added. “Like, come on! I would.”

“I must agree,” Zane nodded, stepping up. “With everyone that she had known and loved to forget her, especially the parents she had considered her true family, the possibility of them forgetting her but her not, it could psychologically—”

“Yes, Zane, I know,” Uncle said, facing all of us. “I understand all of your concerns, but the moment one goes to another realm—that’s her true origin—it would be more different than here. You have to learn everything from the ground up just to know how to survive through it.”

He paused, eyes flickering to each of us. “I understand how difficult it may sound, but it must happen for her sake. Just like we did,” he looked at Jay, Kai, Zane, and Cole with a smile. “Don’t you agree?”

The three nodded while Jay scratched his head. “Uh, which one? There are so many that we almost died in that, I can’t even remember.”

“The Realm of Oni and Dragon?” Kai said with a dead-panned expression.

Jay stared, eyes squinting as if trying to remember.

“The one we got stuck on a sandy island with half of the Bounty, and you were beginning to go nuts?”

“Oooh, that one. Riiight. I remember.”

Kai sighed heavily, shaking his head.

Cole chuckled softly, crossing his arms. “Man, who could forget about that?”

“Presumably Jay,” Zane said, causing Jay to huff and cross his arms.

The laughter eased the tension for everyone else, for me, it only stirred something I’d rather forget. That day in the Realm of Oni and Dragon, when Dad was resurrected and hunted us, where we all thought we had lost the guys and the day I almost gave up… there was one Dad considered his daughter. The girl I once trusted, once cared for—Harumi.

The memory of her words clawed back, sharp and unwanted.

I frowned at the thought of her, shaking my head as I tried to brush it away, and those candied phrases she had told me to gain my trust.

No time for that.

“Do you think she would be able to handle this, Uncle?” I said, turning to him.

He offered a firm nod. “Yes, I am certain that she will. We will be there to support her all the way if needed. It’s now our mission to keep her safe as the key to ending the war that’s happening in their realm. And as Ninja, it is our destiny to always protect others. Is that understood?”

We all bowed to him. “Yes, Sensei.”

I’m certain that Satomi was a strong woman, but something wouldn’t leave me—the way she looked back, just once, before they turned a corner of the hall. Like she was already half-gone. That scene was glued in my thoughts, consistently pestering me that I couldn’t think or focus on anything else.

But I hoped that Uncle was right. That she would be able to handle this.

“That is good. Now, all of you go and get yourselves ready. The moment those two are back, we would be leaving,” Uncle said firmly. “Pixal, get the Bounty ready and all that is necessary to bring.”

“Yes, Master Wu,” Pixal clicked a button, opening the hangar behind the TV.

Everyone began to move, leaving the living room and going to their designated rooms to pack their things. I was about to go as well when Mom stopped me.

“Lloyd, are you still worried about her?” she said, her tone gentle and knowing.

I sighed, aware that I wouldn’t be able to get out of her perceptive gaze. “A little.”

That made her smile. “You worry too much about others—that’s something I’m proud of you for. But…” she took my hand, massaging it softly from the back of my hand to the tips of my fingers. “You also need to look out for yourself, especially we will be going to another world that’s unfamiliar to all of us.”

She glanced up at me again, her expression now hard. “Promise it to me, Lloyd. Promise me to not carry everything alone. Satomi has her own battles, but if you burn yourself out trying to shoulder hers, neither of you will stand.”

Mom, always so worried.

I gave her a gentle smile, resting my other hand atop hers. “I know how to take care of myself. I’m the Green Ninja. I know my responsibilities and my limits.”

That didn’t seem to satisfy her from the way her expression hardened a little, but it vanished as instantly as it appeared. She simply nodded and let me go, letting me head to my room as I began to pack.

I never liked it when I upset her over little things, but the problems that are happening are mine to carry, not theirs. They have their own as it already was—and I knew it was too much. Adding mine into the mix would only make it worse.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 11

The Burning City

Mom and Dad were eating dinner when we arrived. I had texted them that I would be coming home late, but should be able to be there by around dinner. Miho was beside me while we stood at the roof of one of my neighbor’s houses, her tails swaying behind her that made her silhouette far more chilling. The shamisen behind me was burning my back as I gripped onto the strap, my nails digging into my palm but I could barely feel it.

“Do you remember what I taught you?” Miho said. “How you can make your true form be disguised with a human one?”

“Un,” I nodded.

“I know it is an advance spell, but we do not have much time to waste for us to focus on it.”

“Why can’t I just let them see it?” I said, looking up at her. “They’ll forget anyways, why not just let it be free?”

“We will not risk anything. We can not. I am not entirely certain that one of your family’s henchmen might possibly be here. Watching and listening,” she said sternly, her gaze still locked to where I lived.

Where would be the home I used to live.

“We must be quick.”

With a sigh, Miho helped me down of the roof, easily carrying me as she jumped down the roof silently.

Yes, she had carried me all the way here. A whole, possibly, one long hour that I questioned whether she got tired or not. But she did turn into her real form of a large white, red tailed-tipped Kitsune just like the color of her fur. She didn’t show any signs of fatigue when we arrived, showing her strength that I still don’t know her limits.

She was faster than anything I’ve ever rode on, to the fact that I thought she was taking huge leaps on clouds. Maybe she was, it felt like she was. Under the moonlight, she looked other worldly.

The two of us stopped in front of the door, my heart pounding as I stared at it.

She took my hands and made me face her. “Let me see it.”

I gave a nod, closing my eyes as I focused on imagining that my Kitsune form was not there just like she told me. To command it to go away.

A tingling sensation prickled through me, sweat trickling down my forehead, and panted as I began to feel it spread more and more while I felt tired all of a sudden.

I finally let go, opening my eyes while heaving. “Did it work?” I said, tone strained.

She only frowned. “You still have your ears and a single tail.”

I huffed, shaking my head. “Let’s just leave it. Like I said, we’re going to erase their memories anyways.” My voice began to shake, nose running. Sniffing, I swallowed the lump in my throat and muttered, “Like I never existed.”

There was a pause from Miho before she let out a heavy sigh.

She took my chin and directed my attention to her. “All right. I will let this one thing go. If you are going in there like this, then I will go in with you. No exceptions.”

That was enough to me. “Thank you, Miho.”

“Of course,” she whispered, her voice gentler than before. “Come, let us go.”

With another breath in, I searched through my pocket as I took out my keys and unlocked the door. When I stepped inside, that familiar feeling of warmth and welcome spread through my chest.

But unlike any other day—every time I come back home from school or from going out with friends—this made me want to burst out crying.

No. I can’t cry now. Not like this. I had to stay strong… for the sake of my parents.

Steadying my voice, I called out, “Mom, Dad, I’m home!”

I placed the keys where it usually go in, hearing it clink on the white porcelain bowl while those familiar waves came out from it.

That would be the last time I would see that.

I took off my shoes, Miho following as she took her own geta off while her tails swished behind her. She gestured for me to go ahead as I led her through our home and into the dinning area.

“Satomi, I thought for a moment you’ll miss dinner,” Mom said first, catching a smile on her face. She put down a rice bowl to where I usually sit and some chopsticks. “We made you your—”

The moment she looked over to our direction, that bright smile instantly disappeared. Her eyes flickered over to me then to Miho, inspecting us and her gaze lingering on me the longest. The shades of her waves told a lot, changing from color to color.

Confusion. Alertness. Uncertainty. But, mostly, sadness.

Dad finally looked up from his bowl as well, standing instantly that the chair screeched into the wooden floor. I flinched. His expression was still calm, but his inner emotions told another. “Kimi wa dare? What do you want from us?” His voice was stern and strong, deep unlike I had ever heard from him.

“Konbanwa,” Miho bowed her head, her tone the opposite of his. “I am here to collect your daughter.”

“Our daughter?” he continued, his hands turning into fists. “How are dare you. Satomi, what is the meaning of this?”

“Tō-san, please—”

“You will come here this instant,” he told me before looking back at Miho, pointing a finger at her. “Stay away from my daughter.”

“Dad, please, listen for a moment—”

“I will not have your excuse!”

Mom, who had been silent the whole time, rested a hand on his forearm. “Yuuto-kun, sit down.”

His gaze snapped at her, but he said no other word as he did what he was told yet his stare stuck on Miho. Mom looked over to us, gesturing at the empty seats. Her waves had calmed down to a more gentle shade. Though, I can’t read them properly.

How could I when I could barely focus on anything right now?

“Sit. Eat with us.”

I looked up at Miho who seemed to hesitate. She opened her mouth, but I tugged at her sleeves.

“Please,” I mouthed.

This would be the last time I’ll see them, at least let me have this time with them, I wanted to say, but none of it came out and the ‘please’ only lingered.

Miho stared down at me before surrendering with a nod. “Arigatou.”

We went to the empty seats, me taking my usual place as I shrugged off the shamisen and gently placed it beside me on the floor; Miho sat next to me. Mom gestured at me, knowing that it was my turn to pray for tonight’s dinner.

I put my hands together, did a quick prayer for all of us. Doing the usual thanking the gods for the food provided, keeping our family safe, prosperous, and always to guide us into our unseen path. After it, I took my chopsticks.

A silence enveloped the table as we ate. Heavy that it was difficult for me to breath.

The food that we were eating may have been my favorite oyakodon—and every time it was served, I would’ve gone for seconds or thirds—but now… I barely had the appetite. I already felt full.

The chicken didn’t taste anything at all. It was stale even though I knew how much care and time Mom took with it. The sweetness and tangy blend missing.

I kept sniffing, shoving more rice into my mouth to keep myself from crying that I could barely chew.

Gods, I can’t take it.

“What’s your name, Kitsune?” Mom started, making me flinch at her voice after minutes of silence.

“Miho,” she said while she kept eating. She gestured at the food. “Tabemono wa oishii desu.”

Mom gave a small smile, but I could tell it was forced. “Thank you.”

Another silence.

Then, suddenly, Dad placed down his chopsticks with a bang, making me jump. “What do you want from our daughter?”

“Yuuto,” Mom whispered, her tone a mix of sternness and pleading.

“Iie, we need to know. We can’t let some kind of mythical creature that come from stories to barge in here and demand our daughter.”

I stared down at my bowl. Rice half eaten.

Mom and Dad never argued in the dinner table. When they do… they do it when they thought I wasn’t listening or in their room. Behind closed doors.

This was something else. But I wouldn’t blame Dad. I was their only daughter.

A daughter that wasn’t really theirs.

“Ochitsui te.”

“How can you say that, Yuka? How can you tell me to calm down when this creature—”

“I’m also them, Dad!” I shouted, unable to resist it for disrespecting my lineage. I might’ve not known who I was for long, but I couldn’t bare when someone disrespects it. “You told me yourself, tō-san… never let anyone disrespect my lineage. My name. To always be proud of it.”

I looked up, seeing he had quieted down and stared at me. His eyes told two things: pain and refusal. Instead of fighting back, I forced down my own pain.

“Onegai, tō-san… one way or another, you and Mom knew I’ll search for answers.”

He averted his gaze, eyes glistening as he sat back down, now sagging on his seat. He took off his glasses and leaned his face on his hands. Mom placed her hand on his shoulder, her own tears slipping down.

They were quiet for another second before she turned to Miho.

“Were you the one who left her in our steps?” she said, her voice broken that my heart ached.

Miho stared back. “Hai.”

Mom’s face contorted into pain, her waves turning into a shade of blue as she began to cry. I noticed Dad’s had turned to the same shade, but a tinge of red there as well. He wrapped his arms around her.

“How could you be so cruel to us? I thought the gods had heard our prayers, but now you’re taking her away from us? Our baby?”

My eyes stung as I pressed my lips together. Kā-san.

“The gods always have their reasons why these things must happen, Kura-san,” Miho began softly. “Satomi’s mother knew you two would take good care of her and had specifically instructed me to leave her into your care through the vision she had received.”

I looked up at Miho. She didn’t tell me this.

My mother knew, and specifically instructed her to leave me to these two specific couple?

“She knew you two were worthy, and she was right. You and your husband had helped Saotmi grow into a wonderful woman.”

Miho suddenly stood, adjusting her bakama as she kneeled to the floor. My parents had looked up, watching Miho bow so deeply her forehead touched her hands—a gesture I’d never seen from her before.

“And so, the Kitsune are forever in your debt.”

“Miho,” I muttered softly, my tears finally coming down.

“Please. Please, stand,” Mom said, her voice cracking as her tears kept falling.

“I wish for you both to understand that we must take her back to where she belongs as she is needed there,” Miho murmured.

Dad took a deep, shuddering breath in, finally looking down at her. “You swear to protect her?”

“With all the thousands of years that I have lived, I will surrender it all for her safety.”

He nodded, his jaws tense as his attention directed to me. We locked eyes and I sniffed. His lips quivered into a smile before turning to Mom again.

“There’s something else, isn’t there?” Mom said, her eyes still trained on Miho.

Those words made me look away from her, staring down at my intertwined fingers as I pressed down hard on them. Trying to focus on the pain instead of what Miho was about to say next.

They wouldn’t like this.

“Hai,” I heard Miho shift, for sure sitting up straight again. “We must erase all of your memories of her. As if she never had been in your lives.”

“What?” My father boomed, perking up again. “Why would you do something like that?”

“It is precaution and safety of her and your own lives,” Miho’s tone was solid, firm and final.

“No. We will not accept that! We raised her for eighteen years, while you had never appeared in her life once—or let us know where to find you until now. We’re not accepting this. Screw our safety. We’re not letting go of those memories. Those hardships, the happiness we felt—”

“If you have to do it, do it.”

I looked up—no, all of us looked up toward Mom’s direction. She had composed herself as her tears had dried up on her face.

“Yuka—” Dad tried, but she shook her head.

She looked up at him, her gaze had softened. “This is the last time we will see our daughter, Yuuto. The last thing we can do for her sake, and to protect her one last time, is this. So, please… I beg of you.”

Dad shook his head, closing his eyes. His body shook, fists pale from how much he was gripping it. “We would go back to crying and being upset. Go back to the days where we tried to have a child, and only—”

“I know,” Mom said, her voice so low that I almost didn’t pick it up. But, my ears twitched, letting me hear it. “I know.”

Dad fell to his knees as he rested his head on her lap, crying furiously that it broke my heart that I ended up crying as well.

His cries were broken, pained.

Never once I had heard and witnessed him like this.

Mom closed her eyes, silent tears running down her face.

This wasn’t the type of dinner I had in mind to end and have a final one with them.

Mom looked up towards me, forcing in a smile as she sniffed. “Satomi,” she held out her hand. “Come here.”

I hesitated for a moment, my body heavy, but I forced myself to stand as I went to her, wrapping my arms around her neck as I let myself cry more. Dad wailed loud that usually I would’ve covered my ears, but I didn’t.

I couldn’t and I just cried with them.

Mom’s body shook as she held onto me tightly before feeling another pair of hands. Larger, knowing that Dad had shifted just to hug me as well.

“We love you, Satomi,” Mom whispered. “Remember that always. We love you very much.”

“I love you both, too,” I said through shaky breath. My chest making it harder for me to breath for how much it was hurting as if someone was twisting a knife on it.

Dad pressed a kissed atop of my head, and I leaned onto him as well.

After what seemed like an hour staying in that position, we all began to calm down. I opened my eyes, looking over to Miho who had been standing there in silence the whole time and watching.

Shikisha was back in her hands now. She gave me a stern look, yet gentle as if to remind me of our main purpose for being here.

Knowing that my parents wouldn’t pull away from how much they were holding onto me, I did it for them.

They were reluctant, but they let go of me. Mom cupped my face, wiping my tears. Her hands were so warm…

“Take care of yourself, Satomi,” she smiled, quivering at the edges. “Always remember that even though you’ll be in that life now, where you really belong, remember that you will always have a place here as well.”

I sniffed, my tears threatening to rain down again. “Yes, okā-san.”

“Good girl,” she kissed my forehead one last time before she let go of me.

I turned to look at Dad. He took off his glasses and rubbed his eyes. “Come here, my nakidori.”

I went to him, hugging him tightly.

“You look beautiful in your real form, just like your name and you always have.”

I sniffed, clutching my eyes closed. “Thank you, tō-san.”

He gave a nod, giving his own kiss on my forehead before letting me go. I smiled up at him with a sniff before dragging myself towards Miho. She handed me the shamisen and I took it, shaking a little.

She tilted my head up to her. “You did well,” she mouthed before turning to my parents. “Everything that you remember of her will be gone, and every trace of her will be burned by my fire. You two have done well to raise her, and I promise to replace your memories into something delightful in its place.”

Miho faced me again. “Satomi, please, play the tune that I am about to hum. Can you do that?”

I nodded.

“Good, listen carefully.”

Readjusting the shamisen in my grip, I took the bachi from my pocket and I waited for her. After I was able to get into my playing position by sitting on the floor, I peeked over to Miho.

She gave a firm nod. “I will warn you, this might drain your energy more than the other earlier. Focus on the song—command it. Do not resist when you feel a pull.”

She turned to my parents again and began to hum a tune.

I began to play.

The song was gentle and nostalgic. There was a pull deep within me that seemed to travel towards the tip of my fingers and to the shamisen. My breath caught, making me want to pull away—until Miho’s hand on my shoulder warned me not to.

She looked at me from the corner of her eye. Firm, almost like telling me to not dare stop. In so, I continued to play. I tried to ignore the pull as if the shamisen itself was taking and feeling my soul.

As I continued to play, the song from my dreams peeked out from the back of my head again. I didn’t stop plucking, not letting my mind wander too much as I focused on the notes from Miho.

I should ask her about it when we had time. Maybe she would be able to answer it, knowing now that this shamisen used to be my mother’s. There was a possibility she would know the tune I would play.

I watched as my adoptive parents began to be lulled to sleep. Their heads sagged, eyes glazing. Dad tried to fight it, keeping his eyes on me but he soon succumbed to it as well. They moved on their own, going up the stairs.

And I just watched them slowly but surely forget everything that we had ever done together.

My plucking quickened.

Mom teaching me the shamisen for the first time.

The note went deep.

Dad smiling, glasses off while filming me play my first solo song.

The melody rose again.

Birthdays, candles, laughter—until eighteen.

A tear threatened to spill, making me bite my lip. But I steeled myself—not letting it get to me when I felt a sudden change in the strings of the shamisen that Miho squeezed my shoulder.

As I heard their footsteps and the direction of the waves that I followed with my eyes, I knew they had gone to their room.

By the time the door closed gently, Miho stopped.

The final chord rang.

Silence.

Utter silence.

The only sounds were the night’s tender symphony—while within me, nothing remained.

“Let us go,” Miho said without a moments waste, her bakama swishing along with her tails.

I stayed there for a moment, touching the floor before standing but stumbling as my vision swirled.

“Careful, you are not used to using the shamisen yet and that much magic,” she said, her back to me.

I didn’t reply as I trailed after her, ignoring the nausea.

Just like that, my parents had forgotten everything. From just a simple tune that came from the instrument I held.

My heirloom.

We were soon back outside again. The night cold but I noted how no crickets sang.

We stood in front of my house.

My home.

My childhood.

A bright blue light made me wince, appearing from the corner of my eye. I turned and saw Miho chanting something as a blue flame hovered above her palm. I watched as the flames slowly turned into a shade of vivid purple. Almost a lavender type just like her waves when I first saw a peek of them.

“This will burn everything that is linked to you,” she said, glancing at me. The flame reflected in her eyes, making her appear otherworldly that she already was. “It will not harm them, only what used to be yours. Here, let me show you.” She reached out a hand.

I hesitated for a moment before fumbling around my pocket as I gave her my phone. Once it was in her hand, she guided it to the tip of the flame. The moment the phone touched it, it instantly turned into ashes—floating up and fully dissipating as if it was never there.

That I’d never had it.

“Do you understand now?” she said, glancing at me.

I only stood still, lips clamped together.

She didn’t wait for a reply as she walked and knelt to let the blaze touch the grass. They were instantly sent into flames, wrapping around the house as it burst into it as well.

The fire didn’t eat any of the leaves or wood as if it didn’t desire them just like she said. But from the window where my room would’ve been, hints of sparks and more floating ashes appeared, letting us know that it had worked.

We stayed to take take care of my neighborhood, doing the same thing as we did for my...

By the end of it, Miho turned into her large Kitsune form once more. She bent down and signaled me to get in. I released a tired breath and swung the shamisen onto my back, hopping in.

With ease, she ran and pounced onto the roofs, landing in silence like a gentle breeze guiding a leaf down onto the surface.

I glanced behind me one last time, and watched the burning houses disappear.

My life burned away as though it had never existed—but the ashes in the air carried my heartbeat with them.

***

In the middle of the night in the realm of Ninjago, the same symphony that was played to the Kura couple was used to three specific houses, to a single school, and almost the entire city.

They were also burned in those fiery, purple flames that Ninjago—that night—glowed like a burning star before everything stilled.

The girl named Satomi Kura had died that very night in those flames.

And in the process, I was reborn:

Senritsu Hinoki, Daughter of the Mother of the Kitsune.

Chapter Text

PART II

Kaeru Basho - “Where One Belongs”

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 12

Departure

We were in Operation Ready-Before-Depart. In other words, packing and moving phase. Everyone was getting all of their stuff into the ship after some time of checking our rooms and getting everything we needed. I was helping Cole and Nya deliver the crates inside, while Zane and Pixal made sure the ship and some of our other vehicles were in tip-top shape.

As for Jay and Kai, they were supposed to be double-checking if we had forgotten anything in the monastery or not. And from the looks of it, they were taking advantage of their roles.

And knowing Nya, she always took the last stage of the operation seriously. She was always our boss for this.

“Is everyone ready? No one forgot any—Jay Walker, put those down! We don’t need floats. Those are just a waste of space,” Nya yelled, crossing her arms as she stood on the deck of the Bounty.

“Why not? It’s just in case. Maybe there’s a lake there we could relax in. Better yet, hot springs,” he said, his arms still wrapped around the floaty as if protecting it with his life.

“No! This isn’t a vacation like Sensei said—Kai, leave those as well! We’re not bringing stupid video games into a realm that’s in the middle of a war!” she said, turning to Kai who was trying to sneak in three CDs and heading for the lower deck.

“Augh, dammit! Come on, sis.”

“I said no! Put those back.” She pointed to the entrance of the hangar.

The two groaned, dragging themselves back inside the monastery to put them away.

I sighed, shaking my head as I moved aside to let them through. I swear, sometimes I wonder if I was leading a bunch of kids. But then again, I also forget that we were still young… especially me.

With a quick change of grip onto the crate labeled ‘RATIONS’, I continued up to the deck and began heading for the lower one. I could hear Nya huffing and muttering something to herself, though I could barely make out the words as my mind wandered to something else.

To someone else.

Nya’s voice brought me back. “Lloyd.”

I stopped.

“Yeah?” I faced her, voice a bit strained from the heaviness of the crate.

Should I guess that either Cole or Kai placed extra things in here that we didn’t need? I swear, if it were cakes again…

“Did Satomi said anything yet?”

That question caused me to look away, putting down the crate with a huff—panting and grateful to be able to rest a moment. The memory of Satomi and Miho arriving back an hour and a half ago was, as we expected, silent.

They have been gone for hours. I would even dare say almost the whole night.

We were bustling around the monastery when they came in. She arrived, but only the physical shell of herself. She was so quiet that her usual dream-like curiosity had vanished, leaving her eyes hollow.

I tried to speak to her, followed her through the halls and back to where she heard the truth from Miho about who she was. She just sat there in the middle of the room with the shamisen on her lap. The way she held herself—straight posture and expressionless—was almost like she had curled onto herself. I even noticed her tails wrapping around her.

I wanted to say a few words, wanted to know how she was feeling, but Miho told me to leave with a final tone as she ushered me out and shut the paper doors.

After that, they had gone still.

“No, nothing yet,” I said, leaning on the crate.

Nya didn’t reply for a second. “I hope she’s fine.”

“I hope so, too.” I shook my head, shifting most of my weight into my legs as I carried the crate again with a groan. “Well, just keep Jay and Kai in check. We’ll be going soon from what I know.”

She nodded, turning back to do her job while I went down the steps into the storage. I placed the box with the rest, heaving before checking each one that we had enough food and water for the journey. With a pat on the crate, I left and closed the door behind me.

My mind drifted back to Satomi again, and I knew that image of her downhearted spirit wouldn’t leave until I do something. I shook my head. It wasn’t my business, if she needed space I should let her have it. That’s what she needed right now. Besides, Miho was in there with her, she could help her.

I went to continue my chores, going back inside the monastery to check for more crates.

Those didn’t help distract me as I walked through the halls aimlessly, only noticing too late that I stood in front of those same two paper doors where she was at. I swallowed the lump in my throat as I stayed there frozen. There was a faint, orange light inside emanating from a candle, making me simply focus on it as the urge to open it tingled on the tips of my fingers.

“Lloyd.”

I turned to my right, seeing Uncle standing there.

“Sensei,” I bowed quickly.

He smiled and gestured for me to come inside the library. I followed him, taking a final glance at the closed doors before heading inside with him.

He went on one side of the table in the middle of the library while I stood on the other. The paper that he and Mom showed me just yesterday sat there with the painting of the Kitsune Realm, still wide open. I stared, seeing those sakura trees and torii gates against vast lands.

It only started over a piece of paper.

That was all the knowledge we knew what could possibly be happening there. But now, with a Kitsune on our side who had told us everything and the truth, it led to this.

A path where someone I knew—a classmate and someone I began to consider a friend, who I only knew through a single shared class—had to lose her whole family and everyone she loved and known.

Now, she had to travel to a world she barely even knew and not even knowing what she was getting herself into.

I glared at that large castle atop a hill, something cold forming in the pit of my stomach. I couldn’t help but feel obligated—feel as if somehow it was my fault to know that this all started because of those half-assed Oni.

What would happen when we get there? What would happen to me and Uncle, knowing that we carried those blood and the Kitsune were like sharks when it came to identifying it?

I gripped the edge of the table, feeling the hard, polished wood between my nails. This was my responsibility now. If I have to do it on my own, then I’ll do it on my own just to set everything right again. This would be how I would apologize for what the Oni had done. Even if it meant going through a pain of humiliation and hatred from their kind.

I will fix it. And I will prove to them that there was at least two who were on their side. I would make sure that Satomi knows it, too.

“She’s fine,” Uncle started, making me snap out of it and glanced up at him. He stared back at me. “Miho told me that Satomi’s resting. After hours of using her powers for the first time, at the same time using too much, it had drained her.”

He gave me a reassuring smile, his white beard lifting along the corners. “Don’t worry, nephew, she’s beginning to stir. You’ll see her soon.”

I looked away from him, feeling a bit flustered to be read so easily. “Yes, Uncle.”

He nodded with a little hum. “Now that you are reassured, I wanted to give this to you.”

Uncle reached over to the letter concerning the war, and handed it over. He let it rest in front of me as I stared at it, the same paper that we had thought came from Miho but ended up not being hers. Until now, it made me wonder who possibly could have left it to us.

“Since we are going to their realm, I have no doubt that someone there sent this to us,” he began, his hand brushing against the painting of the Kitsune Realm, or what it could possibly look like.

“We might not know, maybe or maybe not we will meet that person—but if we do, I want you to let me know and don’t let your eyes off them. It’s not as important as the mission that we are about to do, but keep it in mind. Even how small it is. I couldn’t help but think of this letter as something important. A warning perhaps.”

He paused, gripping his bamboo staff tighter. “Whoever the sender is, I have a feeling they had sent it to us for a reason without letting Miho know of it—and that’s enough to make it a bit suspicious. The moment we come in there, that Kitsune or whatever it may be, knows we’re going there as well. So, keep yourself and the others vigilant. Understood?”

I straightened my posture. “Yes, Sensei.”

He gave a brisk nod. “That’s all. You may go.”

I bowed to him, taking the paper and stared at its contents again.

Whoever you are that sent this, I’ll find you.

I folded it and tucked it somewhere safe inside my gi. I was about to leave when Uncle cleared his throat.

“Also,” I stopped, turning to face him as he grinned, “tell Pixal to get the Bounty’s engines running. The two seem to have finished their rest.”

When he finished saying that, his eyes flickered behind me. I blinked at his words, opening my mouth to ask when the sound of doors sliding open caused me to pause, and skip over to the entrance of the library. I leaned on the frames, movements coming from inside.

Close to the other end of the hallway, the once closed doors had now opened as I held my breath. Everything seemed to have stilled as I waited, the silence deafening and heavy. Miho came out first, looking far more refreshed as her tails trailed behind her. Then, Satomi appeared, the shamisen strapped on her back.

From the way she walked, I could tell that her spirit was back unlike when they arrived. As if sensing that I was staring, which she almost always knew, she glanced at my direction. Her eyes had that glitter again and my tense shoulders sagged. For once, a weight was lifted off my chest.

It made my heart warm and flutter. I couldn’t help but give her a smile and a thumbs up, raising a brow as well as a silent question whether she was better.

She nodded, making me nod back in acknowledgment. I might as well go and tell Pixal to get the Bounty going.

“Uncle,” I turned back to his direction, “are you ready to go? I’m going back to the hangar, and I think Miho and Satomi are going as well.”

“Give me five minutes to double-check everything. I will be there with Misako. For sure she’s doing final rounds around the monastery,” he replied.

“Yes, Sensei, we’ll be waiting.”

With a final bow, I turned to leave, heading straight over to Miho and Satomi who were talking amongst themselves.

Miho’s ears twitched over to my direction as I got close, making her look at me with that favorite expression of her’s. “Shall we?”

I nodded, stepping past them. “Follow me.”

Our footsteps were the only thing that occupied the silence between us, but it wasn’t something uncomfortable that I wanted to speak—which I had the urge to do so. But in my opinion, I don’t think that I needed to ask Miho how she was fairing. The aura that she carries with pride was radiating off of her like the first time we met in the museum.

As for Satomi…

I glanced to my side, seeing her looking down at the floor before ahead again. She caught my stare and I tensed a little, wanting to look away but forced in a smile then took my attention forwards. I didn’t want to look weird or intrusive, but I had a feeling she knows that I was thinking that.

“Did you guys get everything done? I was hearing a lot of talking earlier and it looked like it quieted down,” she said, the sound of her voice catching me by surprise.

“Oh, yeah, we did,” I rubbed the back of my neck. “We were almost finished when the two of you came back.”

She nodded.

We soon arrived at the entrance of the hangar; the metallic doors parted as I lead them inside and into the steel floors as the soft pattering of our feet turned hard. Voices roared and echoed throughout the vast room. Another fit of bickering came from the direction of the Bounty.

What were they arguing about now? I sighed in defeat as I spotted it was something to do with Nya and Kai again.

Well, this was embarrassing. The first thing these two get after a time of rest was a group of five people having some kind of dispute about—for sure—something stupid.

“I’m sorry about them,” I turned to face Satomi and Miho. “They can be a little…” I paused, seeing Satomi’s expression contorted almost in a pained way. I took a step towards her, reaching a hand. “Hey, what’s wrong?”

“Nothing,” she said feebly. “It’s just… they’re a little loud for me.”

Right, I almost forgot. She was sensitive to sounds, I don’t doubt that it made it worse with her current dilemma of turning into her true form as well. “I’m sorry, I’ll tell them to quiet down.”

She nodded, her hands rising up to her ears. I was about to move as well, not wanting to prolong her discomfort, when Miho seized her hands and gave me a look that made me halt.

“Senritsu,” she turned back to her, “I taught you what to do.”

My gaze went back to Satomi, spotting her as she took deep breaths in and out. Her eyes closed as she seemed to concentrate. I wanted to know what was happening, but I let them be, not wanting to get in the way of whatever was happening and make her lose her concentration.

It took a few more tries before Satomi began to relax, her shoulders loosening as they settled back down beside her. Her appearance softened as she let out a heavy breath out before looking up as if what just happened didn’t.

Huh, she looked… better. At ease. As if the discomfort faded.

Miho gave a nod of approval. “Good, you’re learning.” She glanced over to the Bounty and said, “Is that our transport?”

I looked over to the it as well where the siblings were still arguing, and I could see Jay holding Nya back from pouncing at Kai—his arms practically wrapped around her waist tightly.

Seriously, they need to get themselves together.

“Uh, yes, it is. That’s the Destiny’s Bounty. It came a long way for us Ninja when it comes to traveling around. Girl’s been through a lot.”

She nodded, gesturing for me to go on as I walked again to the direction of the ship. As we grew closer to it, their words became more coherent that I grimaced a little at how ridiculous the conversation was.

“Why did you have to move everything?” Nya said, trying to pry Jay’s hold away. “I already arranged them! Pixal and I made the arrangements. We all agreed on it months ago!”

“It’s stupid! I can’t find the things I was looking for,” Kai spat back. “Hell, I can’t even find the water refills.”

“They’re all in the same right-hand corner!”

“Well, I didn’t see.”

“Well, maybe you should get your eyes checked. They’re all labeled! And it’s damn water refills. They’re in gallons, not boxes.”

“Maybe you should fix your organization skills.”

“At least it wasn’t difficult like last time because it was piled all over the place! Do you know how many times I had to open up crates only to find cakes?” Her glare instantly went to Cole.

“Hey, don’t drag me into your sibling drama. And don’t bring my cakes into it,” Cole raised up his hands, going behind Zane who shook his head.

Their voices began to mix together again, a range of shouting from the siblings and words to try to ease them. I bit the inside of my cheek, feeling that heat come up to my face.

Really, this wasn’t how I wanted Satomi and Miho to see my group. Not the best impression.

“I swear they get along well,” I muttered over to Satomi as we climbed up the steps to the deck.

She just chuckled softly, shaking her head but there was a slight distress written on her face. It was as if whatever she had done with Miho earlier wasn’t fully helping. She offered a smile and said, “It’s fine. I find it entertaining.”

That made my embarrassment lessen a bit. Thank the First she doesn’t mind it.

Miho on the other hand…

I peeked over to her. She was unreadable as usual, but the way she was staring at the scene with her tails swishing more than usual accompanied by a twitch of her ear said a lot. I truly hoped she’s not doubting that we’re capable of handling crucial situations. She should know if she had been living here in Ninjago long enough to see the chaos this city had went through, especially the Oni case almost a year ago.

She glanced towards my direction and I stared back. Her eyes flickered all over my face as if saying ‘this is what you work with?’ I just gave her an apologizing smile and a shrug before she turned away with a heavy sigh.

“Nanto. There are a lot to be done,” she muttered.

What did she meant by that?

She rolled her shoulders back, lifting her hands then suddenly clapped once. It was loud enough that it made me jump. Even Satomi flinched from the corner of my eye. The sound caused the whole hangar to become deadly silent, the others snapping their heads our way, frozen from their positions—mid-argument with mouths hanging open.

They looked stupid, I’ll admit. I swallowed the snicker threatening to come up my throat.

Miho guided her hands back under the sleeves of her hakue slowly yet elegantly as my team stared. “Are we done?”

Some of them cleared their throats, straightening themselves and almost forming a straight line beside each other. Miho nodded as they stood together, her eyes sharp and calculating to each of them.

“You have a lot of patience to not lose your temper on them, Oni,” she said to me. “You have my respect, truly. I would have lost it long ago if I were you.”

I chuckled, sharpening the collars of my gi. “Well, being with them for years, I got used to it.”

“A patient leader comes a long way.” Her gaze traveled back to the others.

Those words made me stand straighter, a small tug coming up to the corner of my lips from her compliment.

“It appears that everyone’s here.”

I turned around, seeing Uncle and Mom coming up the steps into the deck with us. Mom went beside me, putting a hand on my shoulder.

“Wu told me about your little talk,” she whispered. “Feeling any better?”

I gave her a smile, putting my hand atop of hers. “Yes, Ma, I’m fine.”

She gave a nod, pinching my cheek gently that I chuckled—and a bit flustered by her display of affection.

Uncle stepped forward, hands behind his back as he inspected each of us. His attention landed on Satomi, a small smile coming up his lips. “Did you rest well, young one?”

She gave a small, respectful bow. “Hai, Sensei.”

“Good. I hope you’re ready.” His smile turned into a grin as he went over to Miho. “What’s the next step?”

Miho walked over to Satomi, putting a hand on her shoulder. “Are you ready to play?”

Satomi nodded, gripping the strap of her shamisen.

“Good,” Miho turned to us again. “We need an open space.”

Uncle nodded, looking over to Pixal. That silent conversation was enough confirmation of what was about to happen. Everyone instantly began to move, going up to the bridge as we all got into our respective places. I went over to the controls, beginning to press buttons as the Bounty roared to life.

“Lloyd, are the main engines operational?” Pixal began.

“Engines operational,” I said.

She nodded, turning to Zane. “All navigation systems online and functioning?”

“All navigation systems are functioning normally.”

To Nya. “Communication?”

“All tested and clear.”

To Cole. “Are all safety and firefighting equipment checked and active?”

“All good.”

To Jay and Kai. “All double-checked and nothing forgotten?”

“Yup,” Jay gave a thumbs-up.

“Fired up and ready to roll,” Kai said with a smirk.

“Copy that,” Pixal began to steer, the doors of the hangar beginning to open with a loud buzz. “Please hold tight. We are now lifting off ground and to air.”

The sun peeked through, causing me to blink rapidly as it touched my eyes while the mouth of the hangar slowly but surely unfurled. The sky covered in the shades of reds and oranges—knowing that the world was awakening to another dawn.

* * *

“We are ready to depart,” Pixal said through the speakers, the powerful rumbling of the engines causing fiery red-orange waves to surround us.

Those sounds would usually be painful for me to hear, but after what Miho taught me inside that room had helped me immensely. Even though the sound still bothered me a little, it wasn’t as much as before to the point I’ll cower away. I played her advice again inside my head, remembering how to keep the sounds maintained:

“If you want the sound bearable, you must instruct yourself to do so.” She placed a hand on my chest, my heart beating quickly from the hustle and bustle of the others outside the room. “You were correct on using your heartbeat to keep them steady, but that is only the surface. You are the conductor. You must order the sounds to be soft or forte inside of you. Focus on it. Close your eyes. Listen to the tempo of your heart and how you want the music played. Soft or strong. Then tell them to do so. Instruct them to not stop until told.”

“Whenever you are ready, Satomi.”

Pixal’s voice pulled me back to reality. The sounds steadying after I listened to my heartbeat and focused on it, using the power inside me to instruct the sounds to soften. I glanced up at Miho who kept her gaze at me. I knew she was trying to see if I could maintain it as long as possible, she told me to—but she also told me that I could take breaks in between then do it again.

“Listen to me intently, wakatta?”

I nodded firmly, taking the shamisen in front of me and took the bachi from my pocket.

“I will warn you now, this will steal an immense amount of your energy again. Demo, you are young, you will restore them faster than me with just a few moments of rest.”

“Hai.”

She took a deep breath in and began to hum the song. I listened for a moment, letting her finish it before I began to play it. Replaying the melody inside my head.

That same pulling sensation came again, making me shiver and the urge to pull away resurfacing. It was a feeling that it made you think that shamisen was trying to read you—knowing you and identifying whether your soul was worthy to play it. And Shikisha appeared to let me.

A spark came from in front of us as the ship hovered in the air, a tiny spark then vanished after a second long.

“Concentrate, Hime. I told you before, do not resist the pull,” Miho muttered sternly.

I listened, getting my focus back and opening myself a bit more to the shamisen. My hands began to shake, sweating as I tried my best to keep holding the bachi and not let it fall. With a few more deep breaths, I closed my eyes and strummed the last note.

Everything was silent. Footsteps came from above in the bridge, then they halted.

“What in the hell?” I recognized the voice as Jay’s.

And when I opened my eyes, I stared in awe as a large portal swirled in front of us. It appeared as if it a gigantic blade had slashed through the space there and tore it open as clouds shifted around it, following its shape. We can’t see the other side, but I felt it—we all felt it for sure.

Behind that was the world where I truly belonged. A world that I should’ve been in from the start. The moment I was born.

That was it. No turning back.

I had the urge to look back—lean on the edge of the ship and see that familiar setting of the land around us. The air, the nature, the sky. Maybe even get a glance of Ninjago City from here.

Remember everything that had happened before fully committing.

But I didn’t. I stayed planted on my spot.

Miho shifted beside me. She stared at it for a moment before glancing over to Master Wu. He stared back then looked over to Pixal as he gave her a subtle nod.

The Bounty lurched forward, the portal’s light devouring us inch by inch—until Ninjago was gone, and the Kitsune Realm claimed us.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 13

Home in the Snow

The change from one realm to another was instant, and the first thing that caught me off guard was the cold that I forgot about my exhaustion and shuddered intensely. The morning from the other realm had vanished; nightfall had come again.

I pulled Shikisha closer to me as if it would give me warmth. My breath let out puffs of crisp smoke as snow hailed down from above, landing on my lashes and thin sweater. I wrapped my tails around myself, feeling its warmth and fluffiness on my skin.

Thank the gods I had tails.

“You guys could’ve said something about this.” Jay’s voice rang from above as he banged on the bridge’s door. “Let me in! I’m freezing.”

I turned to face Miho who stood unaffected. “Why didn’t you tell us it would be snowing?”

She didn’t say something for a moment, staring at the storm as if there was a problem to it. “It is not usually this strong.”

I raised a brow. Strong? “What do you mean?” I looked around, watching the crying waves of the storm.

Miho shook her head, looking back at me. “It is nothing to concern yourself. As for the location, the destination is always distinct for each person who can travel from realm to realm. I did not know where we would arrive when you played the melody, especially you do not know this realm.”

She glanced down at me and said, “But it seems that the shamisen has guided us where we ought to be. It knows you better than I thought.”

The shamisen knew me? I glanced down at it, tracing the edges of the fox on the dō kakke. And then, I processed her words. “Wait, what do you mean it guided us where we have to go?”

Miho walked over to the railing, looking below. I followed, leaning forward on it and followed where she was looking at, trying to see what it could be. Below was nothing but pure snow, the mountain ranges barely visible through the fog.

It shook the sails, some melting when they touched the engines; the wind restless as that the whole ship shook and creaked that I caved in a little to myself from the amount of sounds coming all at once.

“Do you know any place we can take shelter?” Master Wu shouted, muffled by the gushing wind as he walked to our direction. Lloyd’s mother beside him while he held his straw hat down. “I don’t think it would be wise to fly around in this storm.”

He was right, even though I wasn’t as experienced as them, I could tell that this ship wouldn’t be safe with nothing to see.

In the bridge, I spotted the others crowded together, their faces contorted into worry and their waves going through fast spikes. Some had their colors (light blue, white, red, and so on) mixed with a bit of yellow.

From the way Nya pointed at the large screen where it glitched a little that it won’t give a clean reading, it was sure enough what it meant.

I turned back to Miho, seeing her still staring down. “Miho, is there any place we can land?”

She was silent, her eyes flickering around with purpose and sharp that a bit of her Kitsune came. Her pupils turned into slits and glowed gold through the gray skies. She seemed to search for something deep below in the snow. Then, she shifted, her hand resting on the rail as she leaned forward.

“Are,” she nudged her head below.

I squinted my eyes, trying to see what she was talking about. I saw nothing.

“Hime, let your Kitsune see through the snow.”

With a deep breath in as I closed my eyes and slowly exhaled, I opened them and tried again. I left myself open, letting my Kitsune to appear a little more.

Come on, show me what she sees.

After a few more tries of surveying what was below us, something finally caught my attention. I leaned forward, squinting as it got more and more visible.

There below, and a not so far from us and small, was a large buke-yashiki. In other words, a samurai residence from what I had learned from my used to be grandparents.

It seemed empty, no light or sign of life coming from it. Its sweeping roofs covered in snow, making it hard to spot.

Miho turned to Master Wu. “There is a clearing below where we may land and shelter. We may settle there and wait until the storm eases.”

He leaned to look below, but shook his head. “I don’t see it. You tell the Ninja of it.”

She nodded and went straight for the stairs to the bridge that I followed her. As I was going up the stairs, I spotted Master Wu guiding Misako below decks as she shivered a little. I pressed my lips together seeing it, but pushed on forward.

Miho and I entered the bridge, sighing as I instantly felt the warmth. The others were back to their places again, trying to figure out what to do. Zane worked on the navigation, pressing buttons that I don’t know what they do.

Lloyd noticed us enter and turned to our direction in an instant, leaving his station. “You two alright? Satomi?”

His eyes landed on me, looking up and down as if confirming whether I was before settling back to my eyes.

I nodded. “We’re fine.”

“Can any of you see a thing out there?” Miho said.

Lloyd shook his head. “Everything’s blurred. Our navigations aren’t responding. It began acting wonky when we passed through the portal.”

“A side-effect of our travel here.” She glanced over to me, and I looked away as a heat traveled up from my chest to my cheeks. “Do not worry, it was your first. I did not expect you to be able to make it steady. You had tried your best, Hime, but do keep it mind for the future.”

“Yes, Miho-san,” I muttered, feeling a bit of shame for not being able to give us a smoother transfer.

With a nod from her, she went over to Pixal as the two began to talk. Their expressions were serious as Miho pointed something outside, almost like she was giving directions. Lloyd stayed by me, a silence between us before he cleared his throat and shifted a little from his spot.

“You doing good?” he whispered, feeling my ear twitch just to pick up his words.

“Fine… I guess.”

A small pause. “Honestly, it feels like we didn’t leave Ninjago at all,” he chuckled, shrugging a shoulder. “But it might be because we haven’t seen the changes. For sure it’ll come hit in later.”

I nodded, offering him a smile.

I was glad that Lloyd was trying to be cheerful at this moment. I wouldn’t lie, finally arriving to the realm where I was supposed to call my home was a little nerve-racking. We might not be able to see anything yet through the storm, but I could already imagine the possibilities of them all.

Everything from the architecture to the nature around us. Outside was nothing but constant waves of icy-white, a color similar to Zane’s aura whenever I glanced at him. But, unlike his calmed (that was often constant) waves, the outside was the opposite.

They hit the roof of the Bounty with much rage, almost as if they were trying to pull us away and knowing us as trespassers. Pixal, who was by the helm, stared up at Miho as her metallic eyes narrowed a little.

“Are you positive?”

“I know this realm like the back of my hand,” I heard Miho, her voice confident and sounded offended by the question. “This is my home for two millennium.”

Lloyd shifted a little beside me, almost as if he also heard the conversation as he released a heavy breath through his lips. I gave him an apologizing look for her behavior, but he shook his head and muttered an ‘it’s fine.’

Perhaps I would’ve understood why Miho reacted like that if I had lived here as long as she had. This was her home, after all, she knew this place than any of us and she served the Father—my grandfather—and my mother for that long.

The ship soon began to move as Pixal steered, Miho still beside her as her lips moved and voice muffled while she gave directions as the Bounty slowly but surely began to descend.

After a few moments of navigating blindly and only from Miho’s instructions, the ship soon landed. Thankfully, it was a smooth way down.

Jay was the first to bound for the entrance of the bridge, opening the door with a look of excitement. We were met with a screaming hail. Some of the snow blew inside, causing me to shiver as it slapped my face.

He shut it, recoiling. He turned to us, his eyes flickering from one person to another before landing on Zane. “How about you go out first?” he gave a meek smile.

Zane sighed, shaking his head as he opened the door again and went out.

He squinted his glowing eyes, scanning around. “Please, tread with caution!” he yelled through the wind. “The deck is topped with snow, and the floors are quite slippery.”

Miho went first, effortlessly walking through the covered steps without a sign of struggle or worry. She turned, staring right at me as if telling me to follow next.

I listened, swallowing while clutching the strap of Shikisha and carefully took a few steps on the snow. If only Miho had said something about having an area that would be nothing but this, I would’ve brought some kind of coat.

I slipped, letting out a yelp. Zane caught my arm, helping me regain balance.

Seriously? You really had to slip in front of these people. He already warned us!

“Thank you,” I said softly, hoping he would hear it through the chaos but also wishing that he didn’t notice how embarrassed I was.

After regaining my steps, I slowly walked over to Miho as she began to go down the stairs.

The others soon followed, heading to the deck while Pixal went over to where Master Wu and Misako retreated. I stood beside Miho, her form solid with her eyes narrowed and out into the distance. She was in her element, and it was noticeable

“Tell me what you see, Hime,” she began.

This was another one of her trainings. I looked forward with a squint. At first nothing appeared, but it began to clear as I focused more and saw the same structure from before in bird’s eye view in front of us. It was much more prominent with its paper screens and cedar walls; lanterns unlit as they flailed from where they hung.

“Shelter,” I answered.

“Good. We shall stay there until the storm ceases.” She turned to the others. “Grab as much needed supplies we will all need. We will take shelter in the structure ahead of us.”

“What shelter?” Kai shouted, hands covering his eyes as he looked ahead. “I don’t see anything out there.”

“Follow and you will see.”

They looked at one another. “You heard her. Let’s move it!” Lloyd said, heading for the lower decks as the others trailed behind.

“Help them,” she said to me, “I shall look around for a safe passage where the snow is not so deep.”

I nodded, taking her permission as I followed the others down the deck. Everyone was bustling around, Zane and Pixal going through the storage as they filled empty bags with water and food while they others gathered their clothes and weapons. All of them working in sync, not needing to say a word and already knowing which one needed which.

I watched for a moment, unsure of what to do and not wanting to intrude to break their momentum. As I was about to step aside, I spotted Misako and Master Wu tending through the scrolls they had brought. He noticed me, giving me a smile as he gestured over.

Squeezing the strap of the shamisen to calm my pounding heart, I walked over to them and bowed politely.

“How are you fairing, Satomi? Quite the sight of them moving together, hm?” Wu started, gently tying the scrolls shut as he put them inside his satchel.

“I’m doing fine. Are you two well?” I said, checking on them as Misako gave a gentle smile.

“Don’t worry about us, we’ve done these things before and been through worse.” She shouldered her backpack, walking over to me as her voice softened. “Are you sure you don’t need anything? It must be a bit daunting being here now.”

I shook my head. “I don’t feel any different yet. Just like Lloyd told me, maybe it’ll kick in later when the storm stops.”

She nodded, patting my shoulder. “You’re handling this well. Not a lot do in your place.”

I simply gave her a respectful smile, my eyes trailing over to their bags. “Do you need help? I can carry some of it.”

“Oh, no, we can handle it.”

“Please, I insist,” I went over, taking some of the bag she was carrying.

After a few back and forth, she finally let me carry two.

Some conversations came from outside, making my ears twitch as my head snapped over to the entrance of the room that we were in. I heard the voices of Kai and Cole, saying something about Cole carrying the heavier loads, which the said man didn’t seemed to mind. I listened carefully, focusing on their voices.

“You guys go up, I’m going to call Sensei and Mom.” It was Lloyd, footsteps heading our way as the rest began to fade away.

“Don’t take too long,” Kai called.

Lloyd soon appeared, popping from the corner with his bag behind him and two other on his arms. “You guys ready to go?” His eyes flickered over to me instantly and he gave a smile. “You need a hand there?”

I shook my head, adjusting the bags in my arms. “I’m okay.”

His attention went back to his mother, going straight to them as he took the rest of the satchels that were on the table. Misako tried to stop him, giving him a look as she held onto them. Lloyd tugged at it.

“Mom, please?”

After a second of silent stares, Misako sighed and let go of the satchels as Lloyd took them with him, readjusting everything in his arms to be able to hold them all at once. I’m surprised he can still walk with how much stuff he had with him, he almost looked like he could topple over. He gave a nod and went out, hearing his footsteps recede up the stairs with long strides.

“He reminds me of his father with that attitude,” I heard Misako.

“But he has your stubbornness,” Master Wu chuckled as I stepped aside, letting them go first. “Come, child, we don’t want them to keep waiting out in that cold.”

I followed behind, going up to the upper deck again as I blinked rapidly and shivered. We spotted Miho standing on the same spot almost as if she hadn’t moved an inch since we disappeared.

The others were a few distance away, hesitant to go near her from how she glared out as if she was ready to pounce.

With a couple of excuses to go past them, I stood beside her again and looked up at her. A few snow had stuck themselves onto her tail and ears, her lashes almost covered in it as her eyes kept flickering around into the distance, slightly glazed. She blinked, her focus now coming to me.

“I will lead. You all follow and do not lag behind. Do not go past the path I will take unless you desire to be buried in snow,” she said to us, her voice a bit muffled but enough to be heard. She focused on me again. “Junbi wa?”

With a nod from me, she stepped out of the ship and into the snow—taking a few steps forwards before glancing behind. A sign that it was my turn. I pressed my lips together that began to become numb, gripping the satchels a bit more and made sure that Shikisha was still there.

After a second of hesitation, I went with her.

From my weight, the snow sank, reaching below my knees as the cold past through my shoes. I shuddered, teeth chattering as I wrapped my tails around myself.

This was not how I wished to be welcomed.

More crunch came from behind me, knowing that one by one they began to follow us as Miho waited for a moment before continuing on forwards. She rested a hand on my shoulder, causing me to walk beside her while dragging my buried legs onto the snow.

Until now, she wasn’t affected by it, walking with ease on the snow even though her own legs were inches deep in. How does she do it? I wished at that very moment I had her experience.

“How do you know which ones are better to walk on?” I said through chattering jaws, trying to have a conversation to get my mind off the cold.

“The depth. You will discern it when you see snow constantly and the path shallower than the rest.” She looked around for a moment before gesturing at something in front of us. “See the path we are taking?” she began, making me follow that direction. “You see how this path is sunken than the ones around it?”

I squinted my eyes, trying to see it. Only to find…

Nothing.

They all looked the same to me. All covered in snow and high up like miniature hills. I shook my head.

“As I guessed, you would not notice.” A smile came to her face, small but there. “It is difficult to detect for someone who is new to it. You will learn over time.”

That was all our conversation, after that was utter silence. Jay, however, had new things to say about how cold it was every two drags—telling Kai to use his fire or something to warm us up. That ended with an argument through the storm that I’m surprised that they can argue at such a condition.

At the end, Miho warned them if they do so, we all would get caught.

They went quiet after that.

It took a few minutes of struggle to go past the snow and in front of the buke-yashiki. And here we were now—standing in front of the sealed gates, all of us looking up at it.

“Great, closed!” Jay said, throwing up his hands. “Good. We walked in this storm for I don’t know how long and ended up standing in front of nothing!”

Miho sighed, muttering under her breath. “Kare wa damatte inai no ka?”

I gave a smile, chuckling softly at how she questioned if he can’t just stay quiet. It was quite entertaining seeing her this annoyed with Jay’s constant yapping, I could still hear him from the background even. I wouldn’t blame her, some silence would be nice as well.

Miho took her attention back to the gate, putting her hands on it and pushed. It creaked ominously, everything around us suddenly hushing as if the storm had shut its mouth and listened to the gate’s command.

Jay’s words halted, blinking as he stared at it. Miho turned to face him with her eyes squinted.

His mouth opened and closed. “Right. Of course, it’s open. I know that.”

Miho muttered something under her breath, going inside as we followed her. Just as I observed from before, the place was deserted. No lights, the sliding doors closed, the garden covered in snow and unattended.

She made her way to the terrace, leaving her geta outside as she slid the doors open. We trailed behind, taking off our own shoes as we stepped into wooden floors. She stood aside, waiting for all of us before closing the door shut and muting the noise from outside.

Finally, some peace.

I unwrapped my tails around myself, but the cold still seeped through as I breathed out smoke. It was dark inside, barely anything evident except the outlines of furnitures. I blinked a couple of times before everything began to clear, thanking my Kitsune quietly. But even so, it was still difficult to see properly.

Miho walked forward, standing beside me again. We locked eyes before she clapped her hands twice. In an instant, the candles burst into flames that I winced at the unexpected brightness, illuminating the whole room. I heard hisses behind me from the others as well.

“A warning would be nice,” Kai said with a restrained groan.

“Follow me, please,” Miho turned, walking deeper into the house.

I went along, glancing behind as I spotted some of them looking at one another then following. Miho went through the halls with familiarity, turning from corner to corner before getting us to the zashiki (or the guest room).

We all placed the satchels and bags we were carrying on one corner of the room while Miho sat on the tatami floor in front of the small table. The others took their own spots. I kept the shamisen close to me, too afraid to leave it alone as I explored around.

It was a home like any other buke-yashiki that I had seen. The blue flames illuminated past a few paper screens, letting me catch a glimpse of what was behind it. It was a simple room, nothing too extravagant with a few trinkets here and there of wakizashi. A few paintings were around, as well as some ornaments, and ikebana on a shelf not so far away.

I can feel Miho’s eyes following me, making my tails twitch. I stopped in front of a painting of a man, his hair pulled up in a chonmange. His expression sharp and calculated with his shoulders rolled back. A few facial hair were evident, but it was clean and trimmed just enough to show his well structured face.

His ears were present as well as his tails—nine, I counted; the colors a shade of blue, just like the tips of my tails and ears.

Most people would’ve feared him, maybe they had by the coldness of his eyes; colder than the weather outside. He appeared like a proficient and experienced samurai.

I wouldn’t be surprised if he were a general and led his own troops—or maybe the whole samurai troop. But I do wonder who he was and how Miho knew this place.

A shift came from behind made me turn around, watching as Master Wu sat down with a sigh. He rubbed his hands together. “A fine place you have found, Miho. We thank you.”

“Do not thank me,” she said, posture upright. “You should thank the spirit of the latest Shōgun. This is his home.”

“Who’s that?” Cole asked, blowing onto his hands and rubbing.

“Lord Ichiro Fuyuhiko. Satomi’s father.”

My gaze snapped over to her.

Miho’s attention now faced me. “This is your father’s abode.” She gestured something behind me. “You were just staring at his portrait.

I turned around again, my lips parting as I came face-to-face to the painting of my father.

My father, was a samurai—no, not just a samurai. A Shōgun. The highest rank and title in the military. That was my father’s title, and it truly said a lot about him.

He really lived in this mountain alone? A place constantly covered in snow and no sign of a close village anywhere?

His home proved enough of his rank and status through its largeness, but I never expected to have a father that was a fighter and with such an important role. Yet again, my mother was an Emperor’s daughter. What else did I expect?

Lloyd pushed himself up, walking over next to me as he inspected the painting. His attention stayed there for a moment before moving to the scroll beside it with writings and inked pictures. They were images of a man holding a katana, seeming to be doing different forms and tilting the weapon in different angles. He squinted his eyes, almost as if trying read what was written.

He got a few words right, muttering them, “Shizu… Yuki. What is this?” Lloyd asked, turning around to face the others again.

Miho stared at it with a stern look. “Shizukana Yuki. In other words, Quiet Snow or The Silent Snow. It is Lord Fuyuhiko’s special move. Deadly fast. Quiet like snow that gently falls to the ground.”

“If it’s his special move, why keep it up there where people could see and try to copy it? That’s just dumb,” Jay made a face, almost judging.

“It may seem so, but one can not master it without precise practice,” Miho said, smoothing out the folds of her hakue. “Many had tried, but the origin of that deadly strike rooted from the Fuyuhiko Kenjutsu. Only the Fuyuhiko lineage knows those attacks. And since the Shizukana Yuki originated from him, no one knows the full detail of it and no one else is taught of it.”

She turned back to me and said, “Your father’s family were strict with passing what has been taught by their blood. They will not teach another who is outside of the family name—unless none is left to teach it to, and they find someone worthy enough to teach.”

I glanced back at the hanged scroll. Only my father’s lineage were taught this move by their elders. But who would teach me if I’m the only Fuyuhiko left?

A silence loomed over us, a sudden shift in the room’s atmosphere caused me to look back at her. She stared right into my eyes. They narrowed a little, but they were soft as if trying to reassure me.

After a few moments, Kai spoke, “So, what do we do now? What’s the plan?”

Mine and Miho’s eye contact broke to regard him. “Our plan for now is for all of you to rest. We will wait until the storm ceases and we will walk to the village here.”

“Wait, walk?” Jay said, his voice cracking a little. “In that who-knows-how-deep snow?”

“Yes. We are going to walk in that ‘who-knows-how-deep’ snow like we did earlier.”

Jay groaned, his head banging on the table as he sulked.

“Why not take the Bounty?” Nya asked.

“Too risky. If a neighboring region hears and see it, we are doomed. One of the team would be alerted and reported back to either Satomi’s aunt or uncle. I do not trust any of them as of now. Thankfully, the storm covered our arrival. This region is the only place I trust.”

She turned to me, her expression critical. “They are loyal to the Fuyuhiko Family. They will not say a word even with our current situation of having two Oni with us. They know me and trust me. They will trust you too, Hime, as you bear your father’s name.”

Another silence came from all of us as Miho stood. We watched as she headed out of the room and flicked her wrist before turning a corner. The azure flames dimmed as if listening to her words of letting us rest. Neither of us dared to say a word, Kai’s hands clenched into fists while glaring at the floor.

“Let’s all get some rest,” Lloyd said finally. “We have a lot of things to do tomorrow.”

“Agreed,” Master Wu followed. “No time for arguments. We shall discuss all of your concerns tomorrow when we all are well rested.”

The others began to lie down on the tatami floor, worried expressions written on their faces. Lloyd put a hand on my shoulder, making me tense at the sudden contact.

His eyes were gentle, almost worried with the whole conversation about my father. I caught sight of his waves again, and that hint of gold in them. That made me ease up a little.

Lloyd, seeming to have noticed me calm down, gave a little nod before heading close by the entrance of the room. He sat on one side of the door and leaned back on the wall, a hand resting on the weapon beside him as if ready to grab it and fight.

I sat as well, looking up at the painting of my father for a moment. I wonder if I bared any resemblance of him and my mother, except the whole Kitsune features?

I squinted my eyes. Well, I do kind of have his face structure.

Soon enough, I lied down—resting Shikisha beside me, while facing the painting. At the thought of it, I suddenly remembered the song in my dream, how I planned on asking Miho about it and whether she would recognize it. But today’s events finally settled in as the fatigue hit me hard, and I could feel my eyes drooping to a close and I couldn’t fight it anymore.

Maybe some other time.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 14

The Journey Ahead

A tap on my shoulder made me snap open my eyes. Hand automatically gripping the handle of my dao, halfway out already, as I readied myself to push off the wall.

My eyes darted around the room, looking for the intruder—until it settled on Mom. The sight of her made me relax, feeling foolish to get so tense. The tap had been gentle, enough to hint it wasn’t a threat.

“It’s morning, Lloyd,” she whispered softly. “The storm stopped.”

I leaned back, sheathing my weapon again. I glanced around, the events from yesterday coming back to me. The others were still asleep; Cole snoring, loud enough to make the walls tremble like the earth shifting beneath us. It was still slightly dim inside; the blue flames were fully extinguished. The paper windows showed a bit of sunlight, still intact and unbothered even with last night’s chaos.

I spotted Satomi at the same place where I last left her, breathing gently and asleep like the rest with her back facing us. The tension in my body loosened, knowing that she and everyone else were safe and well.

Uncle’s absence caught my notice, which made me frown. I looked back at Mom. “Where’s Uncle?”

“He went with Miho when she came in a few minutes ago. They’re making tea and food for the rest.”

I nodded, standing with a slight groan as I massaged my shoulder, feeling the painful pop that came from it. I should’ve slept in a better position.

“Do they need help?” I said, thinking that might’ve been the reason why Mom had woken me up.

She nodded, already moving as I followed her out quietly. Our footsteps were light on the wooden floor, walking together in utter silence for a moment.

“I’m proud that you’re sticking close to Satomi,” Mom began, “trying to reassure her as much as you could.”

“Someone has to,” I said as we turned left in the hall. “I’ve been in her spot before, it’s a lot to take in. She has it worse than me.”

Mom nodded, patting my arm in an affectionate way. It was true that Satomi had it worse. The reveal of my title wasn’t as big as hers—a daughter of a ruler of a realm. I had people to guide me. A family to have my back like Uncle and my team before Mom came into the picture.

But Satomi? She has Miho, yes, but in my opinion it wasn’t enough. A parent should be there. A blood relation that she could lean on and someone to reassure her.

At least one was fine. What she got instead was a ghost of a house of what used to be her dad’s and the rest of the Fuyuhiko clan that was now occupied with nothing but dusted furnitures and paintings.

That was the reveal. That was how she learned half of her family was gone by taking shelter in this isolated house to protect ourselves from a storm. Not only that, reveal after reveal had stacked on top of another in a single day.

Erasing everyone’s memories she grew up with and loved. And now this?

She was back to zero the moment we arrived.

Yet, she held on.

I balled my fists, shoving it inside the pockets of my gi.

She didn’t deserve this. To be alone. For everything to pile on her all of a sudden.

In the name of the First, I swore to grab her hand when she can’t hold on anymore. Just like my family had done for me.

We both soon stopped in front of a door, Mom sliding it open to reveal a kitchen and entered. Uncle was stirring something in a clay pot, while Miho was cutting vegetables. She glanced towards us the moment the doors parted.

The place was simple. The part Mom and I stood on was a wooden platform, raised a few inches above the dirt floor. It wasn’t like the modern kitchens back home. None of those gas stoves—just the use of charcoal fires burning in those mountain-shaped cookers where Uncle stirred the pot. What were they even called?

“Misako-san, will you please take over?” Miho wiped her hands on a cloth as Mom gave me a nod and took over the cutting. Miho went to me.

“Do you need me to do something?” I asked as she went over to a cabinet and took a bunch of cylindrical cups and a wooden tray.

She took a delicate-looking tea pot from the cabinet as well, and put tea leaves inside. She took care of it quickly, a process that was similar to how Uncle brew his. She put the pot on a coster on the tray along with the cups and handed them to me.

“Wake everyone and give this to them to warm up,” she said before turning back to help Uncle and Mom.

That was quick.

I simply headed out, retracing the same halls Mom and I walked earlier, arriving back to the waiting room that we had slept in. When I came inside, opening the door with my foot, it was still the same. Jay had shifted a little, practically hugging Kai at this point while the other oblivious. The rest had not moved an inch and still asleep—Zane and Pixal more like on sleep mode and leaning against each other. I shook my head as I put the tray down on the low table.

With a sigh and placing my hands on my hips, I soon began to pat everyone on the shoulders. “Come on, wake up. Drink some tea. Unfreeze your nerves,” I began, mostly shaking Cole more roughly knowing he was a deep sleeper.

Jay groaned, followed by Kai. “What time is it?” he said groggily.

“What?” Kai yawned before noticing Jay’s arms around him and pushed him off. “Get off me!”

“Ow! Why so rough?”

“Oi, shut up! It’s too early to hear you both whining,” Nya groaned, fixing her messy hair through tired eyes. “Don’t make me make it hurt for the both of you.”

A chuckle left me as I went over to Satomi, kneeling and gently shaking her. Underneath my fingers, I felt her skin cold even though her tails were wrapped around her.

I didn’t even noticed that. She wasn’t even shivering—her sweater was too thin. How the hell was she able to tolerate all of that cold?

I swallowed the lump in my throat, exhaling deeply. “Sato, time to wake up. Drink some tea.”

She sat up, blinking a couple of times before looking at me with narrowed eyes as if processing everything. She glanced around, then relaxed as if finally remembering everything as well. I offered a little smile, going over to the tray as I took one of the cups.

Everyone began to move sluggishly, Nya already having a cup on her hand and drinking as well as Kai who was still silently glaring at Jay. Cole did a few stretches, rolling his shoulders and upper back stretch before settling down. Zane and Pixal had now woken up as well, helping each other as they joined the rest.

I poured some for myself and Satomi before heading back to her. I sat crossed legs again and offered hers.

“Careful, it’s hot.”

“Arigatou,” she replied, her voice small as she took it and wrapped her hands around the small cup.

I took a sip of mine, watching as she took her own. “Did you sleep well?”

Satomi gave a small shrug and muttered, “Just fine. The floor wasn’t convenient.”

A chuckle left me. “You’ll get used to it over time. Who knows, maybe it’s just for today.”

She smiled at me, giving a brief nod before drinking again.

I glanced up when I heard rummaging, seeing Cole had stood and went through his satchel. He pulled out a piece of cake in a container. It appeared frozen, the inside frosted. He turned to Kai.

Kai raised a brow, looking up and down at Cole. “Seriously? This early?”

Cole shrugged, nudging it over to him again. “Just do it, man. I’m craving.”

The other groaned, taking it into his hand. Fire flickered from his palm, igniting a little, but it suddenly died. Kai frowned, and does it again. Once again, it died.

“What the hell? Why’s my power not working?”

“What do you mean not working?” I said, straightening up.

“No—I mean, I can feel it. I know it’s there and I can try, but it’s… heavier or something. It’s hard to control, unlike back home.” Kai tried again, but failed. A spark came out and he cursed, seeming to have burned himself as he shook his hand with a hiss. Frustration took over his face. “The fuck?”

That was unusual, Kai never had any problems with his power before. Maybe he was still out of it since he just woke up?

I placed down my cup on the floor, rolling my wrist to warm up. I mirrored them to one another, concentrating as I began to summon my own.

Then, I felt it.

Almost like a weight was pulling my element away from me, almost like not letting me use it. My power flickered, the green appearing but instantly dispersed into tiny lights. Humming, I tried again, holding my breath and doubling my concentration. The same thing happened. It didn’t work. I released a breath out, panting.

Not good. So not good.

Why was this happening? It almost felt like the first time I gained my powers, where I had no absolute clue on how to let it out and turn them into what I can do now.

“Lloyd?” Satomi called. “What’s wrong?”

I shook my head. “I don’t know. It’s not responding as usual. The element is almost like… denying me.”

The others began to try as well.

“This is not funny, both of you. You know I hate morning pranks.” Nya placed down her cup on the table, beginning to do her familiar gestures with her hands. The contents of her cup began to levitate out. “See? I’m doing just—” it suddenly went back in “—fine. Okay, well, that’s something.

“What’s happening?” Jay said, his attention going from one person to another. “Why does it feel like my powers are going to zap me?”

“Agreed. My own appears as if it would freeze my systems if I force it,” Zane joined.

Pixal, who was beside him, began a scan. It lasted for a quick second before she shook her head. “Unusual. I do not see any difference.”

“I’m not even gonna try,” Cole said, backing away. “I don’t want to accidentally make an earthquake.”

Not long after, food arrived. Mom and Uncle carried trays filled with bowls of hot soup. They placed it down on the table, but no one moved as we kept staring at our hands. Kai let out a frustrated groan, and appeared to be on the verge of throwing the cake to the other side of the room.

“You all look troubled,” Uncle said.

I looked up. “Sensei, something’s wrong.”

“Wrong?”

“Yeah, our powers aren’t responding!” Nya groaned, the tea not even lifting up anymore. “It’s—”

“Being fucking stubborn,” Kai stood, chest heaving. “It’s not… doing its thing”

Uncle glanced at each of us as we nodded in agreement. He tried as well, but even he was struggling. His own element betraying him. Uncle frowned, running his hands through his beard with narrowed eyes. “Curious.”

Mom knelt beside me, resting a hand on my shoulder. “How about you all eat first, hm? Maybe you guys are hungry.”

“Yeah... maybe we’re just hungry. Yeah, that could be it!” Jay sat in front of one, instantly digging in as the rest followed.

It didn’t felt like it.

It didn’t made any sense.

Our elements had never done this before. This wasn’t good. Not good to be this defenseless in a realm where it was in a middle of a war.

My hands began to shake, my breath becoming heavy and uneven. I looked up at her, our eyes catching. “Mom, I—”

“Lloyd, go eat,” she said softly, taking my hands as I eased off a little. “Eat, okay? You need it. To stay strong.”

I took a deep breath in, nodding while trying to calm down. I steeled myself, standing and offering a hand to Satomi. She stared at me with worry in her eyes before taking it as we both went to get into our own spots around the table.

There was a moment of silence as we slurped our food. Pixal and Zane not really needing it, but they still sat on their respective places to relax with us. They were deep in a conversation, for sure talking about our dilemma with our powers as Pixal was doing deeper diagnostics on Zane.

From beside me, I noticed Satomi constantly looking over to the door; the shamisen now beside her. She hadn’t even touched her food.

“Where’s Miho?” She looked over to Mom and Uncle.

“She excused herself after cooking,” Mom said. “I saw her going over to one of the rooms from the other end of the hall.”

Satomi gave a nod and was about to stand, but Mom put down her spoon as she gave a stern look. “Sit down, dear, you need to eat.”

“I need to see what she’s doing. Make sure she’s fine,” Satomi replied quickly, close to fully standing up as she reached for the shamisen as well.

The tremble in her voice was easy to spot, and the slight panic in them. Almost in a sense that she would be lost without Miho—without even seeing her first.

I reached over and took her wrist. Not tight that it would hurt her, but firm enough in hopes that might ground her. “Eat first.”

“But—”

“For sure she’s fine. She won’t be going anywhere. She’s just taking care of something quickly,” I said, frowning a little when she just stared and looked as if she wanted to argue more.

We locked eyes, hers flickering all over my face almost as if pleading. Her tails wrapped tightly around herself, almost making me want to give up. But I kept my grip, tugging a little.

Please, just sit down and eat. Get some food into your system.

There was a slight pause as everyone’s eyes were on us. Satomi let out a shaky breath before reluctantly sitting again. Her grip on the shamisen released as she placed her clenched hands on her lap. I pushed her bowl closer to her. She stared at it, to me, then back at it before picking up the spoon. I waited until the spoon touched her lips and she swallowed, only then I resumed eating.

She was so tense. Ever since we arrived here she had been. I couldn’t believe she would head over and find Miho without looking after herself. It was more reason we had to keep our eyes on her—made sure she doesn’t make rash decisions without thinking about herself first.

Uncle was looking at me, a familiar gaze that said that he understood what I was thinking and to keep it up. I gave a silent nod in return, an agreement to ground Satomi when Miho wasn’t around. And I already planned on doing that as much as I could.

When I was halfway finished with my bowl, the sliding door opened as Miho finally stepped inside. Satomi relaxed beside me, her shoulders sagging that it made me sigh in relief to see the creases between her brows gone.

Miho was fixing something around her waist, and only then did I noticed she had a katana on her belt and a wakizashi.

The scabbard of the katana was a frosted pearl, lacquered just enough to resemble moonlight glinting on snow, and a dark blue cord tied on the base. On the handle was deep midnight-blue ito. Tucked between the wrappings of the handle was an ornament—the one that stood out the most—of a green bamboo.

Almost too out of place with the whole snowy theme. It glinted a little, for sure made out of metal. The wakizashi mirrored the katana’s design, the two complementing each other perfectly.

We all stared until she finished. She looked at us and her tails gave a flick as if showing her annoyance.

“Shi no Yuki,” she said.

Another silence.

Cole looked from one person to another then back at her, swallowing his food. “What?”

“The katana’s name. It is Shi no Yuki. Also known as Snow of Death.” Miho walked over to us, sitting between me and Satomi that it forced me to further move to the left. “Lord Fuyuhiko named it himself. Given to him when he passed the test on dueling your grandfather—one of the most respected and fierce samurai here in Shijima.”

She took her bowl, beginning to eat. Everyone resumed back to theirs except Satomi who stared down inside her bowl, stirring her soup. Her gaze were distant, but no one else seemed to notice. I put down my spoon, pressing my lips together.

Was it the mention of her father?

“I would have given this to you, Hime, as that would be what your father would had wanted,” Miho said. “But not yet.”

“Why not?” Satomi looked up at her. “If that’s what… Dad wants, why not give it now?”

“Because you are not ready, and you do not know how to carry one and wield it.”

Satomi flinched a little at her words, making me frown as I cleared my throat. “What’s our next move?” I started, trying to stir the awkward conversation away. “After this, are we walking over to the nearest village?”

A whine came from Jay. “Do we really need to walk? I think we have vehicles in the Bounty that might help get us there faster. Don’t we?” He glanced over to Pixal.

“Indeed. We have brought some vehicles that may assist us in our travels.” Pixal nodded. “Perhaps we can use them. It will not draw as much attention as the Bounty. Furthermore, it is much safer especially our powers appears to be… malfunctioning.”

Jay looked back at Miho, and I noticed that flicker of hope in his eyes.

“No,” she said with a stern tone, and that instantly drowned Jay’s hope away. “We will not risk it. It may be efficient, but if it means risking Senritsu’s life, then no. I made a promise to the Mother to protect her child.”

“They won’t even see it,” Kai interjected, throwing up his hands. “It’s small compared to however big this place is!”

“Even so, you do not know what power the Kitsune hold. You already mentioned your powers are ‘malfunctioning.’”

“By the way, why is that?” Nya said, leaning forward. “This never happened before in Ninjago.”

“The elements here are far more dense than you have in your realm,” Miho rolled her shoulders back. “Stubborn. They respond more to the people of Shijima, not to some new arrivals.”

“Great! So even the elements in this place are being shitty to us,” Kai growled.

Uncle gave him a look of disapproval, but that didn’t seem to stop Kai from continuing on glaring at Miho.

“Where’re we even?” Cole joined. “How far is the nearest village?”

Miho placed her spoon down with a heavy sigh. She waved a hand as flames merged onto the table. We all backed away from our bowls, hands up from the table as it appeared there like a hologram. It slowly began to form, finally showing the map of the Kitsune Realm.

Of Shijima.

“We are here,” she pointed at the very tip of one of the four tails of the Kitsune shaped continent. “And the closest village—” her finger trailed down, passing a whole land of space and stopping close to the base of the tail “—is here.”

“Seriously?” Cole gestured at it. “You expect us to go that far? By walking?”

Everyone stared at it, even Uncle raised a brow. That distance was too much, especially for Satomi—thin jacket, low stamina, and miles of snow and water ahead. That included food, then stops in between. I would take a guess that we it would take days before we arrived.

“It will help. Along the way, I can train Hime,” Miho insisted.

My eyes flickered over to Satomi, she still had her gaze glued on the map as if seeing the amount of distance we were supposed to ‘walk’ was a horror.

It was a horror, and it showed clearly in her eyes that Miho doesn’t seem to even acknowledge it. As if sensing my stare, she glanced up over to me. I clenched my jaws when our gazes locked. There was almost a hint of pleading in them as if trying to tell me to convince Miho to go for the other option.

“No,” I said, snapping my attention back to Miho. “We’re not making her walk that far. We can still take the vehicles and you can train her along that way.”

Miho didn’t respond, but she kept her gaze.

“If you don’t want that, how about we conjure our dragons? It’s high up on the sky. The clouds can cover us.”

“Would not be enough, nephew,” Uncle said. “You all must keep your energy preserved as much as possible, especially in a realm we don’t know a thing about. I don’t believe being out in that cold will keep you all focused for that long—especially now this realm does not seem to want us to control their elements.”

Mom nodded, giving me a look. “It’s true, Lloyd. I don’t think you all can handle that much. Jay had been complaining along the way when we were trying to get here and was shivering.”

“It was storming!” Jay huffed a little.

“That we can agree on,” Miho said to them both, ignoring Jay fully. “We are trying to stay out of the air and your dragons are another that will gain their attention.

“Dragons had not been seen here for centuries. Maybe even millenniums. Seeing one conjured out of your elementals will draw more suspicion that the neighboring region will dare cross to the Byakko territory. There will be another fight if that is the case. Byakko is neutral in this war. Some may be fighting for personal reasons, but the region itself does not want to tangle themselves with the childish argument between the siblings.”

I looked away, tapping my fingers on the table, thinking before saying, “The vehicles are our best option.”

Miho opened her mouth, for sure to argue again when Uncle interjected. “It will not hurt to take them.”

Her attention snapped towards Uncle. “Are you suggesting to risk our cover?”

“It is a long walk,” Uncle stared back.

It might not show much, but he was having his own argument with her. His expression might lack it, but his eyes told another.

“I don’t doubt my students can walk that long, I have trained them myself. But her—” he gestured to Satomi.

She had been silent the whole time, appearing to be trying to make herself even smaller than before. I noticed she gripped the shamisen as if to ground herself, and I dug my nails onto my palm, feeling that pain sink through.

Uncle continued, “—I have a doubt. And you know as well she can’t.”

“That is why we are doing this. To get her used to it and for the future.”

“She never trained before and this will be her first.”

“And she does not have enough time for a slow progression,” Miho said through gritted teeth, baring her fangs. “You think I want this for her? I made an oath to the Mother that I will keep her daughter safe and out of harm. Her father sacrificed his life to protect her and this realm. Even if it means making her do extreme training just to get her to a level she can protect herself and use the shamisen’s power with no struggle, then I will do it.”

“And what I always teach first is patience,” Uncle sat straighter, still not backing down. “Everyone has their own ways of learning. They have their own pace. That includes her.”

The two kept glaring at one another, a tense silence lingered in the air as we waited who would fold first. Knowing Uncle, he wouldn’t dare especially in the concern of another person’s health and well being.

* * *

My eyes kept drifting over to the katana secured on Miho’s waist. It was too light and bright to ignore, especially that bamboo ornament. I wondered if Dad adored those tall grasses.

Ever since I saw it, I remembered the little bits and pieces of bamboo designs on his portrait and on the scroll about the Shizukana Yuki. I wondered if it was part of the Fuyuhiko banner.

There was no sign of the family banner anywhere, though I was curious nonetheless and had the urge to explore. To know if it did… and to know more of my father and who he was.

But even how much I wanted to, I doubted Miho would let me out right now—especially with how Master Wu and her were glaring at one another. The waves of unease, with hints of irritation, radiated from the others were hard to ignore.

And the situation with the Ninja’s powers made them vulnerable. Almost all of us were vulnerable at this very moment. Except Miho…

Still, I wrestled with my own frustration. Her words echoed in my head. She wouldn’t let me hold the weapon my father once wielded in battle. I wanted to hold it, even once, just to feel and somehow connect with him through that weapon.

Was it feather-light, or heavy enough to cleave through armor?

I caught sight of Lloyd, his expression focused as he stared at Master Wu and Miho. His gaze flickered back at the map on the table. I was grateful that he was able to see my plea even though it was a brief glance at one another. It seemed to me like he already knew me, even though we had only been together for almost a day.

His fingers were intertwined, shifting a little as he leaned on them, hiding half of his face. Brows furrowed, eyes traveling around as if in deep thought. His aura pulsed in waves, a steady stream of thought and tension. Suddenly, his gaze locked on mine, making me hold my breath.

Lloyd’s waves stilled a little and his gaze softened. He leaned back and smiled. “I’ll handle it,” he mouthed, nudging his head to indicate at the two who were still glaring.

I gave my own little smile, nodding while I lightly grazed my fingers on the strings of the shamisen. It secured me every time I felt them. Something familiar… always reminding me of home.

The thought of home made a sharp ache in my chest, and I had to take a deep breath to push down the tears that tried to prickle up.

How were they? Were my… parents fine? What were they doing right now?

“We all agreed to it, Miho,” Lloyd began, finally breaking the tension. “A few vehicles won’t hurt. It’s for the sake of getting from one place to another. Safer and faster.”

All attention was on him in an instant, but even so he didn’t flinched. His expression was the same and final. Miho’s frown deepened, straightening her back as her ear twitched.

Now the two stared.

“Do you want the best for everyone, Oni?”

“Yes. That’s the reason why I’m agreeing with the others.”

“And that decision is foolish. If you know better—”

“I think I know enough, thanks.” Lloyd sat up straight as well. “Read the room, Miho-san. Yes, we don’t know anything about this realm, we’re already vulnerable as it is, that’s why we’re asking you to help us. But that doesn’t mean ignoring our needs and defenselessness.”

Miho became silent, but still glared at Lloyd as if his defiance was something she didn’t approve of. It reminded me of Mom’s when I got distracted during my shamisen practice.

“You’re the Caretaker, aren’t you? You’ve taken care of Father Hinoki’s children before, so do the same now. You didn’t even ask Satomi what she thinks of this. If she’s supposed to be the one taking the throne, then let her decide too. She’ll have the final say.”

I stared at Lloyd in awe. How he delivered those words were firm but respectful. Those were the words and tone of a leader, and he did it without even faltering when Miho stared at him in challenge. She even stopped, and it made her listen.

After a moment of waiting, Miho glanced over to me. I swallowed the lump in my throat at her sudden attention, making me pull Shikisha closer. There was a hint of hesitation present in her eyes mixed with contemplation.

She sighed, shoulders sagging. “What is your decision, Hime?”

From the corner of my eyes, Lloyd nudged his head over to her as if urging me to speak my mind.

With a shaky breath, I said, “We should take the vehicles. I know you think it’s not the best decision as it might catch the attention of other Kitsune, but… I have to agree with Sensei Wu and Lloyd. I don’t think I can walk that far and in the cold. And we’re all defenseless. It’ll be worse if we walk openly out there.”

There was a pause from Miho before gave a nod, lifting up her chin. “If that is what you choose then we shall do so.” She turned to Lloyd again, another frown on her face. “If anything happens to her, you all take full responsibility for not taking my heed.”

“And so I will,” Lloyd replied, voice still strong and clear.

A small huff came from Miho and stood. With a flick of her wrist, the fire projected map vanished. She headed straight for the door, her soup completely forgotten, and disappeared when she turned a corner.

Everyone, I noticed from their waves, had settled down—appearing to be more lively with what had transpired. Probably from the final decision. Even I was relieved, and it was thanks to Lloyd. I lifted my spoon to resume eating when a movement from my peripheral caught my attention.

Lloyd had moved closer, taking his bowl with him. He nudged me gently with his shoulder, a small smirk on his face. “Told ya I’ll take care of it,” he whispered.

I grinned back, soothed to have someone like him as a friend and ally as we ate together.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 15

Byakko's High Walls

By the time we finished our food, we all headed for the Bounty. Miho was already there, her hand resting on the handle of Shi no Yuki. A sharp wind brushed against my cheeks and I pulled my scarf higher.

Our eyes met for a moment, hers narrowing a little while I gave a subtle nod. I don’t doubt she was still a bit pissed with my defiance earlier inside, but I wouldn’t dare risk anything.

From the corner of my eyes, Mom and Satomi walked together, having a conversation I wasn’t sure of. The scene made me smile, seeing Satomi looked more relaxed and animated than back in the house was a good sign to me.

We stopped when we got close to the ship; Pixal went on ahead to go below deck to get the vehicles. From my peripheral, I saw Satomi walk over to Miho who stood slightly away from us. Miho whispered something to her with narrowed eyes, who in return just nodded.

Keeping my attention to them, I tried reading their lips, but the only words I caught were Satomi’s ‘I’m sure.’ Miho’s eyes flickered over to me again before it went back to Satomi. It lingered at her for a second, then gave a subtle nod and straightened her posture.

I squinted, not needing more context to know Miho still doubted this decision. With a little sigh, I removed the string bag on my shoulder as I ran a mental checklist, trying to keep my mind off it.

Water, protein bar, extra gear—all good.

The Bounty whirred to life, causing me to shoulder my bag again and eyes ahead. The side of the ship opened with a hiss, revealing Pixal and the vehicles that we were going to use.

There were two Terrain Cruisers that I had recognized Nya had been telling us about, and wanting to try out. I had seen it lying around the hangar for a while, but we were never able to use it as we didn’t need it. So, it was just there under some covers.

Another was large vehicle, it almost looked like a tank-SUV mix. Large enough to fit all of us and occupied almost the whole space of the lower deck of the Bounty. This was the first time I had seen it, and I already decided we were going to take it with us.

“Take your pick,” Pixal said, a tablet in her hands as she ran diagnostics on the large vehicle. “New addition to our collection. This is the Modular Rover, it is a multi-terrain vehicle as well as the cruisers. The skin are strong armor plates made out of steel, ceramics, and depleted uranium. The wheels adaptable for various terrains. You do not need to change it manually, it is already set up in automatic.”

She went to me, handing me the tablet as I checked all the informations and what it had. The Rover mostly focused on defense and survival. The materials were good to deflect anything that might have a large impact.

Good. It can fight, but I doubt it would be as strong. No matter, all we needed was to keep everyone safe. That was top priority.

“We made sure to design it like that,” Nya joined, walking inside as she leaned on the side of the Rover and gave it a pat. She had a smirk on, confident and proud. “At least now we don’t need to worry about constantly changing vehicles for different places.”

I gave an approving nod, handing the tablet back. “Good job, both of you.” I faced the others, glancing from one person to another. “Zane, Kai, take the Terrain Cruisers. One stays at the back, make sure we wouldn’t be followed and the other go on a bit ahead. Keep vigilant. Instantly report anything that might look out of place. The rest are in the Rover.”

We went to our respected places. The back of the Rover opens as the rest entered. I stepped to the side, letting them in first. Miho and Satomi came in last, Miho seeming a bit hesitant to go inside while Satomi glanced at me. I gave her a reassuring smile, which she offered back before I followed them in and the door closed.

The control room was vast, enough to fit everyone and enough chairs for at least six. Pixal started the Rover, the lights flickering on and some holographic screens appearing from the dashboards. I went to one of the chairs, checking whether the ignitions were working fine and everything in top condition.

Good thing they kept it similar design with the rest, or I had to relearn everything.

A static came from the speakers, two holographic pictures of Kai and Zane popping up.

“Hey, I’m clear over here,” Kai said, a faint humming of the engines came from his side.

“And so am I,” Zane followed.

“Good, everyone is ready.” Pixal turned her seat, facing me.

I nodded, looking over to Miho who was close by the door. “Where to?”

“South,” she said, arms crossed and gaze stern.

With a glance at Pixal, she nodded. Kai and Zane hearing it, moved on ahead before we followed. We fell into position as one stayed at the back and the other a bit ahead. I kept focused on the screens, making sure there were no sudden alerts from the systems, and making certain this would be a smooth ride for everyone.

If I see even one thing amiss, I will make sure to bring it back in line.

A hand on my shoulder made me glance up, spotting Mom. There was that look on her face, the one where she quietly asks if I was alright. I gave a smile and I leaned back on my seat.

“How long will this take?” Kai’s voice came back from the speakers, and I noticed Satomi flinch.

I went to another control, seeing the sound system on high before slightly putting it down.

“If we had taken the walking route, at least two to three days. That does not include stops between,” Miho said. “Demo, at this pace, perhaps five hours.”

“Thank the First Satomi chose this,” Jay muttered.

Kai nodded from the hologram before it disappeared. Everyone settled down, Pixal putting on auto-pilot yet still keeping her hands on the wheel. I stood as I gestured at Satomi to the seat.

“Go on, sit down.”

“I’m…” she closed her mouth and gave a quick bow before sitting. She rested the shamisen on her lap. “Thank you.”

Miho moved, going past me as we made a quick eye contact. It narrowed again, but not as much as before as she stood beside Satomi. I walked over to where Mom and Uncle stood close by the door. Mom gave me a nod before we all went silent. I leaned back on the wall, eyes darting everywhere and arms crossed.

“So, quick question,” Jay began, peeking over from his spot to Miho. “Why exactly are we going to the village?”

Miho hummed, hands going under the sleeves of her hakama. “We have two Oni with us. We can not have that.”

I clenched my jaws at her words, making me look down to the floor.

“Which means?”

“In simpler terms, we have to get rid of it.”

“We’re not leaving Sensei and Lloyd behind!” Nya interjected, a frown coming up her face as she whirled her seat to face her. “First of all, Lloyd’s our leader and Sensei’s… well, our master. Second—”

“I did not say anything about deserting them. What I am saying is putting their Oni blood aside so we may travel around without alerting other Kitsune.”

Putting aside? I pushed myself up, taking a step towards her. “That’s possible?”

She faced me now, lifting her chin up and gripping the katana. “Hai. There is someone I know in the village who can help with… your dilemma. We can not risk Hime’s life as it is now. Having you and your uncle carelessly walking around and exposed to any Kitsune for miles is enough of a liability.”

Liability? Does she had to be so harsh with her words?

My fists clenched, trying to calm myself down. We couldn’t help it if we had their enemies’ blood. We were born with it—I was born with it, even how much I didn’t want it.

“And so we will go there,” Uncle intervened, standing beside me now.

His presence calmed me a little, making me sigh and step back. He gave me a nod while I just leaned back on the wall again.

“Yoi,” Miho turned to face Satomi again, beginning to speak of something I didn’t paid attention to.

Satomi glanced at me and Uncle. Her eyes looked heavier than usual, almost like she wanted to say something. I shook my head, forcing in a smile to try and reassure her. It looked like she hesitated, her body facing Miho but her eyes on us and squinted.

I shifted a little, trying to force myself to lift up my emotions in hopes she wouldn’t notice how I was feeling. Soon after, her full attention was on Miho again. Releasing a quiet sigh, I peeked outside and saw nothing but snow. Miho’s words from earlier echoed in my head, making me bite down my teeth harder as an ache surfaced up my chest.

I never asked to be one.

* * *

Like Miho said, within five hours, faint smoke and sign of life appeared ahead—indicating that we were near. A static came into the speakers again, and Kai’s voice spoke out.

“The village’s up ahead,” he said then pausing as he squinted his eyes. “And it looks like they have a welcome party for us. With weapons as extra guests. I feel so welcomed already.”

“We stop here,” I pushed myself up from the floor, groaning as my back throbbed. “We don’t want to alert them as we’re already about to.”

Miho passed by me, already standing by the entrance followed by Satomi as she shouldered the shamisen again. I took my dao, tying the scabbard onto my belt as I waited for everyone to settle. When the Rover stopped, the door opened. A rush of wind slapped my face, making me squint and shudder but pushed on as I stepped out first.

I turned as I offered my hand to Mom, anchoring her to a stable ground on the snow. Next, I offered to Satomi who took it.

“Thank you,” she said through the strong wind.

“No problem.” I inspected her up and down, frowning as I noticed she’s still wearing the same light hoodie. She shouldn’t be wearing just this. “You don’t have anything else other than that?”

She shook her head, her tails wrapping around herself again.

“We have to get moving then.” I turned on my comms and said, “Pixal, stay with the vehicles. Stay on guard. We’re all going over there. Let us know if anything happens.”

“Copy that, Lloyd. Please do the same, all of you, and good luck,” Pixal said, voice static before the other line came into silence.

I faced the others. “Let’s get moving!”

Everyone walked. Miho went ahead as she guided us through the deep snow. I stayed beside Satomi, keeping pace with her. She staggered a bit, her shivering not going unnoticed.

I huffed, rubbing my hands together to feel them again before reaching for my scarf—wrapping it around her neck instead. “Here… you need more than I do.”

She just let out a shaky breath out, the tip of her nose red as she pulled it up closer to her, burying her whole face into it. I gave a nod to myself, but I still can’t help keeping tabs on her.

We had to get to the village quick, and get to a warmer place than this.

With an icy breath out, I moved ahead, taking bigger strides as I settled beside Miho. Her stance was still great, not a sign of struggle in her form. Unlike us, hugging ourselves to try and keep our bodies warm as much as possible.

“You will not get past them without clearance, Oni,” she said, eyes flickering to me.

The way she said Oni made me grip the hilt of my sword. She does call me that and I was getting used to it, but her tone gave a hint of warning. I glanced up at her—emotion still stern, but something else lingered in her gaze. Something I can’t define.

She just stared for a moment before releasing a sigh. Her shoulders dropped slightly, like the words weighed more than she let on. “I will speak to them,” she whispered. “Do not intervene unless you want them to refuse us.”

As much as I wanted to insist on staying and speaking as well, I knew that she was right. I wouldn’t be able to get past them being who I am. If I provoked them, it would end badly for all of us.

I fell a step back as she walked faster. Uncle appeared beside me, holding his staff on the other as he put a hand on my shoulder. His eyes lingered with mine, creases between his brows as he examined me. Words weren’t needed to know what was going through his head; I already knew we were both having the same dilemma.

For once, I felt powerless to do anything.

We got closer to the entrance, more Kitsune coming into view as some had drawn their katanas or naginata. From their high towers, stationed archers with their long bows drawn. And I noted, their eyes were on my team, but it mostly stayed on the direction where Uncle and I were.

I kept my hands away from my weapon, trying to show we were no threat while I let Miho take the lead. Showing a sign of alertness would not give off a good message, it would only make them more tense than now.

An older-looking Kitsune stood tall in the middle of the crowd, his hand on the handle of his sheathed katana. The fur on his tails and ears blended with the scenery around us, just like the rest of the stationed guards. There were a few scars present on his face, small but there, and only then I noticed his other ear was cut in half.

I kept a neutral stance.

“Shūei Miho, it has been a while,” the older Kitsune said when we stopped a few feet from them. His voice was deep and commanding. “I see you have Shōgun-dono’s katana,” he said, gesturing at Shi no Yuki strapped on Miho’s hip.

“Hai,” Miho bowed, which the older man mirrored.

In doing so, his eyes flickered from one person to another. Slow, almost calculating. Suddenly, it stopped at me for a whole second. He narrowed his eyes, and I noticed him grip his weapon before turning back to Miho.

“And you have brought… company.”

“Genshiro-dono,” Miho began, still bowing low. “I have come to seek aid.”

“Aid with an Oni with you who is not chained and disguised as a human?” He frowned, chin tilting up. “It is not only one, but two. We had felt them before you all even appeared, and it has already caused an unease within my village.”

Kai took a step forward, brows drawn, and a hand resting on his sword almost as if ready to unsheathe it. One of the guards also moved, noticing the change as she redirected her naginata at him.

I gave Kai a look, trying to signal him to stay down. He saw, scoffing as he let his hand rest beside him again. The guard stayed the same.

“That is why we have come,” Miho continued, standing tall once again. “We need assistance from Goryounin Sanyu.”

“Sanyu?” he said, his tone surprised. “You may be our ally, Shūei, but these—” he glanced at Uncle and I as his tone deepened more in contempt, “—creatures are not.”

Uncle shifted beside me, readjusting his hold onto his staff and cleared his throat. My jaws clenched, the urge to step forward to defend Uncle and I was there on the tips of my tongue. Being called Oni already with disgust was fine and something I could handle, but being called ‘creatures’?

No. Not to me, and especially not to my family.

A gentle hand was placed on my shoulder, making me look at Mom who shook her head. I released a frustrated breath, biting down on my tongue.

“Genshiro-dono—”

“Iie. They will not pass. I apologize, Shūei, but it will not happen.”

The man turned to leave, giving a signal to his guards with a nod as the gates opened. I bit harder, the pain seething through, but I paid it no mind. The urge was there, the words on the verge of slipping past my lips.

I wanted to let it burst. Give a piece of my mind.

Without even thinking, I took a step forward and shouted, “Genshiro-dono!”

But a single strum from behind us made me stop from continuing as it bested my call.

We all turned around, only revealing Satomi holding her shamisen and the note ringing. I stared as she stood there with a stern expression on her face. But even with that brave look, I could still make out the shaking of her hands and how she was heaving.

She swallowed, squirming as she gripped the bachi tighter.

“Please, let us in,” she said, her voice quivered a little but she stood her ground. “I swear to you, they’re no threats to your people. They’re my friends and are here to help. So, please, let us in.”

My shoulders loosened, and I couldn’t stop the small smile that crawled up my face.

She didn’t had to do that.

“Masaka…”

I turned around, seeing Genshiro turning back to face us and taking a few steps closer to our group. His eyes stuck on Satomi as his lips parted, stern expression now softened. His eyes darted around her as if finally seeing who she truly was.

“By our ancestors, is she really…”

“Senritsu,” Miho finished, her voice proud. “Mother Natsumi’s and the Shōgun’s daughter.”

“By her name, you really have found her.”

Miho simply nodded.

“You should have said so earlier. Perhaps there is hope to this foolish war.” Genshiro turned to look at Uncle and I, his face hardening again. “Since Hime said you are her allies… I will take her word for it. But if either of you even try to do something, we will not hesitate to draw our weapons.”

Uncle bowed deeply. “We swear to not cause such troubles.”

I copied Uncle, bowing low that all I saw was my feet and ground. A huff came from Genshiro as I watched his shadow turn away and headed back to the direction of the village. Standing upright again, I peeked at Uncle who nodded with a smile and turned to Satomi who just released a sigh.

She noticed our stares, stopping midway from putting her shamisen back behind her.

Uncle went to her with a smile. “You did well. Thank you.”

“I can’t just… stand by and see you guys get treated like that. Not when you guys looked…” she paused, glancing up at me then Uncle.

I smiled, already knowing that she had read us again. Those simple words were enough of a balm to lessen the painful jab of words Genshiro had said about Uncle and I. We owe it to her—I owe it to her.

“Still, thank you, Sato. You didn’t had to,” I said, moving aside to let her go first. “Let’s get inside. You’re probably freezing.”

She nodded, readjusting my scarf on her neck and followed the others who were already going in. Uncle fell beside me as we went further.

“Finally! I can’t take another moment out here,” Jay groaned.

Nya shook her head, elbowing him as he let out a small ‘ow.’ A smile tugged up my lips from the scene. Mom went over to Satomi, putting a hand on her cheek as I heard her whisper a ‘thank you,’ to which Satomi just nodded and continued on with her.

The gates closed heavily behind us as Genshiro went ahead and led us through. The village was small, but large enough to occupy a few hundred individuals at best. Houses slightly built close to one another, a few inches above ground away from snow. The pathway was a bit slim but we were still able to squeeze in.

A few passing villagers rolled carts with sacks inside. Women walked with baskets of laundries on top of their heads—tails of either one or two swishing behind them. We were only a few steps in when Jay leaned over to us.

“Am I the only one noticing it or is everyone staring at us?” he whispered.

“Yeah… I noticed it, too,” Cole whispered back, his eyes flickering everywhere.

Just as Jay mentioned, everyone’s eyes were on us. Some had stopped with what they were doing, muttering in every direction. Most of them in Japanese that some of the words I was able recognize and understand. Curious children peeked out of their windows, only for their mothers to pull them back in and closed them shut. People first noticed Satomi before their gazes shifted to Uncle and I.

“That’s her,” I heard from one of them. “That’s Senritsu-hime.”

“She truly is carrying the shamisen.”

“I haven’t seen it so up close. It’s beautiful.”

“Those two behind her. Are they really—”

“How is it possible there are two of them here? I thought they were locked away?”

“Why aren’t they in chains? It’s dangerous to let them roam around this freely.”

I stared ahead, keeping my chin held high. My chest tightened from their comments; shame and guilt rising up my throat that I had to swallow down the acid. Trying my best not to grimace at the taste. I can’t let their words affect me. I can’t let my emotions out like that again like I almost did earlier.

“Lloyd.”

Snapping out of my thoughts, I glanced at Uncle who stared ahead as well.

“Those are just words. They don’t know the full context. Forgive them for now.”

I focused on finding my inner peace. Uncle was right, those were just words and these people have gone through a lot. They were just scared like any other people would be.

But, sometimes, it was just hard to ignore them.

The tension in my body lessened as I opened my eyes again. “Yes, Sensei.”

Uncle nodded with a soft hum of acknowledgement, and we both picked up our pace as Genshiro continued on leading.

“Was the reason why you have been absent for almost two decades, Shūei Miho, was because of Hime?” he started.

My attention went back to them. I noticed Satomi adjusting the shamisen on her back by the strap, almost as if trying to keep her composure when the conversation was about her. Her ears even twitched like her focus went on them by instinct.

Miho nodded. “Hai. That is indeed the reason.”

“Where has she been?”

“In the realm created by the First Spinjitzu Master.”

“The one who visited centuries ago? That human that came here, and which Father Hinoki spoke to?”

“Hai.”

A pause came from Genshiro. “Nanto hiniku na.”

So, Grandfather coming here was also known to these people. It looked like Grandfather was truly someone known by every realm. There was a look in Uncle’s face, almost as if the information was something new to him as well. We exchanged a glance but kept silent as we continued following.

After a moment, Miho spoke again. “The storm here in Byakko is worse than before. What is happening?”

“We had tried to keep it still,” Genshiro said, his tone low and almost frustrated. “But, ever since the war, it would not listen to us as it used to. My people are getting restless and afraid that we would have to leave the Region.”

“Where would you go? Most of the other Regions are not safe.”

“We might go to Hinoki Village if the storm comes again.” There was a pause. “We even received a letter from the Kokuko Region that some of their plants are beginning to wither and the darkness are getting out of their control. None of this ever happened when Father Hinoki and Lady Natsumi were still alive.”

“So, Kokuko truly had isolated themselves and does not partake on the war either.”

“Hai. But they also considered traveling to Hinoki Village. They are losing their food sources as this war rages on. Though, I suspect Sayoko-sonchō would leave her Region, and instead let her people go.”

Miho let out an airy chuckle, almost as if in amusement. “I would not be surprised if Sayoko-san does so. She is too stubborn to leave her home, and takes the assignment that Mother Natsumi assigned to her to be the ori’s guard seriously.”

I frowned a little at their conversation, trying to make sense of all of it.

The storm here in Byakko Region was worse? What did they mean they couldn’t control it and that plants were withering? Because of the war? How?

I bit the inside of my cheek, rubbing my hands together before resting them back beside me. We really had to stop this from continuing on. From beside Miho, I saw Satomi narrow her eyes. No doubt she was thinking about it, too. We never knew it was this bad.

Genshiro led us to a few more turns before stopping in front of a simple-looking shop. It was slightly taller than the rest, where behind the counter showed shelves of vials in numerous sizes. I glanced at the wooden sign that hung and swung slightly above us. It was in Japanese, but the familiar kanjis made me recognize it.

This was an apothecary.

We all stopped in front of it, Miho stepping up the slight steps.

“No one’s here,” Jay muttered.

“Why are we here?” Nya said, raising a brow. “I know we need to get rid of Sensei and Lloyd’s situation, but I doubt an apothecary can really he—”

“And so she has arrived,” an airy voice came from behind the counter.

Nya shut her mouth in an instant, the sound of footsteps coming from within. A woman appeared, young-looking and hair pinned up into a bun. Her hands underneath the sleeves of her green, plain kimono. Her skin was pale, almost the same shade as everything around us.

She inspected us, flickering from one person to another. I stood still, keeping quiet as usual, trying to show that I wasn’t effected for any further querying about my heritage. Her eyes landed on Satomi.

“A pleasure to have you in my quaint shop, Hime.” She did a small bow.

Satomi bowed back, grabbing hold of the strap of the shamisen again when she stood upright.

The woman’s eyes flickered now to Miho. They stared at one another before Miho did a small bow. The woman only nodded.

“Mistress Sanyu—” Genshiro began but the woman held her hand up to silence him.

“I already know why they’re here.” In an instant, her attention went to Uncle and I. “Not once has it ever crossed my mind that one day our enemies would ask us for our assistance.”

I took my attention away from her, instead looking at the vials on the shelves behind her.

Here we go again.

“But then, odd things are already happening as it is.” She turned to Genshiro. “I shall take care of them. These people will not be a problem to this village. Come on in, all of you. I shall help you all with your problem. We don’t want you to freeze either, Hime.” She opened the door from the side, letting us in.

Genshiro bowed before standing to the side of the shop. His eyes lingered on me for a moment, narrowed into a warning. I gave a firm nod, trying to indicate I understand the consequences if we do anything out of place. Everyone went in first, going up the steps before I followed in last.

The woman closed the door when we were all inside and passed us to head at the front. “If Miho hasn’t introduced me yet to you all, I am Mistress Sanyu.” She turned to face us. “Owner of this little shop here in Byakko Village.”

“She did mentioned you. Said you can help us with these guys,” Kai nudged his head over at me, making me sigh.

“Can you really help us?” I said as we locked eyes.

Sanyu was silent for a moment, almost as if inspecting me before smiling. “You’re easy to read, kyaku-sama. All of you are. You all need to learn how to suppress those if you all wish to go around Shijima.” She glanced at Miho for a moment, almost like a silent indication about whatever she was saying before walking on ahead. “Yes, indeed, I can help you and your uncle, if I must guess.”

I raised a brow about her little quip, but didn’t say anything else. We began to follow her further in.

“Yes, I am his uncle,” Uncle started. “My name is Wu, and my nephew’s name is Lloyd.”

“A wonderful name you have, Lloyd. I quite like it. Rolls off the tongue.”

I smiled, easing a bit. “Thank you.”

There was something different about her presence, it was more… welcoming than the rest of the Kitsune in the village. It didn’t unnerve me—I’m even thankful to have someone friendly in this realm who constantly kept their distance. But, I still kept alert just in case.

Sanyu lead us further. The shop was bigger than it looked from the outside, filled with so many halls and other rooms we simply just passed by without a glance. As we turned a corner, she opened yet another door and revealed a flight of stairs heading down.

She went in, gesturing for us to do the same. Each of us glanced at one another before trailing behind.

“Yeah, sure… let’s follow a fox girl down the basement. We love that,” Jay muttered.

“I don’t mean to be rude,” Cole began, sounding a bit hesitant to even speak, “but how are you exactly going to help us? Do you have a elixir or something for us?”

“Something along those lines,” Sanyu said with a smile. “But, not just an elixir.”

We stepped onto the bottom of the stairs. The moment we entered the basement, I scanned the odd place. I might’ve seen a handful of an apothecary’s basement, but this sure was filled with scrolls, large books, with herbs hooked onto the walls. Some were in jars, some with glowing petals, questionable pulsing liquids, and more that I couldn’t name.

Perhaps resources that were only available here in this realm. The smell mixed of something earthy and metallic scent made me grimace. Each cabinets labeled in almost rune-like words and a few floating, smoke-less flames that illuminated the room. There were even crystals around hovering that it twinkled like constellations.

“Well, this sure is something,” Kai said, reading my mind.

My lips parted as I went over to the shelves filled with scrolls. Some were opened and pinned showing notes about… blood?

I narrowed my eyes, reading more and spotting some familiar kanjis: ‘Oni’ and ‘Ryū.’

“Welcome to my little nook,” Sanyu began, now facing us. “The alcove of a Chi no Renkinjyutsushi.”

Our attention all went to her. Satomi, in particular, narrowed her eyes. I inspected her as she stood straighter, hands falling away from her shamisen.

“Blood Alchemist?”

Sanyu grinned, her five tails fanning behind her as she intertwined her hands together in front of her. Only then, did I noticed the fur of her tails were almost a full red.

“Hai,” she said. “A Blood Alchemist.”

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 16

Hidden Blood

Silence filled the room. Our eyes glued on Sanyu. My chest stirred with a maelstrom of feelings I couldn’t name, but one stood out: vigilance.

My fingers twitched, having the urge to grab my dao and unsheathe it. Point it at her. But I restrained myself from doing so, not wanting to cause a scene, especially not when we were already walking on thin ice just being in this village.

“Wait, you’re a Blood Alchemist?” Jay began, hands flailing around. “Like blood-blood? You really—”

“Yes, I do,” Sanyu said, walking around.

My eyes followed her as she went from one cabinet to another, retrieving two wooden bowls and putting it on her workshop. Her tails swayed behind her, making me narrow my eyes at their color.

For her to be wearing a green kimono and with that amount of crimson, she could be compared to a rose. A rose with thorns, enough to prick a finger and bleed. My eyes went up to her back as she was facing away from us while she kept retrieving items from shelves and cabinets.

“How are you exactly going to… do your magic or whatever you’ll do?” Cole said.

“Perhaps she’ll perform bloodletting,” Zane said.

“Blood—what?”

“Bloodletting is when an apothecary drain blood from their patients as a medical treatment,” Zane said. “Mostly due to the belief that illnesses came from the imbalance of bodily fluids.”

I frowned at the information, not even noticing that I had put my hand on my sword until after his explanation. Drain our blood? For what reason? We weren’t even sick. Unless it’s some twisted way of saying that our Oni blood was a sickness.

“You know your things, yūjin,” Sanyu chuckled, facing us again. Her eyes went to me.

My grip tightened. Her eyes narrowed a little, but her smile stayed. I don’t trust that.

“But do not be afraid, Lloyd-san,” her voice softened, “we’re not doing that.”

Even with her reassurance, I couldn’t help the tension in my body. I swallowed the lump in my throat. I couldn’t explain why I was feeling like this. It had never been a problem before.

But the thought of someone, especially a Kitsune who most of them despised the Oni, want something to do with mine and Uncle’s blood… it just didn’t sit right with me. For us to just let her have it almost seemed like we were exposing ourselves to her.

“How are you going to do this then?” I said, voicing out my thoughts. “Are you really going to use our blood?”

“Yes, indeed I am.” She clasped her hands together. “Though, you and your uncle’s case is much more special than some humoral theory. I’m quite offended Miho-san didn’t tell you of who I am and what I specialize in. Especially during the Oni Invasion.”

My attention went to Miho. “What?”

Miho raised a brow at Sanyu. “Maji de? Like I have time to explain that when I was trying to make up a plan.”

The other just shrugged with a smirk as she continued to work.

With a sigh, Miho faced us. “Sanyu contributed in the war. She is known as one of the few who protected Shijima. And someone who turned the tides for us against the Oni.”

Turned the tides? “What did you do?” I said, glancing over to Sanyu.

“Blood alchemy,” she said, her back on us as she seemed to be working already. Mixing things on the wooden bowls from earlier, walking around, and taking glass vials with herbs and others things. “That is where I got my title as Byakko no Akaki Jutsushi.”

“The Red Arts Master of Byakko,” I heard Satomi mutter, almost in curiosity as well.

“Not very specific there,” Nya said, putting a hand on her hip. “What specifically did you use your… special skills on?”

The pounding on the mortar stopped, making the room silent as Sanyu grinned at us. “Camouflaging.”

“With blood?”

She chuckled, almost exaggerated as she waved a hand. “I made elixirs to hide being detected by the Oni.” She turned to us again. “After they have learned we have the senses to detect them from miles before they even arrived, they, themselves, used that against us. The ones that they have killed, they have studied.”

She opened one of her drawers, adding something into the mortar. “If you think the Oni are just there to fight without any precautions, you would do well to think again. They might not seem the type, but to us Kitsune, they are one of the enemies that we deem resourceful and intelligent.”

“Intelligent?” Kai crossed his arms, voice mocking. “Didn’t seemed like it when we fought them a year back.”

“They were,” I said strongly, frowning. “When… Father and I tried to destroy the Realm Crystal to stop them and put them back to where they belong, it didn’t work. They planned way ahead than we did.”

Kai let out a hum, looking down at the floor in almost a defeated way. That wasn’t the best memory. Too many things happened, and too many people who we lost.

My grip tightened on my sword.

And too many people who manipulated one to the other.

There was a moment of silence for everyone, knowing how much those events impacted us and the city. Until now, it lingered silently in Ninjago even though people go on with their lives like it never happened.

“If you had been in Ninjago for those eighteen years, Miho,” Satomi began. I looked up as her attention went to Miho as she continued, “Why didn’t you help stop them?”

I held my breath. That question never crossed my mind.

Miho kept her eyes trained on Sanyu, who kept working. “It was not my business.”

“People lost their lives,” Satomi said, her voice rising. “I almost lost mine! My family almost lost their lives.”

“I can not deny that,” Miho turned to Satomi. “But you were not ready. And that realm, especially, was not ready.”

Satomi turned away from Miho, her eyes now trained on the floor as she gripped the strap of her shamisen. “What if I had lost my life? What then with this realm? An eternal war? My… aunt and uncle fighting each other until one submits?”

“Do not question The Mother’s knowledge, Senritsu,” Miho said sternly through gritted teeth. “I knew nothing would happen to you during that time. Your mother saw beyond that. I trust her, and so should you. You are next to inherit that title, so act and believe as so.”

Satomi didn’t respond. I clenched my jaw as I watched Miho turn away and walk over to Sanyu, not saying a word. Mom and Nya went to Satomi, Mom putting a hand on her arm as she whispered something. Nya moved closer too, rubbing Satomi’s back as a silent comfort while glaring sharply at Miho.

I peeked over to Miho again, her arms crossed and talking about something with Sanyu.

Not helping just because it wasn’t her business? I looked down at the ground, balling my hands into fists. But wasn’t it her business to protect Satomi?

“How long is this procedure gonna be?” Kai said, snapping me out of my reverie. “We don’t really have that much time with everything happening.”

Sanyu turned to us again, giving a smile. “I know the procedures and its basics. But this is slightly different from the usual.” She walked over to Kai who stood his ground. They stared at one another, Kai’s eyes narrowing while he crossed his arms. “If you would be so kind,” Sanyu gestured at the shelf behind him.

He moved aside. Sanyu continued on, taking a vial with some kind of liquid inside and went back to her workbench.

“I am not changing a Kitsune’s blood to be undetected, instead I’m going for the opposite.” She poured a drop of the liquid into the bowls, causing a slight smoke to evaporate before she closed it. “Though, if I recall, there is something else in both yours’ blood than just Oni.” Sanyu looked over at me and Uncle. “Correct me if I am wrong. The First Spinjitzu Master was a mix of Oni and Dragon, ne?”

Uncle nodded, readjusting his straw hat. “Indeed.”

She nodded. “Our procedure for you and Lloyd-san would be different,” she focused on her workbench again.

“What do you mean different?” I said.

“Instead of trying to hide your Oni, we’re going to make your Dragon blood more dominant than the other.” She gestured something at the left without turning around. “You have seen the chart that I have made. I noticed you recognized the kanji of Oni and Dragon.”

I glanced at the open scroll on my side again and I nodded. “Yes?”

“It seems you do not read all Japanese. But, to summarize it, Ryū no chi wa Oni no taikyoku ni aru.”

Satomi sighed. “She said that Dragon’s blood is the exact opposite of the Oni.”

I smiled as a thanks for her translation. “We’re aware of that.”

“So, how’s that relevant to their situation?” Cole gestured at me and Uncle.

“Ryū blood is much calmer and more tamed than an Oni. With that, we Kitsune do not think of the Ryū as an enemy but an ally.” I frowned, slowly but surely piecing them together as she continued her explanation. “We have met them once, and we Kitsune do have a fine relationship with them. In this case, we do not have… the ‘alarms’ that we have with the Oni. So…”

“So if the Dragon blood outweighs the Oni, it’ll smother it—make us invisible. As if it never existed,” I said, searching her face for confirmation.

Sanyu grinned, her tails swaying a bit more. “Tadashi.”

A sense of relief lifted off my shoulders, making me release a silent sigh. Thank the First. We could cancel our blood.

“But it will not be permanent.”

I tensed, looking back up at Sanyu whose expression became serious. She stared at me, and I flinched as if she sees through my thoughts and what I was feeling.

“The elixir is only meant to hide it for a day or two. Not forever.”

“That means we have to constantly use it?” Uncle said.

Sanyu nodded. “Correct.”

Damn it.

A small hum came from Sanyu as she turned back to her workbench, continuing to work again with her back facing us. “For all that is worth, I have the belief that not all Oni are born Oni.”

I frowned, attention snapping up to stare at her back. What?

“Goryounin Sanyu,” Miho said, teeth clenched. “To itte wa ikenai!”

“It is true, Shūei,” Sanyu frowned at her. “You can not deny what I saw.”

“Saw?” I said, taking a step forward. My eyes flickered from Miho to Sanyu. “What do you mean ‘saw?’”

Miho released a heavy sigh, facing away from us and shaking her head.

Sanyu peeked at me over her shoulder and said, “I have encountered an Oni who feared death during the war.”

Kai scoffed, letting out a mocking laugh. “An Oni? Fearing death? Are you bullshitting us right now?”

“Kai,” Uncle gave him a look.

“Sanyu,” Miho interjected again, “we can not discuss this. We might be underground, but you know our hearing are keener than any other beings! You will cause trouble to yourself like you almost had done before.”

Sanyu turned to her quickly. “It might not be the right thing to say, Miho, but you know what I saw and experienced. You witnessed it yourself! You were there when you came to me asking how the progress of my plan was per the instructions of Mother Natsumi.”

“I know what you saw. I—I saw it as well, but it will not end well for you if you continue this,” Miho said, her voice cracking a little and a slight falter in her usual stern face.

Sanyu’s, on the other hand, stayed strong, but her voice was weary. “Kare wa kotae o motomete iru. Dakara, watashi wa kore ni kotaete iru.”

From the corner of my eye, Satomi’s attention—which had been on the floor the entire time—snapped over to me. I tensed at her sudden focus, making me glance at her from my peripheral. Her lips were slightly parted, a small crease between her brows as if she was piecing something together. I didn’t like that look. I didn’t like how it seems like she’s reading me and seeing through me.

All of these Kitsune seem like they could read us easily like an open book.

No. Not one bit do I like it.

Mom, seeming to have noticed my distress, mouthed an “are you okay?” I just nodded, mouthing back a ‘fine.’ Nya also glanced, to which I just gave her a nod as I hardened myself a bit.

Keep it together.

“If you don’t mind, Sanyu,” Uncle began, breaking the tension, “would you mind continuing the story?”

Sanyu let out a huff as she broke eye contact with Miho. She took one of the wooden bowls she had been filling with herbs, then went over to the drawer on the counter at her right as she rummaged for something.

“I was trying to protect our people,” she began. “I was close by Hinoki Village where the Oni targeted it as it’s our capital. Many were dying, and not all of our fighters can handle them as they took us by surprise.” She finally found what she was searching for and walked over to Uncle. “Your hand, please.”

Uncle presented his hand as I watched. Sanyu lifted the dagger she had retrieved and made a small cut on the tip of his finger. She squeezed out a few drops, letting it inside the bowl as it mixed with the other contents. A sudden aromatic burst of crushed herbs filled the air, but it was quickly underscored by the sharp, almost electric tang of ozone as the blood met the concoction.

She handed him a cotton before walking back to her workstation and mixed them together. “One of them had went too far and strayed from his position. So, I took the advantage and had him in my grasp. I needed a few more samples of their blood to fully understand them. Use it to counter the magic that they had learned on detecting us.”

She took the other bowl and headed to me. “I had the dagger right on his throat. But… what I saw wasn’t the usual honor that an Oni has at the face of death like us Kitsune do when we fight for our honor.”

I held out my hand. She made a small cut. I flinched as my blood mixed into the bowl as my blood turned a shade of purple then gold for a quick second. For a moment, it seemed like they were splitting but didn’t continue as if it lacked something else to make it go on.

Sanyu’s tone became a whisper, “Though him… an emotion appeared that only men and other beings show. Fear.”

My gaze snapped up to meet hers. They were now gentle, slightly furrowed as if waiting for my reaction. I tried to speak, say even a word, but nothing came out as my mouth stayed agape. I wanted to ask if that was even possible, even to me it sounded like a joke, but my throat had dried off.

Beside Satomi, I spotted Mom fidgeting with the sleeves of her top. A look on her face that I knew she was thinking of someone:

Dad.

I took the cotton from Sanyu and pressed it on my cut as she went back. “I could not proceed with my action. Too stunned for what I saw,” she muttered. “Before I could even move, Miho had already done hers and ended him.”

“You had froze in the middle of a battle, Sanyu,” Miho crossed her arms. “That is the last thing you want to do in a war.”

“I know that.”

“Are you saying that… the Oni are made?” Nya said, a questioning look on her face as if she doesn’t get it.

“Based on some mythologies in my data base,” Zane’s eyes turned blue, “it was believed that a person can become an Oni due to their wicked actions. Not just by blood. Some turn into an Oni from something so immoral that they had done, or they turn into one during their death after a life of wrongful doings.”

“Huh,” Cole raised a brow. “Is that true, Sensei?”

“Some of it,” Uncle said with a nod. “What I do know is that under certain stress or contained anger or desperation… it can happen to me or Lloyd. Based on what the First had recorded.”

Is that how Dad became a full Oni? Because of the Devourer’s influence of having the urge to create destruction and  chaos that his Oni took over him fully? Had he been that desperate to control it that he spiraled down, and it took advantage of him instead?

I swallowed those questions, knowing for a fact that Mom wouldn’t have the heart to hear it. Even how strong she was and how much I wanted to know.

Sanyu hummed in agreement. “I have heard of that tale before. And somehow, I believe some of what it says.”

“You believe dangerously, Sanyu,” Miho said, her tails flicking almost like a whip. “I am not always there to save you. Just like the time where this very village had almost left you to the Oni because of what you say you conceive in.”

The already heavy air became worse, pushing down on us. I could feel the tension between the two, how Miho glared at Sanyu while she kept working on making our elixir.

“You say that now, but these two are the very proof you need that not all are what they are,” Sanyu said through clenched teeth.

A twitch caught my attention from Miho as she looked away. The frown on her face deepened. A little too much as if what Sanyu had said contradicted to what Miho spoke of and believed.

I swallowed the lump in my throat, staying quiet, and knowing that it wasn’t my place to comment on their conversation. Even the others hesitated with Kai leaning on the shelf and his attention away; Cole fidgeting with the sleeves of his gi; Nya staying close to Satomi and Mom who stayed silent as well. Uncle just kept his attention on the two, almost calculating.

Jay’s eyes flickered from one person to another. “Sooo… how long is that thing gonna take?” he said, breaking the tension but not enough.

“A day,” Sanyu said without looking at us. “Usually it would only take me a few hours, but this is new. Not just the singular camouflage of a Kitsune blood by understanding the kind of magic that the Oni had put on themselves. This is the process of separating one blood lineage from the other to best the other.”

“Sure,” Cole said, dragging his word a little with narrowed eyes. “Basically, we’re staying here?”

“Hai.”

“We shall leave you to work, then. We will rest in the inn nearby, it is not far from here,” Miho began and turned to us. There was a short pause as her eyes flickered around before landing at mine and Uncle’s direction.

“Though, I do not believe they would let you both in being—”

“I know,” I said, not wanting to hear it. “We’ll… find a place.”

“You both may stay in my shop,” Sanyu offered, glancing over her shoulder. “I have a spare room big enough for you both.”

A silent sigh of relief came from me.

Uncle bowed beside me, which I did the same. “Thank you. We are in your debt.”

“Iya. You do not owe me anything.”

I stood straight once more, wanting to protest and not accepting the fact that we didn’t owe her anything for such kindness. It was a breath of fresh air to know there was another Kitsune who didn’t believe like what the others believe in besides Satomi.

As for Miho, I wasn’t even entirely sure, but I hoped she doesn’t. After all, she did take us with her to help with Shijima’s situation.

Everyone began to leave, Miho leading as she went up the stairs as I let everyone go on ahead. Satomi glanced at me, noting there was a hint of worry in her eyes. I offered a reassuring smile, nudging my head to tell her to follow the rest as Nya placed a hand on her shoulder and followed her up. When the others were three steps ahead, I finally trailed behind, not before glancing back at Sanyu.

She kept busy, mixing and stirring the bowls. As if sensing me staring, she looked over at me and gave a small smile.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 17

Late Night Melody

Night fell quickly, silent except for the songs of the crickets that the waves tonight were steady. I sat cross-legged on my futon, staring at the shamisen on my lap as today’s events repeated in my head. 

Especially down at Sanyu’s shop.

The revelation that Miho could’ve helped the Ninja back then, and her not doing so as it wasn’t her ‘business’, upset me. I know she told me not to doubt what my mother foretold her, but it was still hard to believe. None of it made sense.

My mother was able to see the future? I did recall Miho telling me something about someone giving her a vision back in the monastery. Who was it? Was it part of our powers as Kitsune? Was it special? Did it only apply to the Hinoki family?

I traced the design on the shamisen, following the curve of the fox on it before looking out the window.

Another thing bothered me, not just the argument with Miho, was what was revealed about what was happening in the Regions. How the war was affecting them; how the the storms were untamable and the plants dying to the point that two regions are considering moving to Hinoki Village.

I wondered how Mom and Grandfather were able to keep things together. But, as I looked around, nothing seemed different. The elements’ waves all looked the same as they were when we came here. They were slightly more vivid, almost stronger than the ones back in Ninjago—where it was thin and appeared like thin threads.

Other than that, there was the conversation about the Oni. The possibility of them being made and not just born from the beginning as one. I had to agree with Master Wu, I had heard of it before from books and online. Most were considered as mythology and tales, nothing more.

But… there was that one person that kept surfacing up my mind:

Lloyd.

His reactions were different, and his waves were too hard to miss. They were sluggish, the green tint of them duller as he kept staring off, and those glint of gold that I found unique from him wasn’t there. I even noticed Misako’s had changed as well, as if remembering something when that subject was brought up.

But the way Lloyd tried to hide it was there. It was evident. When he noticed me staring, he forced a smile. It failed, of course, his waves barely shifted back to normal. It was like the topic was something he wanted to be far away from as much as possible.

It only became worse from what Sanyu said: “Kare wa kotae o motomete iru. Dakara, watashi wa kore ni kotaete iru.” 

“He is seeking answers. Therefore, I am answering this.”

Lloyd seeking answers? Answers about what? Was he having trouble with his Oni?

At the thought of him, I sighed, taking Shikisha with me as I stood and walked towards the window. The chilling wind did nothing to calm me, though the cold was now bearable.

When we got to the inn, the owner recognized us as the gaikokujin (foreigners), but she also recognized me as the daughter of the Mother Kitsune. I was bombarded with questions and cooing, treating me like royalty to the point she gave me one of her best rooms in the inn.

Miho’s was a door away from mine, per her request.

A kimono was gifted to me from a clothing owner not so far from the inn, giving me his best one for free. Red and soft cotton, komon-style kimono with flowery designs that seemed to be common blossoms here in Shijima. It was a guess because I’d never seen them before.

He even gave me a kanzashi, made out of cherry wood and carved into a silhouette of a fox—that the owner explained to me in great detail—with its intricate designs of sakura petals hanging from a string on the tip.

I tried declining the gifts, but he insisted and was more than happy to give something to the ‘Hime.’ For that matter, we were treated kindly and given warm food for dinner, which I noticed Jay and Cole were more than happy with.

Even so, it didn’t felt right. Somewhere at the back of my mind, I felt guilty for enjoying it and having a warm moment with the rest when two of our team weren’t. Instead, they were back in the shop—and I kept wondering if Master Wu and Lloyd were fine.

I sighed heavily, looking over to the apothecary. The lanterns glowed faintly, letting out a warm light along the paths and small, stone bridges with a thin river rushing underneath. It was silent. No more storm as if it had settled when we arrived and after a day of rage.

I do wonder… how was Lloyd? His reactions and troubled face wouldn’t leave my mind. I couldn’t sleep because of it.

My gaze shifted to the apothecary again, then to the door of my room. Hesitation gnawed at me, but another fought back. The feeling of needing to know how he was, and the worry about a friend, too hard to ignore.

With a sigh, I silently went over to the door, bringing Shikisha with me. I didn’t had the heart to leave it, it was the only other thing making me feel safe. Along the way, I took Lloyd’s scarf that he had let me borrow earlier on the way here to Byakko Village, knowing he might want it back.

The door creaked a bit when slid it open, peeking out and causing me to flinch that my ears twitched. I hoped no one heard that.

Glancing from left to right, I quietly slipped out and closed the door without a sound, heading straight for the stairs. Occasionally, the steps would groan underneath my weight, making me freeze to listen intently. I could hear the snores from certain rooms, slight shifting underneath their covers before another stillness. But I mostly looked out for Miho, hoping she wouldn’t stir. When I made sure nothing happened, I continued down.

Thank goodness for these ears. They were very helpful.

By the time I reached the front, I made sure the owner wasn’t in her spot at the counter before heading to the genkan. I grabbed my yukigeta from the shelves where we left our footwear neatly and made my way out.

I slipped out of the door, strapping the shamisen over my shoulders while I tucked the bachi in my obi. After making sure no one noticed, I headed for the apothecary, my footsteps crunching on the snow and lungs pierced by the cold.

I shuddered, feeling it go all the way to the tips of my tails. I went up the small steps to the door, raising my fist to knock, but stopped.

Knock in the middle of the night? What was I thinking? Surely everyone inside was asleep, and I would just disturb them if I did.

“Yare yare, nani kangaeteta no, Satomi?” I muttered to myself, shaking my head. “Seriously, knock? Aho.”

Sighing at my stupidity, I turned to head back, realizing how foolish this idea was. For sure he was asleep, and I would just be disturbing them if I do this. I’ll just leave him alone and let him get his rest.

I just got down the steps and onto the ground, when a shuffle from inside made me cease as my ears twitched.

The door began to slide. It sounded like it was halfway open when it stopped.

I turned, only coming face-to-face with the person I was meaning to seek.

Lloyd stood there, looking surprised as his emotional waves shifted a little before settling down. “Satomi, why are you up so late?” he whispered, peeking left and right.

“Oh, I wanted to—” I trailed off, narrowing my eyes when I noticed his waves turned sluggish again.

My gaze flickered back to his eyes, his form straight and a bit tense. He was trying to hide it. Again.

“Nothing,” I began. “I was hoping to bump into you, actually.”

“You were?” he stammered, closing the door behind him softly.

“Sorry, was that too direct?” I said, panicking a little when I noticed the slight tremble in his voice. Why did I had to say it like that, as if he were in trouble?

He shook his head. “No—well, it was a bit. It did catch me off guard,” he chuckled, rubbing the back of his neck.

There was a short pause between us, and I noticed his eyes drifting down to the floor. I pressed my lips together, my fingers brushing gently over his scarf. It felt surprisingly soft. It did smell like him—a delicate mix of fresh cedar and crisp air. Nothing too strong, just subtle and comforting, even.

“Do you… want to walk?” I muttered after a moment, unsure how he’d respond.

He glanced back up at me, a hint of a smile appearing on his lips as he came down the steps. “Sure. That would be nice.”

I nodded, handing his scarf back, silently wanting to thank him for letting me borrow it. Lloyd came in pace beside me, taking it with a nod then wrapping it around his neck.

A peaceful silence accompanied us as we walked. The houses towered over us, doors and windows shut, with their lanterns hanging above their doors. I looked around, seeing the colors of the wind and snow blending together, forming a gentle lullaby that calmed me more than before. But, when I peeked at Lloyd, I saw his were the opposite. Troubled.

“Tonight’s more peaceful than yesterday’s,” I said, trying to break the silence.

He nodded, looking up at the sky as his breath came out into a puff of smoke. His cheeks and the tips of his ears were slightly red now on his pale face.

“Yeah. It’s nice.” He gestured up and down at me. “You look more comfortable. Is that keeping you warm?”

I glanced down at my kimono, straightening a crease before nodding. “Yes. The owner of a shop nearby was kind enough to gift it to me.”

“Hm. Glad they’re treating you and the others nicely.”

I frowned a little at his words, noting the slight fluctuation in his tone. “Hm-mh. Nice of them.”

Another silence.

“Are you okay?”

“What?” I stopped suddenly, facing him, caught off guard by his question.

“You looked upset about what Miho said back in the shop. About your question,” he elaborated.

Oh, he noticed that. “Yes, I’m fine. It does bother me still that she didn’t help Ninjago when it needed saving.”

He shrugged. “That’s why we Ninja are there. That’s our purpose.”

“I know. But she’s much more—”

“Experienced against the Oni?”

I nodded slowly, hesitant and not wanting to offend him.

“I understand. But everyone has their reasons, and we had to learn anyway,” Lloyd began walking again.

I followed.

“You’re taking this better than I did. Not when you finally learned there was someone like her who could’ve helped and made the situation easier.”

“Nothing in this life is easy. Me becoming a leader wasn’t one. Took me a while to get a gist of it, too,” he offered a small smile. “We had to make hard decisions then, especially with… mine. Needing to find my dad to help us go to the Borg Tower after everything that happened with the Sons of Garmadon and the royals incident just to stop the Oni.”

I went quiet, remembering those times. The destruction. The sudden explosion of the palace. The chaos.

He gave another smile and said, “But things happen. We need to move on and learn from it. After all, we have bigger things to focus on right now.”

I nodded, knowing he was right about that statement. My mind wandered for a bit before glancing back at him. “How about you?”

“Me?”

“Yes. I noticed you looked… concerned when Sanyu and Miho began talking about the Oni. Before that, back at the gate, you already looked on edge.”

Lloyd stopped walking. We were now standing in the middle of a small bridge as he looked down into the river—gently flowing underneath and rushing.

The lantern light glinted off his blonde hair, highlighting his green eyes. Usually it would be so bright, now it looked dark and heavy. He hesitated, his emotional waves revealing more than words before he exhaled heavily.

“I…” he stopped again. Then a smile came as he looked at me, not reaching his eyes. “It’s nothing.”

“Lloyd,” I said, frowning in worry.

He sighed, jaw tightening as he glanced back at the water. He didn’t respond, both of us just standing there in silence. Then, after a second or two, he ran his hands on his face.

“I just don’t like that part of myself,” he said, eyes still focused on the water.

I held my breath, keeping quiet to let him continue. Hate that part of himself?

“All this time—all that the Oni had done was nothing but destruction and causing problems in everyone’s lives,” he continued. His hands turned into fists. “Uncle and I didn’t even do anything, and this village is already cautious of us just because of what we are. They almost didn’t even let us in. They only did because of you.”

His attention snapped at me, expression downturned as he mumbled, “If you weren’t there… this mission wouldn’t have ended well.”

“Lloyd…” I muttered.

He looked away again, brushing his hair back. “I’m just—I don’t want to become like them. I’m scared because my dad became one. I have it. It’s stronger in me than Uncle’s, because his Dragon blood is stronger than Dad’s—which leads to mine…” he sighed, jaws tense and eyes closed.

It almost looked like he was on the verge of tears from the way his shoulder shook when he took a deep breath in. My chest clenched at the sight of him like this. This was new, and I never expected to see the Green Ninja like this.

So… human. So vulnerable and lost.

“They’ve caused enough destruction and I have to fix it,” he whispered that I almost missed it. His eyes settled to me again. “I have to fix it. The war, the one the letter told us about—” he put a hand on his chest, almost like feeling something in there that he had tucked in, “—it’s their fault. In other words, it’s my responsibility. Like I said before, when we were still in the monastery, I swear to help you in any way I can.”

We stared at each other in silence. He was still heaving after his confession, eyes steady as they flickered all over my face. He seemed to settle down now, and I noticed his waves had slightly come back to normal.

“I’m sorry, I shouldn’t be putting all of this on you,” he said suddenly, retracting again.

“No. No, no, it’s fine!” I reassured quickly. “I’m glad you told me.”

He nodded once, a bit slow and lacking his usual resolved ones. Another silence passed between us as we both faced the river, watching it.

I listened to it. Listened to the wind, snow, and water. A calming melody that settled my emotions and stilled them for even a moment, making me almost forget about my worries. If only he could feel it.

Even just for a moment.

Without even thinking, I reached back and took my shamisen, settling it in front of me as I reached for the bachi. I kept my attention focused on the movements and colors of the elements, reading them like notes as I began to play them together on my instrument.

I watched as the vibration on mine came out, a mix of all three as it let out a calm and lulling song. It echoed through the streets, but none of the houses and their residents seemed to stir as I focused on playing. From the corner of my eyes, I saw Lloyd’s shoulder sag as he let out a sigh and closed his eyes. He tilted his body slightly to my direction, almost as if wanting to listen more.

My eyes narrowed, noticing his waves synchronizing with the one that was coming out of my shamisen. My lips parted.

Am I… doing that?

I stopped. His waves came back to his usual green, and those flicker of gold came back. He opened his eyes.

“That was… soothing,” he smiled. “I almost forgot what was bothering like it wasn’t even there.”

I kept staring. “You felt that way?”

He nodded, eyes narrowing as if noticing the shift in my mood. “Yeah. Why? Is something wrong?”

“No. That was… kind of my intention when I played it. Well, that’s what I felt when I was listening and focused on the scenery.”

Lloyd frowned a little before his eyes widened. “Do you think that was part of your power? The song or something?”

“Maybe it was,” I mumbled, thinking deeply about it. “I mean, it never happened like this before. Sure, my friend says that I’m able to make her feel emotions on certain songs I have composed, but it never touched someone like this to the point it changed their whole… emotion.”

“Or manipulated it,” Lloyd said, his expression thoughtful. “It’s almost similar to what happened back at the museum, when you played a tune on the shamisen. I was weak from fighting, and I suddenly felt energized again.”

“Exactly!” I said, perking up.

He grinned.“You’re a fast learner.”

I shrugged, excitement bubbling from the discovery. “I guess, or I just know what to do.”

“Might be in your genes. Who knows, maybe you’ve been doing it all this time without even knowing it yet.”

I chuckled, his smile easing me more. So glad that glint in his eyes were back again.

He hummed, resting his hands on his hips and looked around almost exaggeratedly. “Welp, it’s getting late—well, late-er. We should head back, get some sleep. For sure things’ll be busy tomorrow.”

“Yeah,” I chuckled at his little joke, beginning to walk. “Other than that, I do not want to get scolded by Miho if she learns I’m not in my room.”

He hissed, almost comically. “Yeah, you don’t want that. I remember I got scolded by Uncle once for staying up late training. I was sore the next day—like super sore—and the moment we woke up, instant practice as punishment.”

I snorted, raising a brow. “Sensei Wu does those kinds of punishments? I thought he was kind with his penalties?”

“More like unpredictable,” he smirked.

We began to head back, talking and laughing quietly with one another as we spoke of joyful memories. The atmosphere was lighter than before when we first came out, something I was grateful of.

Along the way, I told him about the dream I kept getting in my sleep, telling him that I wasn’t able to get the rest of the song and only got a few verses of them and how it started popping out since I was just little. He had told me to try playing it now, thinking that maybe something new would happen.

In so, I did.

And when I was getting close to that same part I always stopped in, I was hoping for something new—to discover the next few notes or the shamisen to do something—but, just like before, nothing happened. Shikisha stayed still.

He might’ve noticed my disappoint since he gave me an encouraging smile. “You’ll find out, don’t worry. Maybe she’s just a bit shy right now,” he said, tone soft.

“Thanks. Until now I still don’t know who played it,” I muttered, giving a shrug as I shouldered the instrument again.

“Hm, well… I could be wrong with this hunch, but I’ll say that it was your mom who played it. Mother Natsumi.”

I peeked at him. “You think?”

“I mean, come on. Shamisen… you remembering it and it continuing to appear in your dreams? I’ll bet my whole secret stash of candy that it’s her.”

I narrowed, a small smile slipping up my lips. “You have a secret stash of candy?”

“Um… forget I said that,” he moved past me, speeding up a little.

“Wait, no! You can’t do that. Where do you stash it?” I jogged a little, catching up to him.

“I shouldn’t have told you.” He paused, eyes flickering everywhere as if he was looking out for someone before saying, “Somewhere inside the Bounty—just don’t tell Mom, please! She banned me from having some. It’s been two months.

“She banned you?”

He groaned, burying his face a little underneath his scarf. I would even guess he was pouting.

“It’s stupid. She said I was eating too much. I can’t help it! It keeps me focused whenever tests are up and I pull an all-nighter to study.” He squinted his eyes. “I even remember studying while doing patrol. There was also a time I had to listen to an audio book that my English teacher had told us to read while I was fighting crime because we had a test the next day.”

I snorted at his words, only earning a groan from him as he kept muttering how he should’ve kept that information to himself. Who knew he could be this childish? Mika would’ve died to know this information.

I do miss them.

After a couple more steps and entertaining conversations, Lloyd soon dropped me off by the inn and said our goodbyes. I headed inside, halfway from sealing the door, when I saw him.

He was also closing the shop door when he noticed me. He gave a smile and a wave. I waved back before closing it.

Chapter Text

CHAPTER 18

Veiled Yet Seen

It wasn’t long before all of us were back in Sanyu’s shop; all of us waiting as she poured the liquids that she had concocted into their crystal-like containers. She turned to face Lloyd and Master Wu, handing them their elixirs, each distinct yet similar in appearance.

Lloyd’s was a brighter shade of gold than Master Wu’s, and I noticed him inspecting it with furrowed brows.

“Both you and your uncle have a different dosage, hence the difference in shade,” Sanyu said, as if reading our minds.

“What does that mean?” Misako said, looking from one vial to the other.

“Due to Lloyd-san’s Oni blood dominating more than his Dragon, his vial is brighter as he requires a stronger dosage to subdue that part of his blood.”

Figured as much. Just like what Lloyd had said last night—his Oni was stronger than his Dragon.

“As for Wu-san, you all may already guess.” Sanyu gestured at the two of them. “Go on, take a sip.”

Lloyd and Master Wu glanced at one another, a slight hesitation coming up Lloyd’s waves while Master Wu’s remained gentle and calm. He nodded reassuringly at Lloyd as he took a sip from his vial. Misako placed a hand on Lloyd’s arm, seeming to ground him a little. He swallowed, then shut his eyes and took a sip from his.

We all waited, watching as there was silence.

After what seemed like a second, I noted the sudden lightness in the air. I placed a hand on my chest, furrowing my brows. The heaviness that I feel whenever Lloyd was close by—the feeling of being alerted of an Oni presence—was gone.

“I would guess it worked, Hime?” Sanyu grinned.

“I… well, I feel lighter.”

She glanced at Miho as if also waiting for her confirmation. Miho just offered a firm nod.

“Good, that means it worked,” she said, clapping her hands together.

“It worked?” Jay arched a brow.

“There does not seem to be any difference,”  Zane began. “I do not see any fluctuations in their readings that seem to be some kind of concern or confirmation.”

“No such things can determine that, Zane-san,” Sanyu chuckled, waving her hand as if in dismissal. “Only us, Kitsune, can.”

“Then, we shall take your word for it,” Master Wu said after a mild hesitation. “Thank you.”

Sanyu nodded. “More than happy to help.”

We all stood there for a moment, a silence coming in almost as if they others were still trying to make sense of whatever kind of magic that Sanyu’s elixirs had done. But, then, I noticed her cross her arms, her eyes narrowing as if in irritation.

She gestured at all of us. “You all can not keep going around like this.”

All of us glanced at one another, each of us having the same look.

“Go around like what?” Kai said, glaring at her. “If you’re talking about how we look—”

“No, not that.” She looked over to Miho. “Why have you not taught them what to do?”

“You expect me to be able to do everything all at once?” Miho frowned.

“That’s not what I said, but you know they’re vulnerable like this. Even Hime can be seen.”

I watched them for a moment, peeking at the others. They all looked confused. I wouldn’t blame them, I was was too.

My eyes flickered to the emotional waves that were coming out of them, then I looked back at the two. “Are you two talking about the waves?”

That seemed to have made them stop as Sanyu gave a nod. “Yes. Those need to get off and be controlled. Having it freely floating around will be a problem. The others can use that against you all.”

She glared back at Miho. “No wonder Genshiro was brave enough to deny you. You know he listens to you. But hearing about what happened at the gate yesterday—”

“That is enough, Sanyu. I am aware of that,” Miho said, shaking her head and tone annoyed.

“Great! Then you all need to go to Hakuchi-sama. He will help with it and you know it.”

“Wait, wait, hold up,” Cole stepped forward. “What are you guys talking about ‘waves’ or whatever?”

I bit my lip, unsure how they would react to what I was about to say next. “It’s like being able to read you guys.”

“Read us?” Nya faced me, squinting her eyes. “How? What do you mean?”

“Like… I can see what you guys are feeling or at least what I presume you guys to be feeling.” I fidgeted at the strap of my shamisen. “Though, I’m not as skilled as Miho-san and Sanyu-san.”

Miho nodded, crossing her arms. “That is the best way to explain it. It is part of our power as Kitsune. Yes, indeed, we are known as ‘Master of Sound’ or how you all define it in Ninjago. That is our expertise. But, for our power to be effective and used, we must be able to read and assess our environment’s waves, as well as the people around us, for the sake of finding ‘the right tune.’”

“Unless one knows how to ‘block’ it,” Sanyu smiled.

“So, does that mean you’ve known all this time I’ve been nervous?” Jay turned to me in exasperation.

I shrugged and he groaned. Cole just patted his back.

“How do we block it?” Lloyd said, tone becoming serious.

“It is complicated to explain,” Miho shook her head, averting her eyes from us.

Sanyu passed by her, a smirk on her face as she went to one of her shelves. “In other words, it’s one of Miho’s weaknesses when it comes to teaching.”

“Goryounin Sanyu,” Miho seethed through her clenched teeth.

Sanyu only chuckled as she took one the scrolls from inside. So, Miho doesn’t know all like she deemed herself to be.

Sanyu gestured for all of us to get closer as she opened the scroll onto her workbench. I went beside Miho, clutching Shikisha closer to make sure not to hit anyone with it.

Once again, the map of Shijima laid in front of us as Sanyu smoothed the creases and pointed at an estate down more South. Written on it was Hakuchi-ke—House Hakuchi.

“That’s where he lives. Not so far from here,” Sanyu said. She glanced over to me. “That’s where your uncle spends most of his time.”

My attention snapped at her. “My uncle?”

Miho hummed in agreement. “You remember there are four of them, yes?”

I nodded, my focus on her.

“Your mother being first, then Lord Hakuchi, then Lady Asami, then Lord Hiroshi.” She crossed her arms again, tails flicking. “The ones at war with one another are Lady Asami and Lord Hiroshi.”

“You’re saying that this whole war is between the two youngest?” Kai said, raising a brow.

“Reminds me of you and Nya,” Cole said with a smirk. “A whole war happens when you two argue—ow!” He rubbed his shoulder, a small pout on his face as Nya glared up at him.

“Say that again and you’re dead!” Nya seethed.

“It seems to me there is always a form of disagreement between siblings,” Zane muttered. “Always leading to some kind tantrum and throwing things at one another. May it be verbally or physically.”

Jay snorted who ducked behind Cole when Nya directed her glare at him.

“Perfectly I don’t have one. These guys are enough,” Lloyd whispered to me, making me chuckle quietly.

I noticed Misako narrowing her eyes at him. Lloyd just raised his hands in surrender.

“Tashika ni,” a low murmur reached my ears, almost swallowed by the ambient sounds of the shop and more bickering from the Ninja.

I glanced at Miho, but her expression remained neutral, her gaze fixed on the map. Her grip on Father’s katana tightened a bit. She agreed to their statement?

“Focus, everyone,” Master Wu said, his tone stern. Instantly, everyone settled down. Master Wu gave a nod and turned to Miho. “In that case, we shall pay Lord Hakuchi a visit. Seek his aid to ‘block’ these waves.”

“That we will,” Miho said, standing straighter. “We shall travel there. With you and Lloyd’s Oni now hidden, it would be easier to stay out of sight. We must keep moving while the siblings are not planning any attack on one another just yet.”

Everyone nodded in agreement, Miho already moving as she went for the stairs and adjusted her weapon on her hip. The others began to follow as I trailed behind Nya who was already climbing up.

I already took two steps up when I noticed Misako not following. She was standing there, eyes trained to where Sanyu, Master Wu, and Lloyd was. My eyes flickered over to them, watching as well.

“Thank you for helping us, Goryounin Sanyu,” Master Wu said, bowing. “And for letting my nephew and I take refuge in your home.”

“Thank you,” Lloyd bowed as well.

Sanyu bowed back with a smile. “It is my pleasure to know you both, and I’m more than happy to provide.” She stood straight once more, followed by Master Wu and Lloyd. “Remember, the effects only last for two days. After that, you both must take it again.”

“We will remember that, and your kindness,” Master Wu said as he turned and began to leave.

Misako gave a smile as she bowed over to Sanyu as if giving her own thank you, which Sanyu gave a nod. I stepped aside to let the other two go ahead, Master Wu patting my shoulder as he passed by. I watched as they disappeared up the stairs before glancing over to Lloyd.

He was about to turn and follow along when Sanyu stopped him. I noticed his shoulders tensing when she put a hand on them. My ears twitched when she whispered something, but heard nothing.

His waves shifted, tangling against each other and turning a slight shade of grayer green before coming back to its usual color. A frown crossed his face, but he only nodded and began to head for the stairs.

What did she say to him?

We exchanged a glance, which he gave me a quick smile before pressing his earpiece. “Pixal, send the Rover and the bikes to the other end of the village. We’re heading South.”

There was a small buzz from his earpiece, presumably Pixal giving out her own reply.

Lloyd focused on me again, gesturing up the stairs. “Come on, let’s not make the others wait.”

I nodded, already taking a few more steps when I caught Sanyu’s gaze. We stared at one another for a moment, time seeming to slow down as her lips moved.

“Kono sekai o yome,” she mouthed. Read this world.

I frowned at her words, a bit confused to what she was trying to say. Did she mean the waves? I simply bowed before going up the stairs, not wanting to hover for too long and keep the others waiting. From the hall, they were all there waiting for us. Miho, I noticed, was nowhere in sight. I looked around.

“Where’s Miho?” I asked Nya.

“She’s outside, talking to the chief or something,” she said, pointing to the door with her thumb. “It seemed like he wanted to talk to her about something.”

Glancing past the others who were crowding the small hallway, I caught sight of Miho with Genshiro deep in a conversation. Their expressions were serious, lips moving fast, and I recognized they were speaking to each other in our tongue.

I moved a bit closer, straining my ears just to hear a few sentences.

“Are you certain Hime wouldn’t need more guards? I can send some of my best fighters with you and your group,” Genshiro said.

“I appreciate the offer, Genshiro-dono,” Miho shook her head. “Demo we are far too many already. If one of the siblings spots us with some of your men, there is no doubt Byakko would be dragged into this war—especially not when the father-son duo is out there. You know how vigilant Ginko Isamu is.”

“You said you encountered him and his son?”

“Hai, they were trying to take the shamisen and Hime. It happened in the museum I had worked as a curator as a disguise.”

Genshiro sighed heavily. “I understand. Still, I can’t believe you’re letting some Oni guard her.”

“Stop your worrying, Genshiro. I have been in their realm long enough to know where they stand. But If they do try to harm Hime, I would make sure to have their heads using Shōgun-dono’s blade.”

A weight on my shoulder caused me to blink and glance on my right, seeing Lloyd giving me a worried look. “All good?”

Giving a nod, I said, “Yeah. Sorry, I just spaced-off for a moment.”

“Alright. Let’s get moving.”

He went ahead, heading out of the door as I caught a glimpse of the elixir Sanyu gave him tied on his gi. It contrasted a lot from his colors, hard to ignore as the liquid swirled and glowed with a faint, steady light. Sometimes, he was so hard to read, but I do hope the elixir was helping him even a little about his worries.

Upon exiting the shop, the conversation between Miho and Genshiro halted as they turned to us. I went instantly next to Miho who glanced at me, almost as if making sure I was fine before turning to Genshiro again.

“We appreciate you and your village’s kindness for letting us in, once again, Genshiro-dono,” Miho bowed.

I bowed as well. “Arigatou.”

“It was an honor for you to grace our village, Senritsu-hime,” Genshiro bowed lower. “May the Mother and our ancestors guide you and light your way to give us hope for a new beginning and for this war to end.”

“Sheesh, no pressure at all,” Jay murmured somewhere behind me, my ear twitching when I picked up on it.

Genshiro’s words made me grip the strap of my shamisen tighter; only now realizing the weight and expectations that I now carried. When I gained my posture again, I noticed the villagers peeking from their windows or circling around us but not in a suffocating way.

They kept their distance as if hesitant whether to go talk to me while Genshiro was there, or…

I glanced over to Lloyd who stood not so far from me with Master Wu beside him. Some children kept glancing at them. There were some slips of pale yellow waves radiating out of them, almost as if they didn’t had full control on blocking their emotions to not be read. They were trembling slightly, hiding behind each other.

Lloyd’s, on the other hand, was a bit tense. Seeming to have noticed them, he took his hand off the hilt of his weapon. He offered a smile, warm and gentle accompanied after with a tiny wave.

The kids began to whisper to one another, nudging each other that it looked like they were daring each other. One of them took a brave step closer to Lloyd, looking hesitant yet fascinated.

Lloyd just stood there, his gaze softening more as he shifted his whole body to the boy. After a second of what looked like hesitation, he kneeled to the kid’s level. That same golden color radiated out, more of it besting the green that it almost created some kind of dome around him.

Like a sanctuary.

How does he do that? Was he even aware of it?

The boy was a few steps away from Lloyd, looking far more relaxed and eyes glittering. He reached out a hand, almost like reaching for the waves as if it mesmerized him. Lloyd leaned forward a bit when a woman grabbed the boy’s arm and pulled him back.

She stepped in front of the children, her tails fanning behind her while glaring at Lloyd and Master Wu. She bared her fangs, growling.

Lloyd’s softened gaze vanished, and the dome-like sanctuary was replaced by the same shades of green. He flinched subtly when it happened before standing up again, posture rigid.

I looked away, frowning but tried to hide it. They didn’t even do anything wrong, and their Oni blood was already hidden. Lloyd was already smiling. So, why?

“We shall get going,” Miho said, breaking me out of my reverie as she took my arm. “Let us go.”

All of us turned, heading for the gate leading to the South.

“Pixal’s already there,” Lloyd said, just taking his finger off his earpiece, already back to his serious mode as if the interaction earlier never happened. “Kai, Zane, you know what to do.”

The two nodded, picking up their pace as we went out of the gate, spotting Pixal with the Rover and the bikes a few feet away from us. Kai and Zane went to their respective bikes, while the Rover opened up as we all entered.

“Welcome back,” Pixal said, already head for the captain’s chair. “I presume the mission was a success?”

“Indeed it was,” Master Wu said, taking a seat on an extra chair as the other Ninja went to their usual seats.

She nodded. “What is our next agenda?”

“We’re heading further South,” Lloyd began, facing her.

Pixal turned to the console, pressing a button as the map of Shijima popped up. I stared in awe, noticing how detailed it was as my fingers passed through the hologram. So cool.

“Whoa, how did you get this?” Jay said, staring up at it.

“While you were all away, I did some work. I had the map saved in my program. In so, I worked on it to add it in the modules for the Rover and the Cruisers.”

“Smart move, Pixal,” Kai’s voice popped up from the speakers.

“We are the smartest in the group, after all,” Zane joined, sounding proud of Pixal.

“Where’s our specific destination?” Pixal turned to Lloyd again.

Before Lloyd could speak, Miho moved closer to the holographic map, pointing at the estate of Uncle Hakuchi. “This is our destination.”

Pixal nodded, beginning to press buttons. “Sending coordinates to you and Kai, Zane.”

“Copy that, Pix.”

After the coordinates were sent, the hologram disappeared as Pixal began to drive the Rover. Lloyd stood as he offered me his chair, which I just bowed and took it without protest. He stood just right beside the chair, and I noticed him putting his hand on his chest—just like the time we had spoke to one another last night with a visible frown.

“Are you okay?” I whispered.

He looked down at me, smiling. “Yeah… just thinking.” He reached inside his gi, pulling out a piece of paper.

“Is that the letter you were talking about last night?”

A sigh came from him with a nod. “I’m trying to figure out who sent it. We asked Miho already back in the monastery, but she said it wasn’t her.”

I went silent, thinking. “Are you wishing to ask if my uncle was the one who sent it?”

“Yeah. But, then again, we have more important business with him than this letter right now. I’ll ask him when we have the time,” he pocketed it again, his focus shifting on me again as his eyes softened. “Are you excited?”

“Meeting him?” I shrugged, only now realizing that I was finally meeting one of my family. My true family. “Nervous.”

“Normal feeling, since it would be your first time. I kinda was when I first met Mom.”

I gave a smile, appreciating him trying to lift up my mood.

“Since we are speaking of Hakuchi-dono,” Miho interjected, seeming to have been listening to us, “do not be anxious. Out of the three, he is the exact embodiment of the wind, hence him possessing the shakuhachi.”

The shakuhachi, a bamboo flute. One of the instruments that were gentle and refined of the wind instruments that I know of. I’ve heard some songs with the shakuhachi being played—from festivals to theaters—and every time it was used… the wind always seemed to shift a little as if dancing to its tunes.

If Miho said Uncle Hakuchi was like the wind, then perhaps I shouldn’t be as nervous as I was. But, yet again, the wind could also be unpredictable. It could be powerful and shifting directions without a warning. Sometimes its nurtured, sometimes it tore things apart.

I wonder, which kind of wind would my uncle be?

I shook my head, trying to brush those negative thoughts away. I suppose I was that nervous.

“He will be able to help us, perhaps even assist the Ninja to gain their elemental control again and learn more of why that is so to make you all understand Shijima,” Miho said, looking ahead with a slight frown.

“Hope he will be. It would be good for the Ninja to get them back to their fight,” Misako said, her eyes squinting with determination behind her glasses.

Miho hummed in agreement. “That we will.”

Chapter Text

Chapter 19

判断

Handan

The journey to Uncle Hakuchi’s estate took a while longer than it did to get to Byakko Village. It was already past midday, and we were still on the road.

The Ninja were already groaning and stretching their legs when we weren’t even halfway there. Jay, mostly, complained about how far it was. Nya kept rolling her eyes because of it, though I knew she was quietly agreeing based on her expression.

Lloyd paced around to check on everyone, making sure that no one was falling asleep—especially Kai being in a bike, and Zane not much of a problem. Cole almost did, and Lloyd had to take his spot for about an hour before they switched again.

He looked tired, too, to be honest. I tried to call on him to take my spot and rest; but, based on his waves, he was stubborn and I don’t think he would’ve done it. It only made it final when Misako had tried but he declined as quickly as she asked.

Miho, Master Wu, and Misako spoke to each other occasionally during the ride; mostly to speak about the terrains, what to expect when we arrived at Uncle Hakuchi’s, and some of the history of Shijima’s lands as Misako asked for them. Miho was more than happy to indulge them—her posture straight and chin up high with her voice strong and proud the whole time. Misako, in the process, had this serious look on her face as if she was taking mental notes of it.

It reminded me of Lloyd back in Dad’s estate when they were arguing about taking the vehicles or walking all the way to Byakko Village.

They were very similar to one another, now that I did think about it. In some cases, I did note Lloyd having her eyes. I supposed that was where he mostly got his soft expressions and looks, especially whenever he was relaxed and let down his guard like last night and with those kids.

Somewhere through the ride, Miho had instructed me to look out and tell her what I see—another one of her teachings. Mostly focused on scenery, taking notes of how the waves worked and changed as she believed I needed to learn Shijima’s patterns.

The changes that happened soon came.

The endless snow turned into a field of greenery, trees up high, birds flying, and mountain ranges from afar. The waves of the snow slowly disappeared and was overcome by the colors of nature. It was more alive, awake, and with more variety of distinct noises than it did back in Byakko. The elemental waves here were more gentle and soft, sometimes with sudden ups when a bird sings.

By the time we passed by a small mountain scape, that was when we finally saw the estate—standing proud and serene. It wasn’t just a structure, but it appeared like an extension of the landscape itself. Carved into the mountain side; elegant, sweeping roofs and tiered platforms seemed to flow like frozen charcoal waterfalls.

There were those familiar blue flames again, floating around like petals. Kitsunebi, foxfires, Miho told me, something she said that I would learn and perhaps my uncle would teach me to conjure.

Pixal stopped the Rover just a few feet away from the stairs as everyone came out. I strapped Shikisha behind me, and double-checked that the bachi was still tucked into my obi. Kai and Zane rejoined the group as we all looked up at the stairs.

“Let us not waste more time,” Miho said, climbing up without a moments hesitation.

I trailed after her.

From behind me, I heard Jay sigh audibly as I glanced behind to watch. “I’m glad to be off the Rover, but why does everything have to have high stairs and built on a mountain?”

“The monastery is also built on a mountain,” Nya said, arching a brow. “By this time, you should be used to it.”

“We could conjure up dragons back home. But here? Here we have nothing but more walking!”

“Enough complaining, Walker. Go up,” Kai said, pushing him forwards playfully.

“Yeah, just think of it as another one of our workouts,” Cole added with a shrug.

Jay just groaned louder.

Lloyd glanced at me and shook his head, a smile on his face. I chuckled softly, following closely to Miho as I glanced around.

The air here felt different—lighter, clearer, humming with a quiet ancient power that seeped from every stone. The trees danced, almost as if sending a message that we had arrived as I watched the waves drifting up to the estate.

A shiver ran through my spine, trying to calm my beating heart as we grew closer to the gates. My chest tightened, and it seemed harder to breath.

I was going to meet my uncle. Uncle Hakuchi—Lord Hakuchi.

What would he say? Would he be disappointed? Not care? Dismiss us? What about me? Would he like me?

“Satomi,” a gentle voice called, making me glance to my right and spotting Misako. Nya was a step behind her, looking over to me as well.

Misako smiled and moved closer. “Do you need a moment?” she said softly.

I shook my head, trying to keep my composure. “No. I-I’ll be fine. Don’t worry, for sure it’ll pass.”

She stayed silent, eyes flickering all over my face. I swallowed, feeling that pressure as her usual soft eyes sharpened. After a few moments, she sighed and took my hand. That caught me off guard, but I let her guide us to the side.

Nya had now noticed, making eye contact with Misako as she nodded and stepped aside with us. Pixal seemed to have noticed our stop as well; her eyes swirling into a shade of blue as if doing a quick scan of us. Her attention stayed a beat longer on me before she came and stopped alongside us.

When Master Wu was going up the steps, Misako and him locked eyes. His eyes trailed over us girls before settling to Misako again. It looked like they were having a silent conversation with one another. When she gave a firm nod, Master Wu let out a hum and continued on.

Lloyd came up next, trailing just behind his uncle. He halted when he noticed us, and turned to his mother with a questioning look. Misako just smiled and urged him on with the nudge of her head. He inspected us, a sign of worry in them. But, just like Master Wu, he continued up the stairs—though, now, he slowed down his pace.

Misako began to climb up again, and we followed. It was quiet for a moment, then she said,  “You’re like Lloyd.”

I blinked, surprised by her words. “Sorry?”

She grinned. “You’re like him. He tends to hide his own nervousness on dire situations. It became part of his habit after years of being the Green Ninja.”

I wasn’t expecting her to start the conversation like that.

Her attention went straight to Lloyd, waves slowing down a little, accompanied with a tiny smile as it wrinkled the corners of her eyes. “I remembered the first time he saw me,” she muttered. “He had already grown up. He was still new to being a Ninja, and he was upset when he saw me. I can’t blame him. I wasn’t there when he needed me, and I left him on his own when he was just young. Until now, I regret doing it rather than just taking him with me.”

Her waves shifted a little, a tinge of blue appearing up on her silver ones as her eyes flickered all over Lloyd. I followed her gaze, only seeing him unaware of our conversation and focused on ahead. I glanced back at Misako, who was blinking rapidly as her attention broke away from him and sniffed. An ache surfaced up my chest, and I had the urge to put a hand on her arm to comfort her or hug her.

She readjusted her glasses, sighing then took deep breath in that her waves settled again. “He was so much more open back then. Very expressional with his emotions that you don’t even need to guess what he was feeling. When he’s upset, he makes this face,” Misako made a pouted expression, brows furrowed that it looked comical.

I couldn’t help but laugh softly seeing that expression, the tightness in my chest lifting a little. Both from Misako’s current story and meeting Uncle Hakuchi. The other two chuckled as well.

“Oh, I remember that,” Nya said, nudging my shoulder with a smirk. “He was always so childish back then. It even felt like we were babysitting him instead of trying to teach him to be like one of us and being the prophesied ‘Green Ninja.’ I wasn’t the Master of Water back then. But I was Samurai X. Former one before Pix took it.”

“I do not recall this event. I presume I had been absent and not yet have joined them when these moments had occured,” Pixal offered a smile.

Misako let out a sigh, continuing, “I miss that part of him. My sweet, little Lloyd,” she looked at him again. “But he’s all grown up now, and he’s been keeping to himself. I miss how he was open with me, but lately… I’ve noticed him taking everything. Every single problem that comes our way, he takes it and stack it with the rest even though how much it’s already burdening him.”

She turned her gaze at me, her expression slightly serious but with a hint of warmth in them. “So, Sato, don’t ever hesitate to show some emotions. You may always speak to me when something is too much for you to handle. You can always take me somewhere private, we can have some tea, and I will listen.”

Nya nodded, resting a hand on my shoulder. With a softer tone than her usual ones, she added, “And if you need someone who knows what’s it like to be thrown into all this craaazy stuff, and how to handle people similar to these idiots—” she narrowed her eyes at the boys before they settled on me again “—I’m here too.” A smirk curved up her lips. “I don’t even care if you’re crying or you just wanna talk. I’ll be there to listen to ya.”

Pixal nodded, even though being a nindroid, she offered a smile over to me that calmed my heavy heart more. “Agreed. I may not have the same emotional capacity as all of you, as well as empathy.” She paused, resting her hand on her chest as we locked eyes. “But, with Zane’s heart, I believe even a small amount is enough. I will try my best to be there for you as well. May it be logical or you simply need someone to sit with you in silence. I will do both.”

The worry that had been nudging me the whole time was replaced with a sense of warmth from their offers, grateful for their presence and their welcomeness that I found rare these days.

I smiled at each of them, saying, “Thank you, Misako-san. Nya-san. Pixal-san.”

“Don’t be so formal with me,” Misako laughed, shaking her head. “Such a sweet child.”

Nya groaned, wrapping her arm around my shoulders and pulling me close to her as she leaned her head on my shoulder. “Augh! Stop that. It makes sound old. Yuck!”

“Please, simply call me Pixal. I prefer it better rather than the other. We are all friends here,” Pixal grinned.

I couldn’t keep myself from chuckling, nodding as we picked up our pace. “I’ll keep it in mind.”

Nya patted my shoulder for that, nodding as if proud of my decision. She kept her arm around my shoulders as we continued up. She reminded me a little of Yuna. From her tough personality to her tiny smiles and confident smirks. Yet, always the one with that sisterly vibe that she would march right up at the person who upset you and give you a piece of her mind without any shame.

I really missed my girls, and I hoped they were all safe and sound.

Lloyd stopped five steps ahead of us, turning around, and smiled. “So, I would guess that it’s girl talk?”

Misako nodded while Nya gave him a look. “Sorry, Lloyd, can’t tell you or the guys. All of it stays with us ladies.”

He chuckled, shaking his head. “Alright, fine, I’ll leave you guys to your little secret.”

I laughed, Misako winking at me as we came up to the last few steps of the estate. Miho stood there, waiting for us. When we all stopped, she faced the gates and raised her hand to knock—but, before her fist even connected with the wood, a gust of wind passed by us and pushed the wooden gates open. I clutched Shikisha tighter, securing it close to me with one hand; the other, I pushed my hair back to not block my view.

“What the?” Kai said underneath the sudden gust.

As it creaked open, the grand estate finally showed itself and past its walls. I stared at its grandeur up close, making my breath hitch at its wonder. Beautiful and elegant with a powerful presence that would make you truly gawk at it. Right in the middle of the teien, on the path leading to the entrance of the estate, was a man.

Only now as the wind began to stop, did I hear the tunes coming from the man as my ears twitched. I squinted my eyes, seeing the shakuhachi in his hands as he played the song with ease. My lips parted, the melody serene and gentle that I felt my body relax; the notes guiding the wind to follow its tempo as if ordering the element to settle.

He had so much control, and with such ease.

As I focused more, just like the shamisen, the shakuhachi that he possessed was nothing like any other design of that instrument. The bamboo wasn’t the usual light shade, but a darker, polished one—I even almost mistook that it was made out of the same dark wood that the shamisen was made of. The mouthpiece curved back just enough to fit his lips, as if saying that it was meant to be his and his only. Some natural grooves were on its body, the swirls and knots the spitting image of the wind element’s patterns.

The moment the song ended, all had gone silent and still. He pulled the shakuhachi away from his lips. Soon, he opened his eyes, and it settled instantly right at us.

And that, I knew, standing in front of us was Uncle Hakuchi himself.

“You have all finally arrived,” he said, his words slightly breathy that it passed by like a gentle breeze.

I stared, inspecting him. His cheekbones were high, posture straight as he just held on to the shakuhachi. His hair the similar color of his estate with a strike of white following back to his ponytail. His eyes were a striking yellow that were in slits just like whenever Miho uses her Kitsune abilities. They slowly shifted back to a light brown, sharp and almost strict eyes assessing all of us.

My attention shifted downwards when I noticed some movements behind him, spotting his nine tails peeking out. His fur were a charcoal shade, contrasting with mine’s silver-white and Miho’s whiteness.

But, even so, the air that surrounded him was different—and I kept noticing how the wind’s waves kept circling around him. It almost acted like a barrier, always ready to protect and follow his commands.

“Hakuchi-dono,” Miho went to her knees, bowing low.

We copied her, almost as quickly as she did. There was no doubt everyone felt his high and heavy presence as well.

“Shūei Miho, it is good to see you again,” he said, a small smile on his face; but I noted how it didn’t quite reach his eyes.

His attention swept over to me.

I bowed lower, suddenly aware of my bad posture and the need to make myself look presentable in front of my uncle.

“And the daughter of my sister, Senritsu.” He walked to our direction, gesturing for all of us to stand.

We instantly did as he commanded.

His attention stuck to me, narrowed slightly. “You have Natsumi-nē’s eyes, but you have Ichiro-san’s features. A perfect mix of both the Shōgun and Mother. A powerful combination.” He assessed the others, but I noticed his gaze lingering a bit longer on Lloyd.

Lloyd, on the other hand, stood as tense as the rest of us with his hands placed on each side of his body. Shoulders back while he kept eye contact without wavering. “Lord Hakuchi,” he said in a polite tone, “an honor meeting you, sir.”

“Lloyd Garmadon,” Uncle Hakuchi began, taking a closer step to him that he was in his personal space. A bit too close. “The Green Ninja and the leader of this little group. A boy with the Oni blood coursing through his veins.”

I noticed a small twitch from Lloyd’s fingers, and his waves shifted a little almost uncomfortable. “You know me?”

“The wind speaks of everything that commences here in Shijima to me, hence that is why I set my estate close to the Four Regions.” Uncle Hakuchi stepped back, giving Lloyd some space who I saw released a silent breath he had been holding. His gaze flickered down somewhere on Lloyd. “That vial… it came from Goryounin Sanyu of Byakko Village, yes?”

Lloyd’s hand quickly touched the vial, almost protectively and on instinct.  “Yes, sir.”

He nodded. “She has done her job well, hiding your true self. You and your uncle.”

Lloyd just bowed. Everyone glanced at one another before focusing on Uncle Hakuchi again. He sure was… interesting.

He began to pace around the other Ninja, his eyes narrowed, turning more prominent after each one had been inspected. He took out his shakuhachi again, patting it on the palm of his hand as he kept circling us. The others were tense, their waves in knots as they stood their ground.

“Lord Hakuchi—” Miho began.

He held up his hand. “This will not do. You all have been traversing through Shijima with all your emotions up high and exposed,” he said, voice booming in the garden. He suddenly turned to me. “Including you, Senritsu.”

I tensed at his sudden attention, not expecting it.

“It is a wise decision for you to bring them here, Shūei. They can not keep lingering like a group of pups in a forest filled with prying predators.” His eyes stayed on me, turning more grim with each passing word. “Your mother would not be happy with you not having control over your powers, Senritsu.

“You are the Hime. The next in line. The one who bears your mother’s and the Shōgun’s name. The one who is purposed to play that shamisen. And you do not even know how to use it properly. What even have you done with it?”

“I… I have…” I began, but stammered that I could barely think of a reply. The air shifted a little and I held my breath, afraid that he will be able to read me through the wind.

“Senritsu, your emotions are showing. I can read it as easily as a cloudless sky.”

That only made me more tense, my breathing turning shorter. Miho stood her ground, giving me a look almost urging me to continue. But I saw that gentle look on her eyes, flickering from him to me. I tried to speak again, but nothing would come out. Uncle Hakuchi was about to speak again when Lloyd spoke first.

“She was able to manipulate an emotion through a tune, Hakuchi-san.”

His attention snapped at him and said gravely, “Elaborate.”

“Last night, we ran into each other. I couldn’t sleep and she noticed… my waves. She played a tune and I was able to relax. She was also able to restore my energy back when we were still in Ninjago.”

There was a silence, his eyes flickering from me to Lloyd then back. “Hm.”

Uncle Hakuchi turned away, tapping his instrument on his palm a bit faster as if deep in thought.

I glanced at Lloyd; we made eye contact. I mouthed a thank you and he just nodded, giving his own gentle smile.

After a short pause, Uncle Hakuchi said, “You are learning. Iine.” He faced us again, a smile now on his face as if his earlier outburst never happened. “You all have traveled far, and I can see all of your waves fatigued. You may all rest for today. Our training will start tomorrow, immediately. I shall tell the attendants to ready a warm meal for you all, and rooms for each one.”

We all just stood there, no words coming out as we all just stared at him.

He gave us a nod. “Make yourselves at home.” He turned and headed for the estate.

The moment he disappeared inside, we all released a breath out—even Miho did it—as the wind settled a little based on the waves.

Miho walked closer to me, putting a hand on my shoulder. Gentle and not heavy like her usual. “He… is not normally like this. I apologize, Senritsu. It might be the war taking a toll on him.”

I simply nodded. Maybe.

“We should get going. Tomorrow will be another day,” Miho went forward, the others following.

My grip on Shikisha’s strap tightened as I stared at the estate, swallowing. I began to wrap my tails around myself, seeking its familiar warmth whenever I did do it. But I went against it when I felt the air shift, almost as if telling me that I was forbidden to do so. I forced the warm comfort of my tails away, shook my head, and trailed behind the others.

Chapter Text

Chapter 20

The Will of Elements

Uncle Hakuchi didn’t join us for dinner the night before. The attendants said that he needed a moment as he planned for our training today. We understood his reason, to which we left him alone to do so while we had a warm meal together.

During that dinner, I noted how tense Lloyd had been whenever an attendant came by. It was as if he was expecting a row of insults or unwelcoming stares like he had in Byakko Village. Because of that, he had hunched a bit further into himself. He might’ve tried to hide it, but it was written all over his face; and since I was able to read his waves—I knew for a fact the attendants could too.

But none of them said a word. They just smiled at all of us and treated us as guests. Miho and I, though, were given extra care for being who we were—constantly being hovered over and pouring tea into my cup when it was already halfway empty then they ask if I wanted something else. When I replied nothing, they just bowed and stepped back.

I was just glad there was no tension happening, especially now that it confirmed more that the elixir Sanyu made had truly worked. Master Wu and Misako seemed to have taken notice of it as well, that none of the Kitsune were being hostile or cautious of them. They appeared to be more at ease due to it that their waves had settled into a more normal heartbeat-like pattern.

And, as of currently (after breakfast that was delivered to my room, and a quick bath), I just sat on the futon in my room. My fingers caressed the strings of the shamisen as I stared deeply at it.

Uncle Hakuchi’s words from yesterday echoed in my mind, wondering if Mom was truly displeased with me for not being able to control my emotions and hide my waves.

It did made us easy targets, Sanyu said it herself. Genshiro had denied us entry even though he usually listened to Miho just because of it. It could’ve gotten worse when he noticed Lloyd and Master Wu were with us, to the point he fought back without being worried.

There was so much for me to learn. So much to control, just like how Uncle Hakuchi was able to control the wind so easily as if it chose him to be their companion.

That was what I needed. After all, I was next in line and the only one who can fully play Shikisha.

A knock made me break out of my thoughts, the door sliding open as a Jijo bowed at me. “Hime-sama, Hukichi-dono is asking all of you to come to the garden.”

I nodded, standing without letting another second pass. I took my instrument and followed her without a word. We passed through some halls, the inside mostly limited with its decorations to traditional Japanese furnitures.

Most of the paintings were different sceneries all over Shijima, showing a variety of them on this specific hall. But, as we got further, there was one that caught my interest. It was a painting of four children who were playing four specific instruments, while a man on a throne listened with a gentle expression on his face.

I recognized the instruments: a taiko, a koto, a shakuhachi, and a shamisen.

The next few scrolls focused on only one, a boy being handed a shakuhachi by the man on the throne from the earlier painting. Then, the next, he was atop a mountain playing a tune with black ink of swirls surrounding him. It twirled around him like the wind, and the background were the similar structure of the map of the Four Regions.

The scrolls halted as the jijo opened the sliding door, she bowed and stepped aside. I offered a thank you, stepping into the engawa, only to find the others already there with an unoccupied zabuton between Miho and Lloyd.

I sat there, putting the shamisen on the space beside me as I sat up straight. I glanced at Miho, only to notice she had her eyes closed, posture upright as she seemed to be meditating. I glanced at Lloyd who was doing the same. His face were relaxed, breath even. His waves indicated that he was focused, undisturbed, and at peace.

As I leaned slightly forward, I noted that the others were just staring ahead.

Cole was fixing his gi, Jay’s eyes kept flickering around the scenery, Kai’s posture hunched forward and tapping his leg, Nya seemed to be trying to meditate as well but her waves showed some difficulties.

Though, I did spot Zane looking as if he was doing just fine with the moment. Going along with the flow. I spotted Pixal beside him, then Master Wu and Misako, but I couldn’t see properly what they were doing as the others blocked them from my sights.

“Did you sleep well?” Lloyd whispered, making me instantly look at him.

His eyes were still closed, but the gentle movement of his waves moved a bit faster as if his mind shifted focus.

I sat back. “Yes. Did you?”

He nodded. “The meal helped, and the good bed. Are you still feeling nervous or are you feeling better?”

I was about to speak when Miho shushed us, making me straighten my back.

“Where is he?” I heard Jay said in a hushed whisper.

“Probably doing something,” Cole replied.

“I’ve been waiting for ten minutes straight and he hadn’t even showed up yet,” Kai said through gritted teeth.

I raised a brow. “You guys have been here for that long?”

“Correction, we have been waiting in different times. Some of us has been waiting for a bit longer,” Zane joined in, opening his eyes. “I have been here for about an hour already. I believe Master Wu has been here longer, then Lloyd. Their heat signatures reads a bit lower in temperature than the rest of us. When Pixal and I arrived, he and Lloyd were already meditating.”

“I guesstimated that they have been out before sunrise,” Pixal added.

“We’ve been called here separately?” Jay looked from Master Wu to Lloyd. “That girl said he called for all of us.”

“Didn’t say all at once,” Nya interjected, sighing deeply as she opened her eyes. “This isn’t working.”

“Am I last?”

“Satomi is last to be called,” Pixal corrected.

“Yeah, but it’s not helping why he’s still not here! Why even call us if he’s not gonna show up and make us wait?” Kai said, his waves shifting into sharper ones.

Miho sighed beside me, but her composure didn’t changed.

“I hate meditating. It feels like we’re wasting fucking time,” he muttered.

“Kai, control your temper,” Master Wu finally joined. “We are here to learn.”

“I know, Sensei, but there’s a war happening out there. We’re supposed to be taking care of it. Not waste more time like we’ve already had by staying in one place. Why not just get straight to the point?”

A tune suddenly began to play, making everyone shift and look around. I straightened up, my ears twitching in all directions as I tried to follow its source. Where was that coming from?

I kept trying, looking behind, up the trees, through the make-shift hills of the garden, but nothing. It was difficult to distinguish as it seemed to be all around us.

“Your sensei is correct, Master of Fire.”

A gust of wind made me close my eyes, raising a hand to block it as everyone does the same. When I looked back in front, I stared in shock. Uncle Hakuchi was already there, sitting on his own zabuton as if he had been there all this time.

He kept playing his shakuhachi, the song slowly coming to a stop as the wind followed suit. He held the last note a bit longer before pulling the instrument away from him.

He smiled at us, that smile he always does without it touching his eyes. “You must control your temper.”

Everyone stared at him. Lloyd, as well, now had his eyes open. There was that similar spark of quietness in his gaze, the one he has during our guitar lessons after class. It was the look that indicated he was ready to learn, and waited for instructions.

I shifted back to Uncle Hakuchi.

“Fire has two purpose, to give warmth or consume everything around it,” Uncle Hakuchi began, twirling his shakuhachi and staring at it. “That decision rests on which one he or she chooses.”

A shift caught from the corner of my eye, spotting Kai’s frown deepening and waves turning to a slight crimson color. “I know that. I learned that way back when I was just starting.”

Uncle Hakuchi’s attention eyes suddenly snapped at him. Kai shifted on his seat. “Sekai. Your sensei has taught you that indeed. But this is Shijima, not Ninjago.” He gestured at each of us, using his shakuhachi to address each one and said, “It is not up to you to just simply command the elements here. It is them.”

“What do you mean them?” Nya blinked and stared. “You mean we can’t just control the elements?”

“Control is part of it, but Shijima’s elements are known to seek more than just commands. It seeks connection with its user. Harmony. It is the very essence of Shijima and how our Father created this realm. By having that connection with them.”

Uncle Hakuchi rested his hands on his lap. “You Ninja have felt the difficulty of manipulating your elements on your first day, yes?”

Everyone looked at one another.

Lloyd nodded. “Yes. It felt… denser somehow. Like it didn’t want to do what we wished it to do.”

“That is what I meant. You all have been trained to simply command them, but not listen and connect with them.” Hakuchi stood, pacing back and forth. “Us, Kitsune, are born to read them like music. That is why it is far easier for us to learn them than you humans. We are built to see them and observe how they move and react.” He turned to Lloyd again and gestured to me. “You said Senritsu was able to calm you with her music?”

“Yes, sir.”

“To be able to perform that to one’s emotion is no simple task. She may be born to a royal Kitsune—it runs in our blood to be able to read the elements far more precise than any other—but the process of being able to shift your emotion is far more complex.”

He paused, almost like giving us a moment to process it before continuing, “She had to listen. See the different waves of those chosen elements that made her feel that calmness. As a result, she connects with those elements and makes music out of them, and convinces them. In the process of you hearing it, the effect that those elements had on her was influenced on you as well.”

I glanced down the shamisen, feeling the polished wood. So, that was how it was done. Was that why Mika kept feeling like that whenever I composed a song? It might’ve not been Shikisha, but I might’ve been using it without me even knowing it. Just like Lloyd had said that night in Byakko Village, maybe I’d been doing it without even realizing it.

“If that is the case,” Zane began, “what is the difference of the elements of Ninjago from Shijima?”

Uncle Hakuchi turned to him now. “I have already explained Shijima’s elements. Ninjago, on the other hand, are far more kinder and perhaps had the influence of the First Spinjitzu Master. He, himself, even noticed the change with his power when he had tried to command the elements here. The elements finds their owners in Ninjago, and are passed down to their offspring.”

“Isn’t that just another way of saying that the elements chose us because we would connect well with them?” Cole arched a brow.

“Or perhaps believed as you are born to that specific Master of Element that they knew you would have that power to will it.” Uncle Hakuchi tapped his shakuhachi on his palm. “The First Spinjitzu Master created Ninjago and made a promise to protect the realms and everyone who needed help. In that case, Ninjago’s elements wishes the same as he wished it. The elements listened to his wishes. Now it applies to you, Elemental Masters.”

His tapping stopped and turned to us all again. “In summary, Shijima is stubborn. Our father had let the elements become more sentient and have their own piece of mind. Ninjago is far more lenient who focuses on the basics of connection and control.”

Lloyd looked like he was deep in thought. And after a moment of pause, he muttered, “Is that how that Kitsune was able to break my barrier?”

Uncle Hakuchi’s attention snapped at him. “‘Kitsune?’”

“Are you speaking of Ginko Isamu, Lloyd?” Miho said, glancing at him from the corner of her eyes.

At the mention of him, my thoughts drifted back at the museum’s incident; remembering the time when Lloyd tried to protect me and the shamisen against such formidable fighters like Isamu and Aoki. I felt guilty for still not doing much, just standing there dazed and clutching Shikisha close to me like an anchor.

“Isamu?”

My ear twitched at the whisper, looking at Uncle Hakuchi who seemed to have a small frown on his face. I guess he recognized the name as well.

Lloyd nodded at Miho. “It was the first time anyone was able to break through my barrier like that. Just by using that blue flame. I even lost my energy and I can’t even stand up. If it wasn’t for Satomi…”

My gaze softened as I looked at Lloyd. He still didn’t blame me for just standing there.

“That blue flame you speak of is Kitsunebi,” Uncle Hakuchi followed. “Usually it does not have much effect on humans. They are a specialty of every Kitsune with fire. But there are two explanations how he bested you.”

Lloyd sat straighter, seeming to listen carefully as if he had been searching for an explanation all this time.

Uncle Hakuchi held up a finger. “First, he was able to see the weakness of your element. Like I have discussed, we Kitsune have better control on the elements—hence traveling to Ninjago would result for the elements easier for us to control, and make it far more powerful than yours with our connections with them. Ninjago’s elements are easier to read. Your openings were there and, for certain, he was able to read your emotional waves, predict what you might do next, and why your element is unable to fight back with his prowess.”

He held up a second finger. “Second, Kitsunebi are meant to weaken an Oni. In other words, using it to one would result to pure exhaustion, draining one’s energy to full. But experienced Oni are able to counter it. Humans are not affected by this nor would it burn them like a normal fire does.”

There was a shift in Lloyd’s waves, making him frown and look down. His fists clenched as he released a heavy breath out through his nose.

Worry gripped my chest at his reaction, noticing how his hands shook a little. I wanted to call out his name. Say something. Even just a single word to maybe stabilize him again. But I left him be, not wanting to worsen it by saying the wrong thing. He doesn’t seem to be taking it well already.

I turned back to Uncle Hakuchi. “What about the emotional waves?”

Uncle Hakuchi took a step closer to my spot, his gaze piercing. “That, Senritsu, is what we Kitsune specialize in. It is our truest power.”

I tilted my head a little, confused by his emphasis. I glanced at Miho, but she remained silent, her composure unwavering.

“You see, these Ninja—” he gestured broadly towards them, “—can control and command elements, but they are often limited to one. We, Kitsune, are different. We are able to manipulate all elements, but only if we are able to convince them to listen to us through our songs—the harmonies that we create. May it be voice or instruments.”

He then sat in front of me, making me straighten my back at the sudden, intense focus. “Beyond elements, we also manipulate emotions. Your calming of the Green Ninja was a perfect example. And, from what I have learned from him, you even managed to restore his energy when he was in a dire need of it.”

I nodded, keeping silent as every moment of that time replayed inside my head like it was happening all over again in front of me.

“That, niece, is because you were able to read his emotional waves. You discerned the fatigue, the fear, the specific ‘dissonance’ within them. You saw it and read it, and you knew what was needed. Your wish to rejuvenate him, coupled with the tune you intuitively derived from those very waves, created a new harmony within him. You already know, as I do, what his usual waves are: green, gentle, with a hint of authority and hidden strength.”

Lloyd looked at us as if snapping out of his daze from Uncle Hakuchi’s direct focus on his waves. I glanced as well, noting them again. But there was something slightly different from them. Trouble? Concern?

“Everyone is different. Learn to read it, truly know it, and you will be able to restore one’s broken waves to how it was meant to be.” He looked at Miho, a knowing glance passing between them. “You have told her that Natsumi-chan commanded a whole armies’ energy and heightened their power?”

“Hai, Hakuchi-dono,” Miho said, her voice polite.

Uncle Hakuchi nodded, turning his attention fully back to me. “So, you understand the power that your mother and that shamisen hold?”

I nodded. “She played for days during the Oni Invasion. Connecting everyone’s emotional waves, playing a single song that affected all of them. They fought for days without getting tired.”

He nodded, a rare hint of admiration passing through his eyes. “Natsumi-chan was powerful. Incredibly so. But, like the Ninja, the instruments also have their own specific focus. Kasumi—the name of my shakuhachi—for instance, has the mastery in the wind element.

“It is a gift from our father. He believed I had the affinity for the wind and listen to Shijima’s calls. This instrument allows me to listen and send messages from afar all across our home.”

He stood again, turning his back with his hands intertwined behind him, gazing at the tsukiyama garden.

“So, the shamisen focuses on the manipulation of people’s emotional waves?” I ventured, trying to make sense of it all.

Uncle Hakuchi turned to me and said, “Almost. Each of the instruments gifted to us by Father was imbued with a portion of his own vast power to keep the Harmony of Shijima intact. Natsumi-chan, being the eldest, possessed the greatest affinity for the pure essence of Harmony. She received the shamisen, where the largest portion of his power and influence over emotional and elemental waves resides. It is almost what holds Shijima together.”

A silence came in the garden as we all listened to him. No one dared to speak as Uncle Hakuchi took a step closer.

His voice dropped slightly, becoming more compelling. “In other words, because the shamisen channels this fundamental aspect of our father’s power, your ability to convince the elements to listen to you are far greater than for me or my siblings with our instruments.

“You possess the core ability to give an immense advantage to a group of fighters with ease, heightening their abilities, their powers, and their energy by directly influencing their very essence through your music. You do not just calm people, Senritsu, you orchestrate. You direct the mood of the story.”

I stared at him in shock, lips parting as we stared at one another. Once again, that feeling of expectations came into my shoulders. As I looked down at the Shikisha, a tinge of fear took hold of me. Fear and pressure of who I had to be.

They expected me to use this powerful weapon? Learn everything of it? I curled my tails around my arm, trying to seek some kind of assurance even a little bit. Unlike Kasumi who was easier to use, just the wind and whatever else it could do.

“But those are not easy tasks to do. They will drain you immensely, and you do not know how to perform them yet.” He went over to where his zabuton was placed again.

“That was a lot,” I heard Jay, his voice weak.

“Too much,” Cole muttered. “Man, I could feel my head spinning.”

“Same.”

Uncle Hakuchi hummed, I could still feel his attention on me as he paced around. “That is quite enough information of how our powers work, and how yours does not, Ninja.”

From his shadow, I saw him face them again. “Now, it is time for all of us to focus on how you all can connect with them. So, we may stop your emotional waves from flapping around like a bird not knowing how to navigate the air.”

Chapter Text

Chapter 21

管理

Kanri

Most of Lord Hakuchi’s words mushed together after what has been revealed. The breeze was cold, raising gooseflesh on my skin—partly from it, partly from the revelation.

Foxfire could make an Oni weak.

The truth had slammed into my mind, echoing inside like it was mocking me again and again. His voice drowned away, words turning static. I tried to snap myself back into focus on whatever he was explaining to Satomi, especially when I heard my name, but I kept spiraling back to it.

Weak.

How easy I can be rendered useless from just that fire.

A fire.

The vulnerability gnawed at me, not expecting something like that to stop an Oni. But he did say that some were able to resist it or something.

How did they do it? Did they evolve over time? Were they able to find a way how to so they wouldn’t be affected by it? A spell or object similar to how they were able to detect the Kitsune when they learned they could do that to them?

My nails dug onto my palm, barely feeling it as I stared down at them. I needed those answers. Needed them so that I didn’t had to worry about something like kitsunebi being such a huge problem to me. So that I could keep my focus on keeping the others safe without getting myself in the way.

I was only finally dragged back to the present again when I heard: “—your emotional waves flap around like a bird not knowing how to navigate the air.”

My attention turned back to Lord Hakuchi, knowing that it was time to move on and concentrate on the main training. Maybe this would help—no, this had to help me. I couldn’t let my emotions keep taking over me like this.

The beginning of his lesson mostly revolved on all of us needing to find the center of ourselves. It was similar to how Uncle taught us when it came to finding our inner peace whenever we meditated back in the monastery.

Lord Hakuchi explained that to “block” our emotional waves, and not let them be freely seen by other Kitsune, we had to confront our own emotions. Contain, but not fully suppress it.

“Make the surge of the waves to a gentle flow of a river. The earth’s quakes to a full stillness…” he began, our eyes closed as we listened to his slow and breathy tone. “It is similar to how you fuel your elements with your emotions, but this… you must do the opposite. You must control to be able to gain balance.”

The tension in my body began to evaporate, the beating of my heart more in tune as I focused on my emotions. The constant nagging of my thoughts slowly lulled away, letting my worries about what I had to do today and the stacked obligations that constantly run inside just come into a full stillness.

Especially blocking that.

It.

“There will be dozens of emotions you will feel all at once,” Hakuchi continued. “You all may not notice it, but in my eyes I can see all of your waves in full bloom. You are all letting it out as you all relax, but then… you must create a ‘barrier’ so that your emotions will only be yours to read and feel.”

Another silence, almost as if he was taking a moment to survey us. “To be able to control your elements here in Shijima, you must learn the tranquility of it first.”

His clothes ruffled, presumably him shifting, but I wasn’t entirely sure what he did as all I saw was darkness. “Senritsu, yours are much more complicated as we Kitsune feel all. You must bring everything to a symmetry. Do not let your emotions just sing. Just like the time you have calmed the Master of Energy, feel that serenity once more, and use that to guide your emotional waves to come together.”

Right, her music. The time when we had a moment just us two that night in Byakko Village. My thoughts went to it, trying to imagine that gentle yet whimsical tune again as I remembered it. It took a while before it began to resurface again, hearing the ghost of those notes that I let out a huge yet silent breath.

It was the only time everything didn’t matter. That everything inside me had stilled and came together that it made sense to me for once in the last few years.

No worries. No war. No people seeking me out to save them or people giving judgmental looks.

The Oni inside me felt as if it had been locked away that… I felt relieved. My muscles eased, shoulders sagging as I kept my thoughts focused to that sound that everything around me started to come together.

The tweet of a bird, the rippling of water somewhere in the garden, a gentle breeze that ruffled my hair…

“Good, Master of Energy, your waves are beginning to come together,” Hakuchi said, but it was mostly like a background noise to me. “But there is still something troubling you.”

Those words broke me off a little from my concentration, swallowing at how he said it. How it almost seemed like he knew what it was. And I didn’t like it.

“In order to fully embrace this technique, you must confront all.”

My heartbeat picked up, pounding against my chest that it hurt a little. It slowly began build, to the point the air in my lungs began to deplete than it normal was.

Confront all.

All.

It.

Why did he had to say that? Why did he had to remind me?

My breath began to quicken, the idea of confronting that. Confronting that darkness inside me.

Every instinct screamed to bury it deeper, lock it away.

Forget about it.

Focus on what was happening now.

I tried doing so—tried to only focus on the song.

But Lord Hakuchi’s word kept repeating and repeating and repeating.

Confront.

Confront.

Confront it.

Let it OUT!

I felt a sudden wave of emotions clash over me. The peace I felt earlier bursted away. I gasped a bit too loudly, eyes snapping open and hunching forward as I supported myself on my knees.

My hand flew to my chest, clutching my gi as I tried to calm down. Sweat trailed down my forehead, breath shaking.

“Lloyd?” A whisper from beside, causing me to look at my right where mine and Satomi’s eyes made contact.

She had that look. That same one she had that night.

I swallowed, clenching my jaws as I shook my head.

Once, then twice. Slow, subtle. But I knew she saw it.

I can’t do it. Sato, I can’t do it.

She reached a hand, but Miho stopped her and pulled her back up.

“Focus,” I heard Miho whisper to her.

Satomi hesitated, looking from Miho to me. We stared at one another, noting how her tails curled around her as Miho gave her another tug. She just nodded after, giving me one last glance almost in apology before going back to her meditation.

I glanced over to Miho, but she wasn’t looking at us anymore and kept her focus on Satomi.

Why? Why?

“Lloyd Garmadon, control your emotions,” I heard Hakuchi, his voice with a hint of command in it than it was earlier.

“I’m sorry,” I said, still heaving but forced myself to sit upright again.

From the corner of my eye, I saw the others peeking. Nya having a worried expression as well as Mom who was silently asking me what was wrong. I just raised a hand, hoping they would take it as an answer that I was fine. The girls seemed to have taken it, though reluctant. But Kai…

His eyes flickered up and down at me, slightly narrowed before turning to look back at Lord Hakuchi; eyes sharper than before. I hope he doesn’t do anything.

I placed a hand on my chest one more time, trying to remind myself to relax. I felt that small crumple inside my gi. The letter.

I closed my eyes, taking a deep breath as I began to settle down again.

Lord Hakuchi let out a sigh, his voice steady once more and dropping a little to almost a whisper. “No need to apologize. A valuable lesson, wouldn’t you agree? Fear, untamed, can be the most formidable opponent… or the most exploitable weakness. Do you not agree, Garmadon?”

I tensed at his use of ‘Garmadon,’ hitting too close to home as I thought of Dad. “Yes, Hakuchi-dono,” I said, shame taking a hold of me.

“Letting your emotions burst like that would lead to dire consequences. It would cause the mind to blur, panic, to the point you can not even think straight and you will start making foolish decisions.” He paused, making me swallow. “Sometimes, fear is not just what one might target… love can also be one weakness.”

My body froze, a chill running down my spine. When I opened my eyes, Lord Hakuchi was directly looking at me almost as if reading my very soul.

“How one can use affection so easily, manipulating one’s feelings to do what they wish and how they wish it without even realizing their full intention,” he continued, his voice the only thing focused in my head. “How curious it is, Garmadon, how easily you let it coil around you.”

Flashes of memories passed through my head, almost too pictorial that I felt like gagging. Those moments back in the palace in Ninjago. The time we had been called to protect the Jade Family. The time when I first saw her, and how butterflies fluttered in my stomach.

The time we had in that bridge…

The time we had gotten close in the Bounty…

I began to shake, feeling the lump in my throat wanting to come out. He didn’t had to say that. He didn’t had to resurface memories like that. How I had let my guard down.

I don’t want her inside my head!

I forced it back down and muttered, “How?”

Hakuchi’s gaze didn’t waver. “The wind, young Garmadon,” he said in a whisper but the wind brushed past me as if wanting me hear his words. “It knows many things within a realm. From one’s fears to one’s stories wanted forgotten. It tells me those stories as it is my duty to listen.”

A shift from my left made me peek that way. Kai now had a scowl on his face, his hands now in fists that were clutched tight. Veins were basically visible on the back of his hands that I feared they might pop. From the way he was holding his breath and the tension in his shoulders, he had pieced together what was going on in my head. And he was directly staring right at Lord Hakuchi.

With a shaky breath in, I called, “Kai—”

“Hey! You can’t just talk to him like that,” he said, voice rising.

I shook my head, trying to make him stop.

Lord Hakuchi’s gaze smoothly shifted to Kai. There was no anger in his eyes, only a cold, assessing calm that made my stomach clench. It was the kind of look that saw through you, not at you.

He was so difficult to read, was this what he meant being able to control one’s emotions?

“And you, Master of Fire,” his tone was still soft, but it carried an undeniable weight, and I noticed Kai subtly stiffen. “Your anger, it burns with a predictable heat. Fire are meant to give warmth and reassurance, not this absurd outbursts of a child. You desire to protect the ones you love and care, but it blinds you to all else. A true weapon, Master of Fire, does not burn itself out in a moment of misplaced passion. It understands the art of control.”

There was pause as his head tilted a little. “Do you fear that without your anger… you are nothing?”

Kai’s mouth, which had been open to retort, snapped shut. Clenched fists shook as if he was trying to suppress the urge to punch him. To mention his passions as ‘misplaced’ was one of the things we all knew Kai hated to hear.

Hakuchi didn’t wait for a response. His gaze swept over to the others, lingering on each of them a beat too long.

“Master of Lighting,” Hakuchi began. “Your anxiety hums like an overloaded circuit. A constant current of worry. It sings of times when even your greatest inventions felt helpless, did it not? When the very fabric of time of your reality was unwound, and you were forced to confront the dire consequences of your own desires, threatening everything you held dear erased?”

Jay let out a nervous chuckle, eyes flickering around as if searching for a hidden camera. “W-what? I don’t know what you’re talking about.”

His attention snapped to Nya. “Mistress of Water—”

Nya instantly became rigid, sitting upright as she stared ahead as if not daring to look at him or else she would be read.

Why was he doing this to us? This was his training? He could’ve given us a moment longer to get used to it.

“—your currents run deep. A torrent of suppressed doubt, perhaps? For the times you questioned your own strength, feeling like a mere reflection of your brother’s flame, or when the very essence of your element seemed beyond your grasp?”

Kai shifted a little, almost moving closer to Nya who now looked down at her hands on her lap.

I caught Uncle opening his mouth, creases between his brows as his eyes flickered over to us then back to Lord Hakuchi. “Hakuchi-dono, you—”

“Do not interrupt him, Son of the First,” Miho interjected, furrowing her eyes a little. “Hakuchi-dono is simply doing this for the sake of your students.”

“I am aware of that, but—”

That didn’t seem to stop Lord Hakuchi as his attention shifted again. Voice louder that it buried Uncle’s words.

“Master of Earth. Your steadfastness, a mighty mountain. Yet beneath it lies a tremor of self-doubt. The kind that echoes from moments when your form itself felt like a cage.”

Then to Zane.

“And you, Master of Ice. Your mind, a perfect glacier. But even ice holds secrets. The yearning to understand your true self, your origins, or the chilling echo of a past you once lost. A sense of self shattered and rebuilt, leaving an indelible mark on your logic core.”

Pixal glanced at Zane, worry written on her metallic face as she put a hand atop of his. Zane just held her hand back. He tilted his head slightly, his synthetic eyes seeming to be analyzing the impossibility of Hakuchi’s knowledge.

He said nothing, but the silence from him was louder than any outburst.

A profound, heavy silence covered the garden.

No one spoke.

No one dared.

The air shifted to something heavy as all our determination to learn seemed to have just… faded.

Just like that, Hakuchi had read us like the open books we were.

“That is enough for today,” he finally said, his voice returning to its calm, measured tone as he put his instrument back to his obi and began to walk our way. “Ikinasai. Process what you have learned. Process what I have shown you and made you all feel.”

He went pass us, but I didn’t dare look up as I just saw his shadow go by. The sliding door from behind opened, but there was a pause.

“If you can not contain your emotions, if you can not control your impulsiveness, this will not work. Not even how much I wish to help you all. Untamed emotions are not a strength here. They are an open door for your enemies to walk through. Believe me, that is what we Kitsune aim for.”

With that, the door closed, leaving us sitting there exposed and shaken. The tranquil garden suddenly felt like a very dangerous, transparent cage.

And that was our first day.

Chapter Text

Chapter 22

一週目: 波の試練

First Week: Waves' Ordeal

The next two days of our training went by silently, not even Jay dared to speak as Lord Hakuchi continued our lessons with the control over our emotional waves. I took another sip of the elixir a day ago, making sure to hide that part of myself and kept Sanyu’s instructions in mind.

The lessons were the same, but everyone were far more focused than before and more on edge than the first day. Even me, I kept denying myself from letting my posture sag—and whenever I do feel it, I would scold myself; bringing my focus back to the meditation.

Lord Hakuchi resumed with his strict rules and words that cut deep as a means of distraction. Something, he said, that we had to let in from one ear and out to the other as it was one of the techniques to keep our emotions intact.

Blow after blow came, sometimes I shook from his words, but I held on. I even noticed that his words to me hit deeper than the rest of my team. But I believed he did it on purpose as I was the leader, and I had to have more tolerance than the rest.

Uncle and Mom were mostly put to the side. Lord Hakuchi told them that they can listen and learn but he knew that they would find the training easier than us students. Knowing them both, I knew they would. With Uncle’s years of experience and Mom’s incredible knowledge and patience, I agreed in my head with what Lord Hakuchi said about them.

As for Kai, every time Lord Hakuchi dismissed us, it was evident that he wanted to argue with him. Whenever Satomi and Miho had excused themselves as Miho instructs Satomi to rest early, Kai would keep reminding us that we were wasting time with all these lessons and letting the war get worse. I kept repeating, including Uncle—hoping that he would understand—that we needed this if we were going to participate and stop it.

After that time of exposing all of us, my team barely ate. Cole, who mostly enjoyed the cuisine, seemed to lack on the enthusiasm and can’t even finish a bowl of rice.

Every night I laid on my futon, staring at the ceiling as I listened to the ambience of the night. Most of the time, I couldn’t sleep, to the point that I would sit up and pull out the letter inside my gi to re-read it again.

Knowing then, I had to ask.

During the third day, I saw the opportunity to do so. Everyone had left and went back inside that evening. Lord Hakuchi had stayed in his zabuton in the garden while he played a gentle tune in his shakuhachi. I took out the letter, gripping it, hesitant to go forward especially seeing him so focused on his song.

The wind suddenly stopped, then his voice came, “Is there something you need, young Garmadon?”

I tensed before releasing my held breath and walked closer. “I wished to ask you something.”

“Yes?” He opened his eyes, and it instantly directed to the letter in my hand.

I held it up, letting him have a better view. “I wanted to ask if you were the one who sent this? Or maybe you recognized the handwriting?”

He was quiet for a moment. He rested his instrument on his lap and reached a hand. I gave it to him as he opened it and began to read. His eyes flickered left to right, slowly reaching the end. Another silence came, then he folded the letter, put it back inside the envelope, then shook his head as he gave it back.

“I apologize, Master of Energy, but I did not send any kind of letter. Like I have mentioned, I send my words through the wind and my siblings know what it means just by seeing the waves.” He paused, tapping his shakuhachi on his palm. “As for the handwriting, I do not recognize it either. I have indeed seen my fare share of important individuals, but I have never seen this one until now. I apologize, I wish I could have more information for you regarding this letter.”

I sighed in defeat, tucking it back inside my gi. “It’s alright, Hakuchi-dono. Thank you for your help,” I bowed, which he stood and did the same.

I turned and began to head back inside, the coldness of the night not helping as I rubbed the muscles on my neck.

Damn, another dead end.

By the fourth day, everything seemed to start lighting up. We were moved closer to the small waterfalls section of his garden. He explained it was time to take our training further, introducing a host of new distractions. Satomi had flinched when we arrived, causing me to ask her what was wrong.

“Sorry,” she whispered, “the water’s waves here are quite strong. It’s a bit more difficult for me to put down the sounds.”

Miho had noticed it and just gave her advice to focus on just one thing and let the rest fade away. Nya had placed a hand on her shoulder and joked about stopping it from flowing even though we all knew we couldn’t as of now. That seemed to have calmed Satomi down, and that too had released some tension in my body.

At the beginning of the new area, it was tough at first to focus because of how many sounds there were all at once unlike back in the engawa. The wind didn’t help either as Lord Hakuchi began to play his shakuhachi as the wind came in in large gusts. It ruffled my hair, made me shiver, and it even seemed to bring in the scent of flowers and earth to add into the challenge.

But then, I remembered Miho’s words to Satomi, about focusing on one thing. And so, I did just that. I focused on my own breathing.

Over time, my concentration was undisturbed. Lord Hakuchi began to notice our progression, and he began to acknowledge them by saying words of affirmation.

“Good, Master of Lightning, you are beginning to have the handle of it. Your waves are much more harder to read than before. Master of Earth, the quakes have now became a still plain, that is good.”

Those words were a relief. It made me proud of myself and my team that we were able to make progress—letting me know that we had come far from keeping our emotions in place and hidden for the last few days.

But that instantly faded when I heard a frustrated groan from my left.

“Fuck this!”

Without even opening my eyes, I already knew who it was.

Kai.

* * *

The tune and silence of the elements suddenly burst out when I opened my eyes, feeling that immediate heavy shift in the air. Everyone’s waves, which started as calm and imperceptible, blasted right in front of me.

It made me look away at the suddenness of it, too bright and too much all at once. After a moment, I glanced back and only saw Kai’s crimson waves.

He was standing from his spot on the stone, right between Cole and Nya who appeared as surprised as the rest of us at his sudden outburst. His eyes were blazing as he remained in place. His emotional wave a roaring, untamed fire, so potent it singed the very edges of my senses.

It wasn’t just frustration, it was a desperate, angry energy—desperate to do something. And a fire that had been meaning to burst out for the past few days.

I’d noticed it during dinners but stayed silent—today, it finally burst out.

“This is bullshit!” Kai’s voice tore through the rush of the waterfall, raw with impatience and unspoken tension. “We’ve been sitting, closing our eyes like idiots. Listening to whatever the fuck we’re supposed to be listening to. And turning ourselves into statues when we’re supposed to be out there stopping this goddamned war!”

He glared at Uncle Hakuchi, heaving. “Aren’t you even worried that your siblings could be fighting each other to death? That—that this fight over a stupid ass throne is tearing them apart and killing everyone in this realm? Like—how is this waterfall going to help us stop it by ignoring it?”

Uncle Hakuchi stayed silent, his sharp eyes lingering Kai’s stoned stature while he held onto Kasumi, his shakuhachi, that rested on his lap. It wasn’t alertness, he looked calm and undisturbed. Miho had straightened far more than she already has, her tails fanned out as if she was ready to interfere.

Master Wu stood, placing a hand on Kai’s shoulder. “Kai, calm yourself. Sit down. Do not be rude.”

“I’m sorry, Sensei, but you can’t tell me calm down!” Kai barked, shrugging Master Wu’s hand off as his gaze stayed locked on Uncle Hakuchi. “At this point, this dumb teaching is just messing with our heads! My sister—”

“Kai, just stop it!” Nya’s wave surged as well, a worried, turbulent blue clashing against Kai’s raging ones. “He’s trying to help us. This is what he means by ‘control’! He’s messing with our minds on purpose because that’s how our enemies will do it if we don’t have that ‘control’.”

“I’m sorry, Nya,” Jay suddenly joined. His waves jumped, a frantic, static-like yellow. “I have to agree with Kai here. He insulted you, and us, by bringing up something we wanted to forget.”

Nya’s attention snapped at Jay. “You can’t be serious. I thought you’re on my side, Jay.”

“I am! I just don’t like it when someone hurts you like that. I noticed how you looked down. He might have good intentions, but I saw that look. I couldn’t do it.” He took her hands. “You’ve been quiet the past few days. I hate it.”

“Kai’s right,” Cole mumbled, his tone almost defeated. “That was too much. Master Wu never did that to us.” He gestured at Zane. “Go even ask Zane or Pixal! They can scan us and tell us that it’s messing with our heads.”

“Nya,” Zane began, “I do read it. I can see it in my scans—”

“I don’t care about that right now,” Nya shouted, standing up now. “This is what’s going to help us! Help Satomi as well with her powers.”

My eyes shifted beside me when I saw Lloyd’s posture becoming rigid. His eyes were still shut, but his waves were slowly beginning to show up as well. His concentration was breaking, and it wouldn’t last long.

“Well, it wouldn’t help neither of us if this continues on!” Kai said.

“And we won’t learn anything if you don’t listen and keep letting your frustration out on everything!”

“Stop it, all of you!” Lloyd finally shouted, opening his eyes as he heaved. “Sit down, Kai.”

Kai’s attention suddenly snapped to him. “Don’t fucking tell me we’re gonna continue with this, Lloyd.”

A pause before Lloyd looked up at him with a stern look. “We are.”

The moment that was announced, Kai marched out of his place. “Are you fucking with me?!”

“I’m not fucking with you!” Lloyd instantly stood, both of them pushing past their personal space. Kai, being slightly taller, stared down at Lloyd. “We’re going to continue with this. And we are going to finish this. However how long it takes. Your sister is right, this is what’s going to help us fight against those Kitsune and help Sato with her powers.”

“You’re our leader, Lloyd, aren’t you supposed to be looking out for us?”

“That’s exactly what I’m trying to do, but you’re fucking it up right now!”

“How am I doing that when I’m the one looking out for you all?”

“This!” Lloyd gestured up and down at him. “This is what’s messing it up.”

“Motherfucker,” Kai grabbed Lloyd’s collar.

Everyone stood, their voices turning into a painful cacophony that I flinched. My ears began to ring, their emotional waves clashing and vibrating—creating a jarring dissonance that clawed at my head. This was the “disharmony” Uncle Hakuchi had warned about. But to me, it was a literal assault of sound and color.

Misako instantly went to them, trying to separate the two. “Boys, enough of this!”

Kai raised his fist, ready to strike Lloyd who just glared back at him. Nya jumped, grabbing Kai’s arm and trying to stop him. The others joined her, some trying to pull Kai away from Lloyd while the other tried to pull Lloyd away from the strike.

“Brother, stop it!”

“Kai—Kai, man, don’t do it!” Cole tried to pry between the two.

“I can’t just let this continue on if it means hearing some old man shit talk my family! So what if my ‘passion’ is ‘misplaced?’ At least I know they’re not getting insulted and hurting.”

Miho moved, her hand grabbing Father’s katana that had been resting beside her. “You dare disrespect Lord Hakuchi?”

I tensed more, frozen in my spot as I watched the chaos. Miho’s other hand reached for the hilt, ready to get it out of its scabbard. I squeezed my eyes shut, my head throbbing.

It was too much.

All of their separate “songs” were drowning each other out, creating a painful static that clawed at my senses.

I gripped my shamisen, its smooth, cool wood a small anchor in the storm.

Harmony. Uncle Hakuchi said bring everything to harmony.

I thought of the stillness I’d found with Lloyd, the gentle, guiding flow that I was able to give him that night in Byakko Village. I thought of what Miho told me, to focus on that one thing and let everything else fade away.

Find that one true note amidst the chaos.

Then I began to hear it.

See it.

Feel it.

From the gentle flow of the water, the soft rumble of thunder. The quiet fall of snow, and a fire’s warm heat in a cold night. The earth’s stillness after an earthquake, and the ever pureness of energy of everything around us.

My fingers, almost instinctively, found the strings of the shamisen. I listened to it, focused on those melodies—turned them into one—and I plucked a single, soft note.

Then another.

And another.

A simple, ancient melody began to weave itself into the cacophony and I felt myself relax alongside with it.

It was faint at first, barely audible beneath their shouting, but I pushed my own emotional waves into the music—shaping them, smoothing them, trying to project that sense of quiet calm. That perfect harmony from all of them.

I focused on the turbulent waves of my friends—Kai’s scorching red, Jay’s frantic yellow, Nya’s churning blue, Cole’s rumbling brown, Zane’s storming icy-blue, and Lloyd’s deeply conflicted green. I tried to infuse my music with the opposite of their current state.

Slowly, almost imperceptibly, the shouting began to soften. The air lightened.

When I finally opened my eyes, the Ninja were all looking at me, their expressions a mix of confusion and fading anger. The argument had stopped. Everyone frozen in their spots.

Uncle Hakuchi, who had been watching the entire exchange with an unnerving intensity, now met my gaze. He offered a slow, deliberate nod. It wasn’t praise, but an acknowledgment. An understanding. He had read not just their emotions, but mine.

He knew I had orchestrated their calm.

Miho, who was halfway to getting the katana out, stared at me with parted lips. Her waves passed by her barrier, and I was able to read it before it disappeared: surprise and recognition.

She regained her posture and sheathed the katana again. She sat down beside me, and put the katana aside but kept it close.

Everyone dispersed, silently sitting back onto their zabutons. Lloyd didn’t look at me and just stared at his lap. Only then I noticed that I can’t read his waves anymore. That familiar green had vanished. I swallowed the lump in my throat, letting Shikisha rest on my lap and gently ran my fingers through the strings.

He learned.

“Thank you, Senritsu,” Uncle Hakuchi finally said, his expression didn’t even changed a twitch. “Let us continue.”

* * *

For the next two days, everyone was able to hide their waves. Not fully, there was still a sign of struggle, but I wasn’t able to see them as much anymore. It was… peaceful and a breather to not be constantly bombarded with them.

But, somehow, I wished I could see Lloyd’s again. The comfort it gave from its gentle waves when he was calm, and how it would turn brighter when something made him smile with those flicker of gold. I missed it more than I had realized.

By the end of the week, Uncle Hakuchi had let us rest, and everyone finally relaxed.

Chapter Text

Chapter 23

聴聞

Chōmon

It was a breather for Uncle Hakuchi to finally come to conclusions that we have learned enough on how to control our emotional waves—or at least the basics of it. He told us at dinner that evening that we would begin our elemental control tomorrow, sensing that we have tuned in with our elements enough to know how to go forward and connect with them.

But no one spoke.

Most of the exchanges came from Master Wu, Misako, and Uncle Hakuchi. The rest of us, dead silent. Just like our dinner after that day.

That argument from the team.

It was harder to know what everyone was feeling as they were able to shut their emotions now. It was still evident in their faces, but it wouldn’t show the deeper parts or even a hint of what else they might’ve been thinking like I used to.

Kai’s waves would sometimes peek out, but it would instantly disappear. He would eat, finish his food, and leave the room without a word. Master Wu didn’t even try to stop him, and the others just followed one-by-one.

Lloyd would stay a bit longer, even finished with his meal, before excusing himself from Misako and Master Wu. He would bow to Uncle Hakuchi, and head straight for his room. I would stay, knowing it would be rude to leave, and Miho gave me a silent message to stay in place until Uncle Hakuchi finished.

It was our tradition, after all.

The past few nights were too quiet for me. I hated it, unlike the time we were just beginning our training with Uncle Hakuchi. Sure, it began to drain everyone after day one, but they would still interact and Jay would try to lighten the mood with one of his usual jokes. Zane would even try by turning on his ‘funny’ mode.

But this… it was utter silence.

I hated how Nya would shift away from Jay to the point that she sat beside me and wouldn’t even look at him. And he, in return, didn’t look back. Zane and Pixal stayed beside one another, almost like anchoring each other as if afraid one of them would tip off the edge. Cole couldn’t even take a bite before leaving after Kai does. He tried to smile at me when he noticed I was looking at them; yet, it was still forced.

Even after playing that tune, it didn’t fully bring them together. It just de-escalated it.

I stared once more at my shamisen, tracing the designs before looking out the window and straight to the moon.

Peaceful, yet heavy. Too still for my liking. I wanted the lightness back. Even just a bit of it. I missed it than I had realized.

Other than that, I wasn’t able to ask Miho again about the song in my dreams. I seriously need to ask her about it, but there seemed to be no right time to do so. After that day, Miho had also been more serious and would narrow her eyes at each of the Ninja, specifically Kai. For sure she hadn’t forgiven him yet for disrespecting Uncle Hakuchi.

My mind always drifted to mine and Lloyd’s conversation about the possibility of it being my mom that was in my dream. The more I thought of it, the more it seemed like there was no other possible explanation. Still, I had to make sure before truly concluding that it was her.

With a heavy breath out, I put Shikisha aside and on a stand. I reached behind, taking off my kanzhashi as my hair fell to my back. As I was preparing to lie down and sleep, already pulling the covers of my futon, a knock came from the door. I turned, spotting a tall silhouette past the paper screens, though couldn’t discern who it was.

“Who is it?” I said, straightening myself.

“It’s me,” said a familiar voice.

I relaxed. “Lloyd.”

“Did I disturb you?” he said, tone small as if he had hesitated to even speak. “Were you about to sleep? I—I can leave.”

“No, it’s okay. I was about to, but… we can talk.”

There was a pause from the other side before he opened the door, peeking his head in first before fully showing himself.

It was new to see Lloyd wearing a samue, looking more comfortable being out of his green gi. The vial from Sanyu was tucked underneath his shirt; his hair more tousled than it usually was as if he just didn’t care about appearance right now.

His waves weren’t there as I expected, already hidden. But there was one thing that I noticed: his green eyes were in a darker shade again. And I knew he didn’t just come here to simply talk.

He stood there for a second without a word, not even looking at me. I waited, intertwining my hands in front of me as I let him take his own pace. He licked his lips, eyes staying on the tatami floor as his hand traveled to the vial around his neck.

The golden liquid inside glittered underneath the moonlight as it swished and swirled. It was less than before, almost the top had been cleared and drank.

After another second, he stopped and finally looked up. “Do you… want to walk?”

I gave a small smile, hearing those familiar words. “Sure.”

He nodded, stepping aside as he let me go out first. I gave a little bow as I exited, waiting for him as he closed the door then we began to walk. Our footsteps gently thumped onto the wooden floor, just aimlessly following the hallways as our silence continued. We took a few turns, not even sure if either of us knew where we were going, but we soon came across another engawa.

I stopped when I saw another part of the garden again, showing a serene view as it was illuminated by lamps hanging from trees and some kitsunebi hovering around. The waterfall could be seen not so far off, giving a better view of it than where we usually trained.

My thoughts shifted back to the argument again, echoing and replaying as I stared at that same spot where we were by the waterfall. Where it happened. Where everything could’ve ended badly for everyone.

Lloyd also halted, following my gaze. I heard him let out a shaky breath and said, “I’m sorry.”

My attention instantly turned to him, noting his brows were furrowed—lips parted as he stared out into the garden.

“I’m sorry,” he repeated, smaller and softer as if he was beginning to curl into himself. “I’m sorry that you had to see that. I’m sorry if we scared you.” He turned to me now; his eyes glistened a bit. “I’m sorry that I broke composure and wasn’t able to calm down my team that… that you had to intervene. Again.”

I fully faced him now. “Lloyd, it was no problem. We were all under pressure and—”

“No, Sato, please, stop. It was a problem. We disrespected your uncle. It was rude and out of line. We shouldn’t have done that. Not when he’s already kind enough to teach us and help us with this war and our predicament.”

He sighed, leaning against the wall and banged his head back softly onto it. “We shouldn’t even be fighting. I understand Kai’s concerns about the war, and I know how much he cares about this team—but we need this. We need to learn. We can’t even control our elements anymore, and the fact our enemies can see our emotional waves, and just how vulnerable we are. Useless we are. I am. I—I can’t—” he cupped his face, breath shaking.

I watched, chest tight from another one of Lloyd’s openness and current vulnerability. Even without his emotional waves present, it wasn’t hard to know what he was feeling.

Pressure.

Guilt.

Wanting immense control over situations, especially his team and keep on moving. Wanting to make sure we were fine and that everything would go smoothly as possible. I reached a hand, hesitating for a moment before taking his hands away from his face.

“Lloyd,” I whispered, making it as gentle and soft as I could. He doesn’t look at me, sniffling as he kept staring at the ceiling. “I know how much you worry about this team—about all of us. I know you want to keep us out of trouble as much as possible. We appreciate that, and you know for a fact that Kai trusts you more than anyone else to lead us. Then again… you also can’t blame him.”

I paused, knowing my next few words would be impolite. “But he was right. Ojisan had no right to aim straight for your guys’ weakness like that.”

He finally looked at me, eyes flickering all over my face almost as if in question.

I offered a small smile. “I know. I shouldn’t say that to my own family, but I can’t deny it either. He crossed a line, too, and I should’ve said something about it sooner. I could’ve helped you. I already noticed Kai’s waves were just waiting to burst out and I just watched it to grow.

“What my uncle said really took a toll on him, and it became worse when he aimed for Nya.” I squeezed his hands reassuringly. “So… don’t blame yourself or the team or that you weren’t able to de-escalate it on time.”

“You looked scared,” he began, stammering, “and they—”

“Don’t worry about it,” I interjected, shaking my head. Wanting to ease him up a little, I joked, “I was able to stop all of you guys in the end, remember?”

He let out an airy chuckle, sniffling again. “Yeah, I mean, you were and… I can’t thank you enough for that. You’ve saved us so many times already—especially me.” He began to rock back and forth a little, feeling his hands tightening around mine. “Starting from the museum, then at Byakko Villlage, now this.”

I chuckled lightly, smiling more as I felt the air lighten between us. “I guess you owe me a lot of favors then.”

He let out what sounded like an amused huff. “I sure do. Three or maybe more, who knows. Let’s see what the future holds.”

I hummed, nodding as I looked down at our intertwined hands.

They were warm, gentle. I could feel the callouses on his palm, letting me know his experiences and his long time exposure with battles. There were faint lines on them—healed from past fights.

When I glanced up at him again, the lanterns outside illuminating his face, only then did I notice there were some faint scars on his complexion as well. But they weren’t too noticeable. They could be easily missed when someone glances his way. The weariness in his eyes evident, though there was something there glittering.

Determination.

Something that never seemed to disappear in his eyes since the first time I met him, and began to teach him guitar. It was a part of him that I wished he would never forget and let go of. Because, with all honesty, it was one of the things that made me feel safe.

Right.

Sure that things would be just fine.

Suddenly, out of nowhere, he chuckled, making me blink as a heat crept up my neck to my cheeks when I noticed I have been staring at him for a bit too long.

He arched a brow. “Do you want to say something about this wonderful, handsome face or nah?”

I scoffed, letting go of his hands and nudging him back a little. “I hate you. Your face is ugly.”

He laughed hard, leaning back against the wall as he clutched his stomach. As if remembering it being nighttime, he clamped his mouth with his free hand. His shoulders shook, bending a bit forward as he kept laughing silently.

I scoffed again, but a grin spread up my lips and crossed my arms. “Seriously? That was the first thing that comes out of your head?”

“What? I heard everyone at school, especially the girls, say that I have such a ‘magnificent, capturing, and mysterious face’,” he said, making a gesture on the air as if he were presenting them while wiggling his brows.

“You made that up.”

“I didn’t. I even heard your friend—what’s her name again?” He paused, thinking deeply before snapping his fingers. “Ah! Mika say it, too.”

“Oh no, you can’t just—dear gods, Lloyd,” I groaned, remembering Mika’s words.

We were at the lunch line that time. She fawned over him in broken poetic lines about his ‘angelic eyes’—and he was right behind her the whole time. I caught his raised brow under that hood, and the secondhand embarrassment nearly killed me. I just gave up after when I figured she wouldn’t listen to me.

When Mika and I headed back to our usual table, I had spotted Lloyd kept glancing at us and there was no mistake that he was laughing based on how bright his emotional waves were that day. Though, he said nothing during music class as if it never happened—but he did have that glint in his eyes as if he was on the tip of saying it.

“It was entertaining, actually. Seeing you try and stop her.”

I groaned more, burying my face in my hands. “I tried to point out you were right there, but she wouldn’t shut up!”

He leaned against me, making me shift my balance a little at the sudden weight. “Well, more evidence that I do have a striking face.”

I nudged him off, giving him a playful glare as he backed off and raised his hands. We stared at one another for a moment before bursting into quiet laughters. After a moment as our laughter began to die down, we both leaned back against the wall and stared out into the garden.

There was a moments pause around us. Now, I could hear the chirps of the crickets and soft croaks of frogs from outside, making me close my eyes as I listened to their songs.

As if they had come back to life when things had finally lightened up.

“Sato.”

“Hm?” I tilted my head to look up at him.

Lloyd stared outside a bit longer before glancing at me. “Thank you for listening to me again, and for making me feel better.”

Warmth bloomed in my chest at his thanks, and I smiled. “Of course, Lloyd. I’ll always listen.”

He nodded, looking back ahead as the corner of his lips lifted. I couldn’t help my own smile from coming up, when I noticed a little wiggle from above him.

Only when I glanced up did I noticed that familiar green wave radiating out of him. I stared at it for a moment as I caught a glance of gold in them too. Those cozy, welcoming golden aura. Even though they were just hints of them, almost like highlights, it made his waves much more unique than the rest.

The warmth in my chest spread throughout my whole body as I felt myself unwind.

My focus shifted back in front of us as I put my full weight onto the wall and released a sigh. Enjoying the moment of calm after days of intense training; and being able to have a companion who was open enough to let himself be vulnerable with me.

A shift in the air made me stiffen, my ears twitching at a faint creak from down the hall.

I turned, squinting into the dim corridor. The silhouettes of paintings and vases loomed still, unmoving. Yet something about the silence that followed felt… too careful.

I held my breath for a moment before forcing my gaze back toward the garden.

Probably just someone shifting in their sleep, I told myself. Probably.

“You good?” Lloyd said.

I nodded, giving him a reassuring smile.

He nodded too. “Do you… wanna head back or do you wanna stay, maybe, a bit longer?”

“What do you want, handsome?” I teased, recalling his earlier boast as I faced him while waiting for his answer.

His surges shifted to little waves, almost as if in excitement or appreciation for me to ask such a simple question. He chuckled softly. “Hm… well, I feel like staying a bit longer. You know, so you can appreciate me more?”

I huffed, shaking my head with a smile. “Then, we’ll stay a bit longer. Not because of you.”

“Yup. Sure. Whatever makes you sleep at night.” He moved, sitting down on the floor. He looked up at me and offered a hand. “Might as well make ourselves comfortable while we’re at it.”

I stared for a moment before taking his hand as I let him help me sit down. The both of us came into another peaceful silence, taking my hand off his after assisting me as I rested it back on my lap. We just stared ahead, not uttering a word to one another after that.

Our ‘bit longer’ stay stretched just a bit more than we intended. We only came to a conclusion about heading back when Lloyd noticed I had begun to nod off. He helped me up and guided me back to my room, making sure I didn’t topple over. We said a quick good night to one another before I went back inside my room.

His silhouette stayed a little longer outside my door as if he made sure that I was truly safe inside before he left. I collapsed onto my futon, not even getting under covers as I instead used my tails as my blanket, and fell right to a peaceful sleep than I had the last few days.

Chapter Text

Chapter 24

第二週: 元素の絆

Second Week: Elemental Connection

The second week began, and I knew this was the moment that my team and I had been anticipating since the time we came here to Lord Hakuchi’s estate. Yes, we were sent here to be able to control our waves and “block” other Kitsune from using it against us—but this day would be the day where we would finally feel that assurance again. Assurance that we can defend ourselves, our team, and fight for the very reason why we came to Shijima.

And finally, I can return the favor to Sato.

She had helped me over the past few days. Our conversation last night and silent companionship was something that calmed my messy feelings. I was lucky to have someone like her in the team.

I knew that I can talk to Mom, Uncle, or the others, but I just felt like I would add the burden to them if I did. Satomi had that presence that I can just speak openly. It didn’t felt like whenever I do speak about my problems, it didn’t felt as if she would be dragged down by it

I couldn’t describe it right to how I feel, but she was just someone easy to talk to. There were no other words that can explain it better than that.

Once more, we were back at Lord Hakuchi’s garden, sitting in our zabutons though I can feel the pressure from everyone. No one looked at one another, sitting next to each other felt forced unlike the usual.

Mom kept glancing my way, knowing already that she wanted to make sure I was fine. After almost getting punched my Kai, I knew that was something she had worried about me most.

She did speak to me about it after the fight, the night we all went to our rooms after dinner. It even seemed like she wanted to argue with me based on the way she kept pacing back and forth in my room, arms crossed, and a deep frown on her face. But, always the knowing mother she was, she didn’t do it and just hugged me; kissed my forehead and left for the night.

Mom… how can I let you be part of this mess?

I sighed as I closed my eyes, trying to focus on my emotions and getting them back together. Remembering the teachings of Lord Hakuchi on needing to keep them in control. We waited for him as we all sat there in silence. On my right, I spotted Satomi and Miho speaking to one another in hushed whispers.

“This day would be more than just emotions, Hime,” Miho said sternly. “This would be the time where you will also learn how to connect and command the elements.”

“Yes, Miho-san,” Satomi said.

“It was one of your mother’s favorites to learn. If you would not believe it, she excelled at it than any of the Hinoki siblings.”

I opened my eyes a little bit, glancing their way as I listened to their conversation more. Satomi was looking at Miho now, a look of intrigue in her eyes. Her tails curled beside her, waving a little as if in excitement.

“She did?”

Miho nodded. “She was incredible at it. Like second nature to her as she connected with them and able to convince them to listen to her songs. Father Hinoki was incredibly proud of your mother. That was one of the reasons why he handed her the shamisen.”

She glanced at Satomi, fixing her hair a little with a sign of affection. “I taught them, of course. I can teach you as well, but I believe Hakuchi-dono would do a much better job than I would.”

“Well, you taught them,” Satomi shrugged with a slight tilt of her head, “and they ended up being great users of it. For sure you were a great sensei, too, Miho-san.”

A rare smile came up Miho’s face, but she looked away as if wanting to hide it. “I was merely their Caretaker. It was my duty.”

The sound of the door sliding open caused me to straighten up again, watching as the shadow of Lord Hakuchi pass by us and went down the steps to his spot on the grass. He sat, resting his shakuhachi on his lap and stared at us.

“I hope you all had a goodnight’s rest and a momentary break for a day,” his eyes flickered from one person to another, lingering on me before lifting his chin up. “For the next few days, we will now be focusing on Genzo no Kizuna. In other words, Elemental Connection.”

A silence came, the wind brushing against my cheek as I took a deep breath in. “Shall we begin?”

* * *

The first day of our training was mostly Lord Hakuchi explaining how our previous exercises with the control over our emotions would help with connecting with the elements. He said something about knowing the relaxed state of our elements, connecting with that first, before learning how it feels and how it moves when it comes to our desired wishes for it to do what we commanded it.

We had to re-learn some of what we had already learned with Uncle, going into a more in-depth training of how we should move and needing to almost mirror how the elements would flow.

“It would be challenging as most of you are not able to see it like she and I does,” he said, gesturing over to Satomi. “In so, as your first important assignment, Senritsu, you will describe and help your team with the movements of the elements and its waves. Tell them, paint a clear picture, and it would make it easier for them.”

From those words, Satomi seemed to have tensed up as she bowed at Hakuchi. I could see the pressure getting to her from how she swallowed and intertwined her hands tightly, but I tried my best to listen as much as I could with her descriptions.

The second and third day was a bit awkward and difficult for Satomi to describe how the elements moved on specific situations. How fire burns, how water flows, how the earth rumbles, and so on. She specifically had a difficult time with mine being energy, but I tried to reassure her as much as possible to take her time.

Uncle and Mom seemed to learn quickly, knowing they have the patience enough to re-learn everything, and knowing them, they always enjoyed finding new techniques.

One of those nights, when I passed by Satomi’s room, I spotted her and Miho’s silhouettes as she played certain tunes. I would stay for a moment and listen, learning valuable information about how the elements move in certain situations and what Satomi had to pay close attention to.

“Water is far focused on the need for emotional connection than the rest of the elements. It is delicate, fervent, yet flexible. It wishes you to be open to it and not shut oneself and what you feel from it,” Miho said, her voice soft.

“Lightning: fast and thunderous. You must quicken your song, your notes, to make the lightning listen to you. You must play loud if you wish it to hear you against its own storm. Though, it is quite a creative one and unpredictable. So keep that in mind.

“Earth. It is stubborn, but quite understanding than most elements. If what you play is meant deep in your heart, and your wish is to defend what you love, it will be by your side. It knows, so do not lie.

“Ice is cold, difficult to make it listen to you without getting yourself frostbite. You must learn to give it logic of your actions and what you demand it to do. You must be patient with it—prove to it that you can be calm amidst a chaos and always ahead of its own game, yet determined that you would not fall. Just like your father was.”

There was a moment of pause from her. Satomi continued to play. It was a song that stirred something inside me. It was a melody of almost all the elements combined into one. Delicate with a mix of slowness, sometimes it would quicken as if trying to reach for the lightning.

I closed my eyes and focused on my own, feeling that spark again from my element. But it wasn’t enough. I was missing something.

“Fire. It burns bright. It wishes to give warmth but it also wishes to burn everything around it. It will not listen to you unless you fight it yourself. Prove that you are strong—earn its respect by being able to stay beside it. It is almost similar to Earth. It knows when you lie, and it does not adore it.

“Unlike Earth, it will not forgive easily. Honor is what it wishes to see of a person. That is why we Kitsune are great with fire to the point we can harm but also cleanse and manipulate. That is why most of our samurai always hold their katana with blazing fire.”

Satomi suddenly stopped her playing, a sudden pause in the air that made me stiffen. Waiting for her to continue.

“Energy,” Miho began, almost in a whisper, “the purest of the elements. It does not belong to one alone—it is born from all. Flowing through every note, every breath, every living thing. To call upon it, you must listen to the harmony of all others, for Energy will not answer to one voice in discord.”

I opened my eyes, frowning at the revelation while I fidgeted with the vial hanging on my neck. Looks like it would be harder for me to get my element back, but that didn’t mean I couldn’t have it again.

Miho continued, causing me to keep still and listen carefully to understand what I needed to do. “It is both gift and burden—it can heal, strengthen, and give life, yet it can drain, consume, and break. That choice is always yours, Hime. Though know this: Energy listens only to truth. If your heart falters or turns to shadow, it will not follow—it will devour.”

I stopped fidgeting, her explanation echoing in my mind. The words instantly made me think of my Oni, making me clasp my hand around the vial on my neck.

Turn to shadow it won’t follow and would instead devour…

“If that’s the case,” I heard Satomi, snapping me out of my thoughts, “what should I say to Lloyd?”

“What he needs is to observe,” Miho said. “He needs to remember how those elements react. If not all of those elements are going to listen to him, if even one is against him, he would not be able to gain his back. It would be difficult for him to learn it again.”

I leaned more on the wall, staring up at the ceiling with a slight frown.

Even one.

The next two days, Satomi had more control over the elements than she did at the beginning. She began to play some tunes for each of my team. She came to conclusions of wanting to focus on one each for an hour. I had noticed her glancing my way as if wanting to tell me something, but I already knew what it was.

She was doing that so that I can observe my team and how each element was played and would react.

Miho sat next to her the whole time as Satomi played her song. Mom noticed me just sitting on the side and watching everyone with deep concentration. She asked if I was fine, and asked why Satomi handn’t spoke to me yet on what I should do.

I just smiled.

“She’s already helping me,” I reassured before focusing as Zane tried to follow the beat of Satomi’s song.

My eyes would flicker over to Lord Hakuchi who sat from the other end of the engawa, watching with strict eyes almost as if he was assessing us and silently searching for our weakness. It was almost as if he wanted to point them out but let us be to learn.

His eyes flickered over to me, and I just gave a nod. He did the same before focusing again on the training.

This continued on for another day. Satomi would constantly remind us to listen to the song that she was playing to paint a clear picture for them on how they should connect with their elements, explaining the movement as well when needed. Sometimes it would work, sometimes it wouldn’t.

There were times when Kai got burned because he just took a wrong step. Zane’s systems almost froze. A rock almost fell on Cole, but it perfectly landed only a few inches away from him. Jay got shocked that he was out for a whole day. As for Nya, well, she got drenched that she almost snapped while Pixal helped her dry off.

But, when those happened, it was evident in each of their faces they were worried for the other.

A small gasp came from Nya when Kai got burned, she looked even more worried when Jay got knocked out from his own element that I saw her pacing back and forth from her room to his the whole night. Zane looked like he was going to risk getting frozen again when the rock almost landed on Cole.

I sighed, shaking my head, knowing that this had to stop.

By the time it was the fifth day, I was beginning to understand my team’s movements and the songs that Satomi played that I began to feel that flicker inside me again, growing. When the others were able to summon their elements again, I noticed the difference that it had.

These weren’t the simple moves we’d practiced back in Ninjago. They were sharper, stronger—twice as powerful. Uncle even noticed it that he leaned forward from his seat in awe.

Zane’s ice were sharper and thicker, Cole’s earth rumbled and quaked more than it used to that it almost toppled some of us over, and Jay’s lightning were faster that in a blink of an eye it already hit its target that we always missed it in action.

It was Nya’s turn as she bounced from one foot to another on her spot, shaking her hands as warm up.

Satomi positioned her shamisen onto her lap, taking her bachi and letting it rest on the strings. She looked up. “Ready, Nya?”

Nya nodded, letting out a deep breath and got to her stance. “Born ready.”

With a nod from Satomi, she began to play a slow song; the notes plucked longer than the rest.

Nya began to move, almost dance-like. Her movements following the song’s languid strokes. Her arm movements and footwork were loose, eyes squinted and trained on the dummy. With a flick of her arms, like a snake going for a bite, the water from a pond followed its direction and hit the dummy with a crack.

She gasped, breaking composure, staring at the soaked dummy.

Next thing we knew, she was shrieking with a grin on her face.

“Holy shit! I did it.” She began to jump up and down. “I did it!”

I hummed at her enthusiasm as she continued to bounce, doing some more moves as the water floated around her again like it was dancing with her. Bright, glittering, and joyful.

Jay, who had been watching so intently, stood from his spot. His eyes sparkled with excitement.

“You did it!” he said.

“I did it,” Nya continued to play with the water with more excitement.

Out of nowhere, Jay ran towards her—almost tripping from his spot, and then picked her up, holding her tight as he spun the two of them.

They laughed. Their laughter echoing throughout the garden as the water rained down on them.

Quite a romantic sight, really. How it sparkled underneath the sunlight while the two didn’t care as they got rained on. I even thought they were going to kiss at how Nya cupped his face in her hands and leaned their foreheads together.

I couldn’t keep the grin from spreading up my lips; their joy contagious. The others began to chuckle as well, seeing as they began to lighten up more, and hope glittered through their eyes.

Cole and Zane shook their heads. I caught a glance of Zane taking Pixal’s hand again while Cole patted his shoulder as we waited for the couple to settle down first. Mom and Uncle seemed to relax now as well after days of tension, knowing they have been trying to figure out a way to get us all back together.

My gaze shifted to Kai, observing. He smiled with the rest of us, but his eyes stayed shadowed. His fists kept clenching and unclenching, his breath catching on the inhale.

I sat up straighter, readying myself.

After another minute when the two finally came back to their seats, it was Kai’s turn. He was doing some breathing exercises again as he stepped onto the open space, away from the trees and grass. His hands wrapped in bandages, reminding me of how many times he got burned just trying to control his element.

Satomi pulled up her instrument again, ready.

Kai glanced at her and nodded.

His song began.

He moved.

Unlike Nya’s, his was the opposite of her’s. A bit faster, but not as fast as Jay’s. His movements a bit more exaggerated and an extra punch or flick at the end of them. Fire began to come out. Everyone were at the edges of their seat as it began to grow. But then, I noticed that waver in his form and the fire disappeared midway. Satomi stopped playing.

He groaned, shaking his hands and going back to his original position. “Let’s go again.”

Satomi nodded, and began to play again.

Just like before, he made another mistake.

“Damn it!”

“Kai, listen to the song,” Satomi said, a tinge of worry in her voice. “Don’t just keep moving. Your element is a stubborn one, if you don’t connect with it—”

“I know, I’m trying!” He groaned again, pulling his hair back. “Let’s just try again.”

Satomi hesitated, getting her bachi up again as she got ready. My attention flickered to Kai, whose eyes were closed and rolling his shoulders. He got into his position again.

As Satomi was about to start, I stood. I held up a hand towards her, signaling her to stop. She glanced up at me. We stared at one another before she nodded and relaxed on her spot.

I went to Kai, putting a hand on his shoulder. He tensed as his eyes snapped open. When his gaze shifted and noticed it was me, I felt him go rigid.

“What’re you—”

“You’re scared,” I said, making him narrow his eyes. “Continue that and you won’t be able to do it, Kai. It’s obvious in your form.”

He opened his mouth as if he wanted to retort, but stopped and blinked away. With a sigh, I positioned myself beside him and got to that the same resting stance.

“Focus, Kai, fire won’t respect you unless you battle and show that you can keep up with it.”

There was a silence from him as he took another deep breath in and got into the same position as me.

“It’s not just about lashing out, it’s also being able to have control over your emotions,” I began to move, doing the first step, “in the heat of battle.”

He began to follow me, the two of us performing the movements of fire.

“That passion you have? It’s both a weakness and a strength,” I continued, beginning to feel more confident with the movements as I got myself accustomed to it.

Kai’s motions became more sure, his eyes closed and brows furrowed. The fire emerged again, following his movements as they continued to grow and brighten than the ones he had before. Sweat trickled down his forehead, but I knew he was beginning to connect.

I smirked, continuing my guidance. “As long as you remember when to give warmth and know when to let all of it out. That’s how you get the respect of fire. And it will know.”

When we got to the end of the move, Kai unleashed a massive burst of fire towards the dummy. I felt the heat, my skin sweating in an instant as it passed by us.

By the time the fire dissipated, the dummy burned and turned into charcoal. An airy chuckle came out from him, making me glance at him with a grin. Cheers came from behind, Nya shouting ‘that’s my brother’ from behind.

His gaze shifted to me, a small smile. “Thanks… Lloyd.”

I stood straight, nodding. “Yeah. No problem.”

We stood there for a moment before he rubbed the back of his neck, staring at the ground. “Hey, man, look… ‘bout what happened—”

“It’s fine,” I cut off, making him glance up at me. I just gave a reassuring smile and said, “I know.”

“Tch.” He clicked his tongue and nudged me, making me laugh. “Seriously, you’re making me sentimental. Also, by the way, that speech was—” he shuddered.

“Shut up!” I nudged him as well, walking back towards the others. “It worked though. I got your fire.”

“It sure fucking worked. Didn’t even need Satomi’s help!” he shouted as a joke while he gave her a thumbs up.

She arched a brow, noting how her tails wagged a little. “Sure, Kai, you’re welcome!”

“Absolutely, princess. Always a pleasure.”

She chuckled, shaking her head. We locked eyes, her smile softening as she gave me a nod. I nodded back, regrouping with the rest.

“Sooo,” Cole wrapped his arm around Kai’s shoulder, “think you can finally defrost my cake?”

“Damn you and your cakes, Cole.” Kai pushed him off as we laughed.

“Honestly, I’m quite hungry,” Nya interjected. “Maybe we should get snacks.”

“Nya, you’re always eating.”

“I’m not the one always eating, it’s Jay!”

“What me?” Jay pointed at himself. “The one who ate most of our storage last mission was Cole.”

“Okay, now it’s back on me? Seriously, guys, not cool.”

“With all due respect, it is true,” Zane added. “I do have some footage saved in my data bank as evidence. Pixal was kind enough to store them on another backup drive as well.”

“What? Zane, no! Delete that. Pixal, come on!”

“I apologize, Cole,” Pixal smiled. “I have made a promise to keep it safe and out of the wrong hands. I can not simply delete the footages taken from the Bounty in case those are needed. Moreover, I do find them quite entertaining.”

Cole let out an exaggerated groan.

I chuckled, crossing my arms. “Fine, we’re getting a snack break. Sensei, is that alright with you?” I glanced at Uncle who turned to Lord Hakuchi instead.

We all waited as Lord Hakuchi stared at all of us in silence, lengthening before he signaled over to one of his kenin. “Prepare some refreshments for all of us. We shall have an hour break.”

Everyone cheered, heading back inside. I watched for a moment, smiling as they began to joke and push each other around.

Their spirits were back, and I could feel some of the weight on my shoulders disappear. Mom went to me, pulled me down to her level, and kissed my cheek.

I laughed, touching my cheek as I felt it warm. “Mom!”

“You did amazing, Lloyd,” she cupped my cheek. “I’m proud of you.”

My eyes softened, watching her head back inside. Uncle patted my back, giving an approving nod as he followed Mom. As everyone began to head inside, Satomi stood beside me as we both stayed there for a moment.

“The place is lively again,” she said.

“Yeah, it is.” I looked at her. “Thank you. You helped us a lot.”

She shook her head. “You helped them too.” Her eyes flickered up and down at me for a moment before our eyes locked again. “I don’t even think you need my music to guide you, Lloyd. I already saw it flicker earlier.”

My lips parted as she walked inside, strapping her shamisen behind her as she disappeared inside. I heard Nya calling after her, saying something about playing them a song. Agreements burst from inside while I looked down at my hands.

Her words echoed in my head, soft and almost reassuring.

“I already saw it flicker earlier.”

I smiled, a warmth blooming up my chest. Rolling my shoulders back and straightening my gi, I went inside and enjoyed the moment with the others. My attention on Satomi as I listened to her play her shamisen while sipping tea.

Chapter Text

Chapter 25

The Missing Verses

It was another night, and another day close to the end of the week.

I sat once again on the same engawa that Lloyd and I had stayed in a few days ago, Shikisha on my lap as I played the song while staring out into the garden. The wind was calm, and the night chirping its familiar melodies.

I wasn’t able to think so deeply the moment we arrived in Shijima, going through that portal and finding ourselves at the tip of the Byakko Region. So many things happened so fast, and too much that I didn’t even get to feel the change immensely. But, as days began to pass while we stayed here at Uncle Hakuchi’s estate—and nightly thoughtful thinking before bed—I began to notice it.

The difference between Ninjago and Shijima.

First thing I had noticed was how peaceful everything was here in this realm. The silence evident that I could hear the true symphonies of the night than the busy streets of Ninjago with vehicles zooming by from my window.

The difference was everywhere I looked, starting from the natural glow of flames in lanterns above minka houses from sky-reaching buildings and blinding neon lights. The smell of smoke and street foods out in the open markets of Ninjago from the smell of fresh air and blossoming flowers of Shijima.

Of course there were natural sights in Ninjago as well—all the way from the outskirts of the city. But here in Shijima, everything was balanced. Everything lived in tune. From the elemental waves to the people in it.

This was the realm that my abilities shined and adored as if its what it had been seeking all this time that it sang. Not those times where I had to wear headphones and block everything around me.

This. This was what my inner self had been searching for.

Lloyd was right, it did take a while for all of it to hit in.

I would admit, I do miss the noise of the city. I miss having my phone, playing games, having face-times with my friends, and the softness of my bedsheets back home—especially, I miss my parents and Mom’s cooking.

But I didn’t mind the suburban life here in Shijima as well. Being here with the others and experiencing it with them, even though we weren’t fully safe.

They both had their charms and both lived happily in my thoughts.

I plucked another string with the bachi, the note stretching as I let it linger for a moment. I frowned as I stopped again at that familiar song from my dreams with the woman in it.

That dream, I had noticed, had stopped coming ever since I held the shamisen.

And, because of our past days of busyness, it was yet again the one thing I forgot to ask Miho about and whether she recognized it.

I couldn’t believe I had let myself slip that off my mind. It had been the very reason why I wanted to come here and how my curiosity about the shamisen even started. Instead it was buried with Uncle Hakuchi’s teachings about elemental and emotional waves. To top it off, he also began to teach me how summon kitusnebi, but it wasn’t as strong as his or Miho’s.

I had come out here to the engawa to try and continue the song, wishing that maybe some memories had come back and it would let me finish the song.

But it still didn’t.

Even after arriving here, the realm itself still didn’t tell me anything else. Just like the time where I had played it for Lloyd that night in Byakko Village. Perhaps I wasn’t thinking hard enough, or maybe I had to do something to jog up my memories.

When I tried that, the result was the same as the rest.

After trying six times already, replaying the same verses over and over again, nothing.

Still the same ones as it was back home.

I closed my eyes, sighing deeply. Maybe one more time.

With a determined nod, I began to play again. Seventh times the charm, right?

The song began to echo through the hall, my fingers traveling through the neck with ease with the notes memorized and ingrained deep in my head.

I hummed it, those familiar story-like notes as if setting up a scene right in front of me like those in kabukis. Where men fought and women danced, telling a story of an epic battle or a tale of a tragic romance. It was all there, and some I recognized came from different notes of the elements.

When I was close to halfway through the song, where I usually end it as I didn’t know the rest of it, a sudden tune joined in from my right.

My eyes snapped open, making me glance that way as I saw Uncle Hakuchi appear with his shakuhachi in his hands. I stared in shock as he played the same melody I was just playing, but I noticed it was extended.

There was something different in it, not fully similar to the verses I played. His was more steady, and he was holding onto the notes a beat longer. But the way he continues it was smooth like a caress from the wind, more zephyr though it would pick up then slow down again.

I watched, my lips parting as he continued while walking closer to me. He went on for another note or two before stopping as he lowered his instrument and we locked eyes.

I stood at an instant, bowing deeply. “Oji-san, I apologize. Did I disturb your sleep? Was I playing too loud?”

He shook his head, giving me a gesture that I knew I could stand up straight again. “Ie, Senritsu, you did not wake me. I could not sleep, so I thought a walk would help. On the way, I heard you playing Chōwa no Uta.”

I blinked, peeking up at him. “Chōwa no Uta?”

He nodded, sitting down on the spot beside me. I sat as well when he gestured for me to do so. “Song of Harmony. It was the song that we had composed for our father.”

My thoughts drifted to the scrolls I had seen on the way to the garden, remembering four children playing different instruments in front of a man in a throne who had a gentle smile on his face.

So, that man was Grandfather.

“It was a notion that your mother had for tō-san when it was his two-thousand years of ruling. It is something that we perform together during the Kagaribi Akari Festival that holds every year in Hinoki Village.”

He shifted a little, his eyes deeply focused on Kasumi, his shakuhachi. “Natsumi-chan insisted upon it, saying that it brings us together and reminds us of who we are. For Shijima. For the sake of our Father and our ancestors who we know listens in the Heavens above.”

He gestured at Shikisha. “That verse that you played was your mother’s part. After that, mine. Then the next is Asami’s. The next is Hiroshi’s. She had made certain that our parts were played in order of our birth so that each of us had the time to shine.”

My hold on the shamisen tightened at his revelation, making me release a quiet breath out.

So, it was Mom. Lloyd’s hunch was right. In my dream, it was her who had been playing it. She had been playing it for me to hear.

Was it her way to tell me something? Her way, all this time, to tell me that my life was more than just there in Ninjago?

She left me that song as a way to at least have some kind of connection to Shijima. To who I really am. Perhaps that was why she left it to me, because if she didn’t, I don’t think I would’ve ever known or would’ve been curious of what it was. I would’ve stayed with my adopted parents and never knew the truth.

“But, of course, that is not all of your mother’s parts.”

My attention snapped back to him, pulling me back to the moment. Uncle Hakuchi stared at his shakuhachi, his fingers following the designs as if remembering the times they had played together.

After a moments pause, I asked, “What do you mean, Oji-san?”

“It cycles back to the eldest. Each of us wrote our own parts into the song, and each of it… only ourselves remember it. If it is my part, only my part I remember. If it is Asami’s, it is only hers.”

My shoulders sagged a little, knowing what that meant. “Are you saying that you don’t know what comes after your parts—that you don’t know what Okā-san plays?”

He shook his head, looking at me with saddened eyes. “Like I have said at the beginning, each of us are gifted by our father with these instruments. Gifted with parts of his power. Before we even received these instruments, we already knew where we excelled at. Which element, which instruments, and which emotions.

“Due to that, Natsumi-chan had let us compose our own parts as it focuses on what we are best at. We did not write the notes, we knew it by our power. She had her own melodies and we had ours.”

I sighed, looking down. So, that part that he played when he came here… it wasn’t even this shamisen’s part. That meant I only had the beginning part of the song. How am I supposed to know the rest when Mom didn’t even write them on a sheet?

A hand laid on my shoulder, making me look up at him again. His eyes were soft, creases between his brows as we stared at one another. The usual stoic part of him had vanished and it made me ease up a bit more. “I apologize that I could not help you with this, Senritsu. You seemed like you wanted to know the rest of her part.”

“I did, but I couldn’t do anything about it if that’s the case.” I sniffled a little, wiping tears that had began to form. When I finally almost got my answers, it all ended up to nothing again.

Kā-san, what should I do?

Uncle Hakuchi pulled away, sitting upright as he shifted his focus out to the garden. “I have been hearing too many things from the wind.”

“What do you mean?”

He closed his eyes, almost as if he was listening to the breeze outside. “How they say that Byakko’s storm are raging again, the darkness in Kokuko becoming more eternal that even its people can not see past them like they should, how Kinko’s beautiful canyons are crumbling, and Ginko’s rivers are drying and exotic plants withering.”

It was getting that bad? I only knew about Kokuko and Byakko, but not the rest. What was happening? How was it that the war seemed to be affecting the whole realm when it was just between two siblings who weren’t even in those regions?

I looked up at him, saying, “Do you know the reason for it? Besides the war?”

He shook his head. “I wished I knew, but I do not. If your mother was here, I do not doubt she would had an answer.” His gaze became distant. “I know with a fact that this war would not be happening either. She always loathed it when our people are in conflict with each other.

“When two Regions are against at one another, she would always step in and listen to their worries and why they were arguing. At the end, they come to an agreement and no physical fight ever happens. Natsumi-chan always despised it when we even dare raise our voices at one another. It always reminded me of Father, and until now I still do not understand why they do it.”

I stared at him, lips parting from Mom’s actions. Miho wasn’t lying. Mom was like some kind of judge to these people. Someone who truly symbolized peace. It was incredible that she can solve a problem between two regions, finding ways to keep the tranquility intact.

She did become the Mother for a reason, and that meant knowing what was going on in every region.

Did she do all of that just by Shikisha? Was that why Grandfather chose her to be the next ruler besides being the eldest because he knew she could do all of that? Or because they had the same morals?

If that was what Mom wanted for Shijima… then it was also mine now, too.

“I wanted to apologize about something else as well,” Uncle said after a moment pause.

I came back to reality, narrowing my eyes in confusion. Apologize about something else?

“It concerns your friends.”

My thoughts instantly drifted to the argument, and how he had nodded to me when I was able to make it stop. “It’s alright, Oji-san, they were able to—”

“I am aware of that. But  I wanted to apologize for my tactics and how cruel I might have been the last few days of training.” He looked at me again, a troubled look on his face.

Then something caught me off guard, his waves were out.

Fully out and vulnerable when all this time he had taught us to always control it and not let others see. They were almost the same shade as the wind that I almost missed it, but his were thicker than the rest of us; heavier as if the emotional waves of the royal Kitsune also showed their status. Maybe it did. I wondered if mine were the same.

A genuine look crossed his expression, as if he had been holding this apology for the past few days. “I had no choice but to be strict and go through those teachings. I am aware that the Ninja are here to help you stop this war, and them being that vulnerable would not end well with any of you. I had to be strict—cruel, as our enemies would be the same.”

He released a breath, looking down at the ground. “I did it without warning, because if I did not, it will not have the same effect as it would when they do know. They would keep expecting for those words to come out of my mouth. I hope you can forgive me for my actions, niece, and I hope you understand why I had done it.”

I smiled at his apology, feeling a bit guilty for saying those things to him behind his back when I talked to Lloyd that night. He understood, and Uncle Hakuchi did it on purpose for the sake of our safety and to be ready for anything. He knew the Kitsune better than any of us, maybe even better than Miho even though she had lived longer than him. It was understandable for him to take such actions especially at a war like this.

I appreciated it and nodded. “It’s no problem, Oji-san, we understand. For sure the others understand it as well—I mean, Nya and Lloyd understood it. I believe even Sensei Wu.”

Uncle Hakuchi hummed, his waves calming again before disappearing. “You are quite a companion, Senritsu. I do not doubt people come to you when they are at their lowest.”

I shook my head, looking out of the glass doors again. “I try to help as much as I could”

He just nodded as we both sat there, feeling at peace to know that my uncle was sorry for his harsh training and being able to help me with the mysteries of my mother’s song.

Even though I wasn’t able to find the next few verses, I couldn’t thank him enough for trying and letting me know more of Mom—knowing how dedicated she was, and just as selfless. Always making sure everyone was heard and known for who they were.

And someday, I hoped, that I would discover them and know how to finally end that song.

Chapter Text

Chapter 26

糸

Ito

The next day, we continued our practice. I was playing each of the Ninja’s songs as they focused on getting used to the elements more. Uncle Hakuchi began to speak more often now that he knew that we had connection and control with our elements. He gave some pointers on the things that they lacked and still needed to work on.

I just finished Zane’s song as he successfully unleashed a wave of different ice attacks when I Uncle Hakuchi stood.

“You did well, Master of Ice,” he said, which Zane just bowed perfectly at him. “You may now sit.” Uncle Hakuchi faced Lloyd. “Are you ready?”

Lloyd nodded, standing as he made his way to the area while Zane went back to his seat. Uncle Hakuchi went to him, whispered something with a serious look on his face.

Lloyd just nodded, letting me read his lips as he said. “Yes, Hakuchi-dono.”

Uncle Hakuchi went back to his seat and he gestured at me to begin. Glancing at Lloyd to make sure he was ready, he gave me a nod as he got into his resting position. With a deep breath, I began to pluck.

The beginning was slow and focused while I watched as he began to move. He followed the beat precisely, eyes closed as he took a step forward and another, creating gestures with his arms in a hypnotic way. It almost reminded me of how Nya does hers.

When the song began to quicken, he does the same. His movements were a mix of everyone’s motions, each one slowly but surely getting faster and louder.

Lloyd appeared peaceful at this moment, truly capturing his element’s essence well. A tinge of green began glinted, beginning to surround him as wind picked up around him.

My lips parted as I saw them, following his every move as I kept playing. It began to grow and grow, turning more apparent as it continued on.

As he was on the verge of unleashing it, already forming in between his hands, a faint bum made my ears twitch.

Miho seemed to have noticed it as well as she became alert, her eyes flickering towards where it had originated. She instantly took hold of father’s katana.

I stopped playing, making everyone glance over to me. Lloyd halted, opening his eyes as he look at me in question. I stared back, opening my mouth but unable to say anything as another bang came.

It was closer.

Bum. Bum.

Uncle Hakuchi stood, his tails fanning as his ears twitched. His hand instantly gripping Kasumi.

Bum, bum. Bum, bum.

I recognized that sound. Its bass-like rhythm.

Bum-bum. Bum-bum.

A song. A familiar tune that I have heard in so many festivals. The others began to notice it, too, causing them to become alert now as well.

Bum-bum-bum. Bum. Bum.

The door burst open, and came in a man. He was heaving as he turned to Uncle Hakuchi. “Hakuchi-dono, we have company.”

Uncle Hakuchi cursed, already moving as he headed for the door. “Tell the others to go straight to the main gates. Do not engage until I say so.”

“Hai, Hakuchi-dono,” the man left, disappearing back inside.

Bum, bum. Bum-bum-bum. Bum. Bum.

The sound began to get closer and closer. Louder and deafening. More recognizable.

My grip on Shikisha tightened, the edges of the bachi biting onto my skin. If my guess about this was right, we were in grave danger.

I turned to Miho. “What is happening?”

“Not good news,” she just said, facing Uncle Hakuchi. “Hakuchi-dono, what must I do?”

“Bring everyone inside, somewhere safe. Do not let them out, then go to the front gate,” he said, already following the man that had left.

Miho bowed and turned to us. “All of you, follow. Quickly! No time to pause.”

We all began to move, following her as I strapped my shamisen. The sound kept going, faster and faster; more menacing and chilling.

“What’s that?” Jay began, worry laced in his expression. “Is that some kind of bomb?”

“A bomb does not sound like that,” Zane said, his eyes turning blue as if going through his data bank. “Instead, its beat are similar to a—”

“Taiko,” I frowned, gripping the strap as I trailed Miho quickly. “It’s a taiko. Lots of them.”

Miho kept silent as she guided us through the halls with ease. Deeper and deeper into the estate.

“Taiko?” Nya began as if piecing it together. “Isn’t that—”

My mind drifted to one person. “Uncle Hiroshi.”

A heavy silence came to all of us as we kept on walking, everyone’s pace seeming to quicken.

“Lord Hakuchi called everyone to go to the front,” Cole began. “Shouldn’t we help them? We have our elements back. Maybe we can help even just a bit.”

“If you wish to be easily killed by Hiroshi-dono’s fighters, be my guest,” Miho said, opening a door as she ushered us inside. “Taikos are not only used for festivals, they are also used in warfare. These Kitsune are fighters. The best of this realm.”

There was nothing inside the room. No windows, no furnitures, and only one way out.

She put a hand on my back, letting me in. “They are ruthless fighters. They will not rest until they have won this war and get what they want.” Her gaze landed on Lloyd and Master Wu. “If they learn the truth, especially Lord Hiroshi, he will not hesitate to cut your heads off.”

Lloyd shifted, his hand going to his neck.

“Uncle Hakuchi said that each of the Hinoki siblings are gifted one instrument, right?” I began.

Miho nodded, gripping Dad’s katana on her waits. “Indeed.”

“Then, why does it sound like Uncle Hiroshi have multiple?”

“Lord Hiroshi’s case is different. He has been gifted with the power of warfare. His song can not be played by his own. He needs his fighters with him and for them to work together. In that case, he has been gifted multiple taikos, not just one. And he has let many of his warriors use them to play their rhythm.”

I looked down, wiping my sweating hands as I exhaled.

So, that was his power. The power of warfare.

Now that I thought of it, it seemed a bit unfair to my aunt. How was she surviving all of this when Uncle Hiroshi—the one she had been fighting with—had all of the greatest warriors on his side, including himself?

The song suddenly stopped, making all of us clump our mouths shut. Miho stiffened and my ear twitched as a voice boomed out from outside. Faint, but commanding.

“Hakuchi!” the man called. “I know you have our sister’s daughter, brother, and the shamisen. Give them to me, or we will do it by force.”

“Hiroshi,” Uncle Hakuchi now spoke. Even from here, I could feel the air shift as if in warning. “You can not simply come up here and trespass into my property. I am not part of this absurd squabble between you and Asami.”

“You are now. Especially when I learned from two of my best soldiers that you have them!”

“You have been sending spies into my estate without my consent?” Uncle Hakuchi’s voice tightened, the wind becoming more dangerous.

Miho turned back to us. “Do not open the door. Do not make a sound.” She turned to me, cupping my face. “Satomi, listen to me, keep at the back. Let the Ninja protect you.”

“Miho—” I began but she cut me off.

“No. You have a greater part in this war than getting caught by your uncle. He will not listen to reason. You have to trust me.” She looked up, her eyes landing on Lloyd. She was heaving, and I noticed the fear in her eyes. “Do not leave her side. Protect her with all your might.”

Lloyd walked closer to me, putting a hand on my shoulder. A determined look on his face. “I swear it.”

“Ii,” Miho’s eyes softened as it landed on me again. “I swore to her to protect you, and I will keep doing that.”

I watched as Miho closed the door quietly, locking it as her silhouette lingering there for a moment before she disappeared.

Lloyd pulled me towards him before leading me to the very back. “Stay here. She’ll be fine. We both saw her fight before.”

I nodded, pulling the shamisen even closer to me. Even though I have seen her fight before, knew how capable Miho was, I still couldn’t help but worry. Outside wasn’t just any Kitsune, but perhaps dozens or hundreds of them who were skilled fighters—maybe even better.

She had been there with us, without her close by and letting me feel that guarding presence… I felt like we were so vulnerable. Easy preys.

The Ninja might have their powers back, but I don’t think it was enough. We weren’t so acquainted with it. It had only been days. Those people outside were millenniums. It was second nature to them at this point. I may have the shamisen, but it still wouldn’t be enough.

The conversation continued outside, but it sounded like it was getting more heated.

“Hakuchi, last warning, brother,” Uncle Hiroshi shouted now.

“I have made my statement, Hiroshi,” Uncle Hakuchi said, the wind suddenly stilling. “You. Will. Not.”

In an instant, the wind came blowing again. A large gust that the whole estate shook. It made me stumble, but Lloyd caught me and pulled me closer to him. His eyes flickered up to the ceiling, debris raining down.

Shouts came from outside, steel clashing against steel as it echoed inside.

Even though we couldn’t see it, I could imagine it vividly.

Men and women fighting. Elements used. Uncle Hakuchi playing his song while they growled and gnashed their teeth at one another. Miho using father’s katana as it reflected the sunlight.

I shut my eyes, trying to get the thoughts out. I tried to focus on my heartbeat to keep the sounds controlled, but all of it were too much. My ears began to ring that I whimpered, drowning away my beating heart.

My hands went straight to my ears, trying to block them all.

Too much. Too much.

Lloyd pulled me closer. “Satomi. Sato, focus on me. We’re going to be fine. We’re right here.” He rubbed my arm, making me look up at him. He gave a smile, though I knew they were forced as the worry on his face was evident. “Too loud?”

Unable to speak, I just nodded, my breathing unstable.

He held me tighter to the point that my head rested on his chest and I could hear his heartbeat. “Focus on mine instead. Don’t listen to what’s happening outside, just mine. We’re all here to protect each other.”

I began to loosen, closing my eyes as I just listened to his calm and steady rhythm.

Ba-dum. Ba-dum. Ba-dum.

Just as the sounds began to get more controlled, another unexpected quake came from the taikos—producing a loud BUM that I jumped.

And, suddenly, something had burst. Almost like a mirror had fallen and shattered.

It was the wind, I could feel it. The atmosphere had became heavy so abruptly that it took my breath away.

Uncle Hakuchi’s voice broke through. “Hiroshi, stop this at once!”

Footsteps pounded inside the estate, fully ignoring Uncle Hakuchi.

Women screamed from within the estate, aggressive thumps coming and going from one hall to another. Doors slid open, then closed with so much force that some I heard had cracked.

“Search every room!” Uncle Hiroshi shouted, people already moving. “Search every corner. Do not leave a single thing unturned in this place.”

“Shit,” Kai whispered. “They got past.”

“Get ready,” Lloyd whispered, his tone had shifted slightly deeper. “Remember your training. We don’t have to fight, we just need to make enough time to get us out.”

My hands began to shake, sweating more as I practically hugged Shikisha and wrapped my tails around myself.

I can’t handle this. I can’t do this.

A sudden close a few paces away from the hall startled me, causing me to gasp a bit too loud.

Everyone’s attention snapped to me.

I cupped my mouth, frozen.

Lloyd tensed. When I looked up at him, he was staring at me with wide eyes.

Shit… I gave out our position.

A silence surface up into our hallway, the creaking from the floorboards outside made me back up more to the wall behind me. A silhouette appeared, tall and armored, tails swaying behind them and ears pointed as if listening.

Another appeared. Then another… and another.

They stopped right in front of our room. My breath became uneven again, swallowing the lump in my throat as I tried to calm down.

Lloyd put a hand on my mouth, bending to my level and putting a finger in front of his lips. The others were already in full alert, Master Wu pointing his bamboo staff at the direction of the door. Pixal went to my side as well as Misako, both of them offering silent comfort as Lloyd stepped closer to the others.

He made a gesture. Kai and Cole nodding as they both went on each side of the entrance and crouched. He gestured at Jay as he went right in the middle; Nya crouched down, already waving her hands in small gestures as water began to surface up from the tatami mats; then Zane settled  just beside Nya.

The silence lengthened. A shift from outside came from one of the silhouettes.

Then, a blade pierced through between the doors and cut straight up. It instantly broke the lock. It slid open.

“Now!” Lloyd shouted.

Jay let out flash of lightening, it missed the Kitsune but it made them flinch. Nya directed the water at each of the people in front, splashing them while Zane followed, freezing them.

It didn’t fully solidfy them to the point they couldn’t move, but it caused them to drop their weapons. Kai and Cole took the advantage and fought them off, giving us a pathway out. Lloyd grabbed my wrist and lead us out.

The others followed.

“We need to get back to the vehicles!” he shouted. “Pixal, where are they located?”

“We have left them last at the very bottom of the estate,” she said, pressing bottoms on her forearm. “I hid them in a cave not so far from here. But it may be surrounded. The possibility of Hiroshi’s men being there—”

“It’s our only chance out of here and fast enough to get all of us to safety.” We turned a corner, the others sometimes using their elements to push away warriors away from us, just enough to give us time to keep running. “Our priority is to keep Satomi safe. That’s our mission right now.”

As we turned another corner, Lloyd suddenly stopped as a naginata zoomed past him from one of the halls. I tensed, glancing that way as a man stood there. He was heaving, lifting his chin up high when he saw us.

He appeared young—younger-looking than Uncle Hakuchi. But they almost looked alike, only his eyes were angrier and a bit round. He wore an armor like the rest, but this one was darker and golden accented.

I recognized that one kind of armor, something I had seen before in a historical museum of warriors back then of Ninjago. It was a Tōsei Gusoku. Its appearance menacing while his mask hung on his neck while the helmet had protruding, metal horns.

A shime daiko peeked from behind him, and drum sticks on his belt. His pupils sharpened, irises turning a shade of golden color; white tails flaring behind, counting nine.

And that told enough.

That man was Uncle Hiroshi.

“Senritsu,” he called, his voice making me flinch at the slight deepness of it. His eyes flickered to the shamisen. “Ima sugu koi—Come here, now!”

Another tug on my wrist. Lloyd began to move. “Move. All of you!”

I saw Uncle Hiroshi sneer, taking his taiko from behind him and a stick before striking it. A high note came out of it, then a sudden quake came into the estate. We stumbled, each of us almost losing our balance.

I got myself back up thanks to Lloyd and some support from the wall.

“What the hell was that?” Jay shouted.

“Miho never said anything about him being able to make the ground shake!” Cole said.

“At least now we know he damn can,” Kai shouted, pushing the others forward. “Now stop staggering like little girls and move it!”

We began to run again, when another sound came from behind, causing another violent shake. A part of the ceiling gave out. Lloyd, without even a moments pause, used his element and made a barrier to let it not hit us.

He glanced at me. “You okay?”

I nodded, panting.

“Senritsu!” Another shout from Uncle Hiroshi, causing me to look behind.

He strapped his taiko again, putting away the stick as well as he reached for the hilt of his weapon that seemed to dragging onto the floor. I stiffened at the sight of it, Lloyd already beginning to move but stopped at an instant when more footsteps came. Another group of Kitsune came from the other end of the hall.

“Fuck. Fuck!” Kai said, waving his hands as fire came out of his hands.

The others did the same. Everyone surrounded me, even Misako, as they kept me in the middle.

“This is not how I expected this day to go,” Jay said, his voice wavering a bit. “We were just training, and it ends up in a full-blown battlefield!”

“Not now, Jay,” Nya shouted.

“Seriously, though, why didn’t they give us our weapons when we needed it?”

“Keep your ground. Don’t let them get Satomi,” Lloyd said seriously.

A shing came from the direction of Uncle Hiroshi, making me glance at his direction again only to make my heart stop a beat. In his hands, was a large looking katana. Larger and longer than an original that it almost looked like the same height as he was. He positioned it in front of him, pointing at our direction.

“What is that?” Cole said, reading my mind.

“It appears to be an ōdachi,” Zane said. “A massive sword that requires a considerable amount of strength to wield, and just to even wave it around with precision.”

“Great! Thanks for letting us know our chances, Zane,” Kai groaned. “Very reassuring.”

As if hearing our conversation, Uncle Hiroshi’s ear twitched from the holes of his helmet before saying, “Nido to wa iwanai, Senritsu. Come here, right now. If you do not, I will not hesitate to kill every single one of these people.”

I swallowed, glancing from one end of the hall to another. Where was Miho? Uncle Hakuchi? I thought they were trying to stop them from getting in? Were they captured? What happened?

Misako moved closer to me, whispering, “Don’t listen to him, Satomi. Don’t be scared.”

“I can hear you, obāsan!” Uncle Hiroshi said, readjusting his sword.

Zane, Kai, and Cole to tighten their stance. Misako’s eyes narrowed as if offended by being called an old woman.

“One more word I hear from any of you, you all will perish at this very instant.” He took a step forward, causing the others to take a step back. “Ichi…”

“Seriously? Countdowns?” Jay muttered.

I tensed at the first number, glancing up at Lloyd as he kept his emotions intact and hidden. Some of the others were beginning to crack, but I can see them trying to keep them in. Lloyd’s eyes flickered around at the tight hallways as if trying to figure out a way out.

But how? It was too small and both ways were blocked.

“Ni!” Uncle Hiroshi took another step forward, already getting his position ready as if mid-swing. “Senritsu!”

I closed my eyes. Come on, stop standing still and help!

“San!”

Our trainings… I should use what I learned. How did Miho do it? How did she make that portal again? What tunes? What notes?

“Go! One more, Senritsu, and I will do it!”

As I put the shamisen in front of me, taking the bachi from my obi, I was about to play the same tune I heard back from the museum where Miho had created a ton of portals as a last resort when a gentle sound caught my attention. I halted, opening my eyes as the sound of a bell came.

A portal opened on the wall in front of me and a woman stood there, wearing a red Onna-bugeisha and her face white and painted with heavy make-up. It was like those that Geishas put on. In her hand was a suzu bell.

Asmile came up her lips, almost a playful smirk. “Tetsudai iru, Hime?”

I stared in surprise as she offered a hand—a helping hand. I stared at it, confused of who she was. The others noticed as well, their attentions all of a sudden on her, the same look written on their faces. Then, a shout came from Uncle Hiroshi as he charged as well as the warriors from the other hall. Fury burned in his eyes as if recognizing the girl.

The woman sighed. “Yoshi, jaa, hairou ka.” She suddenly grabbed my wrist, making me gasp as she pulled me in. “All of you, follow. Unless you wish to die.”

Without a moment hesitation, the others listened. Lloyd ushered them in, each one quickly squeezing into the portal. In the last moment, Lloyd was able to follow in as Uncle Hiroshi and his men were about to reach him.

They stopped right in time before colliding. Uncle Hiroshi glanced our way with a deep frown, face red and a hand reaching towards us. Lloyd’s element appeared in his hands, directing it towards Uncle Hiroshi as if he was about to blast him back, when the portal closed and it just… stopped.

Utter silence.

The green color of Lloyd’s element flickered and disappeared as we all heaved, staring right at a field of green grass while we stood at a path in the middle of a forest. After another second, we all sighed in relief. The tension in everyone’s body evaporated as the others leaned on their knees.

“Holy shit,” Kai muttered, panting.

“Thank the First!” Cole shouted, lying down on the grass. “Another day alive!”

“Here I thought I wouldn’t be able to see the sky again,” Jay lied down beside him, letting out an exaggerated sigh.

“Move aside,” Kai laid down as well.

“I do not understand these motions, but I suppose I shall join,” Zane lied down.

I let myself relax as well, strapping my shamisen on my back again sluggishly. Another time freezing mid-battle. I had to stop doing that.

Misako went to me, putting a hand on my shoulder. “You alright?”

I nodded, giving her a smile. Master Wu passed by us, making me follow him with my eyes as I tried to get my breath steady again. He halted in front of the girl who had saved us while she tied the suzu bell on her belt again.

“If you wouldn’t mind me asking, who are you?” Master Wu said.

Everyone now glanced over to them as the girl gave a bright smile. Her black hair tied into a bun behind her as she bowed at us. “Renge desu. Hajimemashite.”

“Hm. Nice to meet you, Renge-san,” Master Wu bowed as well. “May you tell us why you saved us?”

She stood straight again, but just smiled.

I blinked, glancing at the others who shrugged before I looked at her again.

Master Wu hummed, squinting his eyes. “Hm, my Japanese isn’t as good. So, I apologize in advance.” He cleared his throat. “Dare ni… uh… watashitachi, um…”

I flinched a little, Misako having the same look as we glanced at one another. She sighed before saying, “Dare ni watashitachi o tasuke ni kuru you iwareta n desu ka?”

I stared at her in surprise. “You speak fluent?”

She smiled down at me. “I know how to keep up a conversation, but I’m not as good as you. After all, I’ve traveled around a lot during my years, and I had to learn different languages along the way.” She glanced at Lloyd, eyes narrowed. “I did try to teach a certain someone Japanese, but they kept making up excuses or aren’t paying close attention.”

Lloyd cleared his throat, looking down at the ground and kicked an invisible rock. I chuckled softly, feeling myself lighten up a bit more.

Renge perked up, her bright voice coming to playful again. “Aa! Ojō-sama ni tsukawasa rete mairimashiten.”

I raised a brow. She was sent by her Lady?

“Uh, what did she say?” Jay said.

“Something about being sent by her Lady,” Nya said, crossing her arms. “Kai, don’t give me that look. I paid attention to Mom and Dad.”

I took a step closer to her, frowning a little. “Anata no Ojō-sama wa dochira-sama desu ka?”

Renge just smiled, bowing at me again. “Douzo, kochira e, Hime-sama. Go-annai sasete moraimasu e.”

She turned around and began to walk, following the path down the forest. I turned over to the others. “She said to follow her. She’s going to take us to… her Lady.”

“Are you sure we can trust her?” Nya said, her arms still crossed and eyes squinted. “I know she saved our life, but the fact that she’s talking about ‘her Lady’ telling her to do it’s… kinda weird. Besides, we don’t know her!”

“Gonna agree with her here,” Jay sat up. “She might’ve saved us, but we don’t really know their intentions.”

“Huh, you’re finally thinking for once,” Kai groaned.

“I always think!”

Lloyd sighed, rolling his wrists. “As much as it is a bad idea, we don’t have another choice. We can’t go back Lord Hakuchi’s estate, not after that whole thing happened.”

Master Wu nodded. “We shall follower her. Her Lady did tell her to save us, which means that person might have answers. At least then, we can find a safe place to go.”

“What if it isn’t?” Cole interjected.

“Then, we improvise,” Master Wu smiled, turning and following after Renge who stopped a few feet away. “Come on, let us get moving.”

After one last look at one another, Kai stood, helping Cole and Zane up as we began to follow after the two. Upon seeing this, Renge’s face beamed with delight as she continued on through the path, the bell on her waist letting out gentle dings that relaxed me. Misako stayed by my side, an anchor I currently needed as my thoughts went to Miho again.

Seeming to notice my distress, she put a hand on my arm. “We will see her again.”

I just nodded, truly hoping that was the case as we deeper into the woods and kept following the path.

Chapter Text

Chapter 27

A Lady's Welcome

Everything looked the same. A scenery of never ending trees with my energy beginning to drain. The sun now up above us as the shadows loomed over us. I was grateful that there were shades, or else I would’ve been sweating in this kimono. My steps were slowing more and more, to the point I was at the back of the whole group.

All of them didn’t seem to mind, for sure used to this kind of long walks being the Ninja they were as they kept talking about random things or were just silent and inspected the place. But me? No.

After everything that happened back in Uncle Hakuchi’s estate, the adrenaline now gone, and my constant worry for Miho was not helping. I panted, dragging myself to keep up and not be a burden. They were already protecting me, the last thing I want was to be a full-on sack of potatoes on their back. That wasn’t even a good example, I’m really beginning to blabber.

I needed water. And food. Bad.

Lloyd, who I noticed was always behind us unless needed at the front, glanced at me. His eyes flickered up and down, already knowing he was assessing me. With a deep breath, I rolled my shoulders back and gave a smile, which he only raised a brow. He slowed his pace, now walking beside me.

“You know, you’re just proving my point more by pretending you’re not tired,” he said, looking down at me.

I groaned. “I hate you.”

He smirked. “It’s easy to read. You’re all the way back here.” He chuckled, putting his hands in the pockets of his gi. “Trust me, I’ve been through that before. I remember Dad and I scaling up a mountain for days because we had to stay away from the Overlord from taking my powers that one time.”

He chuckled, shaking his head. “That was a long time ago, but…” he paused, looking down at the ground with a hint of a smile, “I do appreciate Dad for trying. After everything that happened, he tried to atone for his wrong doings by becoming Sensei Garmadon out there in the woods. It was the only time my family was complete.”

I stared at him, my lips parting. So, his dad did become good. I thought some people were just making it up, and I kept hearing things something about a new sensei outside the city. Somewhere far and unknown.

“He taught me how to fight without violence,” Lloyd continued, staring at the distance. “He taught me how to control my inner power. Move mountains, make ourselves paths. He was… incredibly patient with everything.”

He licked his lips before pressing them together. As if remembering something, he let out a chuckle. “I was already whining and groaning, asking ‘why do I have do this when we can just go the other way around?’”

I chuckled as well, imagining a younger version of him having a mini tantrum.

“But he had his reasons. Everything he did he had a reason.” He glanced at me before clearing his throat. “Sorry, getting sentimental there.”

“No, it’s fine.” I nudged him a little. “Kinda like imagining you whining. Makes me wonder what else you threw a tantrum on.”

That made him burst out laughing, noticing the others glancing behind while he just shook his head as they shrugged at one another and focused on ahead. “You have no idea,” he grinned. “I had… a lot of tantrums.”

“And a huge troublemaker!” Kai shouted, a smirk on his face.

“Troublemaker?” I raised a brow.

“Oh, yeah! You remember that time when Lloyd was—what? Ten?” Cole joined, chuckling. “He was making a mess in Jamanakai Village by scaring the villagers there about letting out the Serpentines and being ‘Lord Garmadon’s son.’”

“Yeah! Over candy,” Jay joined.

“And he does that certain laugh,” Zane said, a smirk coming up his face.

Lloyd shifted beside me, making gestures with his hands as if trying to make them stop.

“How did it go again?” Kai clicked his tongue, then snapped his fingers. “Right! It goes like—”

The four boys looked at one another. “Mwahaha!”

Everyone laughed, Jay almost toppling over Zane while Kai and Cole leaned against each other, wheezing. Nya hid behind Pixal, seeming to be trying to hide her own laughter while Misako peeked over at Lloyd with a grin. Even Master Wu was chuckling, but hid it behind a cough.

The corners of my lips lifted, snorting as I covered my mouth. I looked up at Lloyd only to see his face red and his mouth opening and closing. “Guys! Don’t—all of you, be quiet! That was long time ago,” he stammered.

“Still a memorable one. Our great leader!” Kai made a gesture at the air as if presenting the word ‘leader.’

“And the future Green Ninja,” Cole joined.

“All started in a small village demanding candy,” Zane said.

“With a resolution that I simply needed to read him a bed time story why to not fully trust a Serpentine,” Master Wu added, making Lloyd groan louder.

“Yeah, good ol’ times,” Jay said, wiping a tear away. “But, seriously, though, we weren’t expecting a ten-year-old to be the Green Ninja.”

The others nodded, now talking amongst themselves as everyone began to talk about their past missions. Upon glancing up at Lloyd, he had buried his face under his scarf, noticing his ear a deep shade of red.

I chuckled, patting his back. “So, a troublemaker, huh? That gives extra points to your fans.”

He tried to glare at me, but it just made me laugh at how much he was blushing. “Shut up! Don’t start.”

With a groan, he stood straight again and messed with his hair a little. His hand rested on the back of his neck before gesturing at me. “You tired? My first intention before my past was brought up by my team—” he said, glaring at the four with exaggerated words; they just laughed and gave fake, innocent smiles. Lloyd rolled his eyes and continued, “—was to offer if you want me to carry you.”

“Carry me?” I shook my head. The offer was kind, and tempting, but I couldn’t do that to him. He might already be tired and him carrying me would make it worse. I’ve already been enough by dragging them down. “I’ll be fine. For sure we’re close already.”

“How are you even sure? We’ve been walking for a while now, and—who knows—maybe walking in circles,” he gestured around us. “Really, it’s fine. I offered and for sure those tiny legs of yours are already protesting and burning.”

“They’re not tiny!”

“Oh, sorry. Let me rephrase that.” He cleared his throat, then gave me a ‘charming’ smile. “Short.”

I scoffed.

“Trust me, I do workouts, carried heavier stuff than you—not that I’m saying you’re not heavy, which I’m also trying not to say you’re heavy. Damn it,” he groaned, shaking his head and chuckling awkwardly and pinching the bridge of his nose. “I’m not being convincing. But! I’m not trying to insult you here either.”

“Hmm,” I nodded, giving him a look. “You’re doing a great job at that.”

He huffed. “Just let me carry you.”

“Lloyd, seriously, I said I’ll be fine—”

“If you don’t agree with me right now, I’m warning you, your legs are going to ache like hell. I doubt that you had this much physical movement since sophomore year PE.”

The idea of my legs aching made me remember those times that we had to workout for PE back in freshman and sophomore. The thought of it made me shiver, already imagining it and how I could barely walk the next day. I glanced up at him, narrowing my eyes.

He smirked. “Convinced you?”

“I really do hate you.” I sighed, stopping as I gestured for him to do so.

“Yes,” he cheered silently, making me shake my head as he crouched in front of me. “Up-up, Hime.”

“Oh, shush,” I smiled, getting behind him as I wrapped my arms around his neck.

He hooked his arms under my legs and stood again. “There we go. Not that hard, hm?” he said, beginning to walk again. “Just don’t fall asleep on me. If you’re gonna ride, you’re gonna pay.”

“Pay you with what?”

“Conversations.”

I chuckled. “Who made that rule?”

“Me.”

I shook my head, resting my head on his shoulder. This was nice, at least my legs were getting its rest. “Thanks, Lloyd.”

“You’re welcome. You are our top priority, so you’re getting the princess treatment.”

“Because I’m a princess?”

“Well,” he shrugged, “technically.”

“Ha, ha.”

“Hey, no fair!” Jay said, seeing us as Lloyd passed by them. “I want a princess treatment, too.” He turned to Nya. “Would you—”

Nya glared at him. He raised his hands up. The others just laughed.

Misako pinched Lloyd’s cheek, making him groan. “Mom!”

“Look at my boy, being sweet. Isn’t he, Satomi?” she teased.

“Yes, indeed he is. Has good convincing skills, too,” I played along.

Lloyd sighed in defeat. “I’m leading a group filled with bullies. This is just great.”

I ruffled his hair, making him laugh that sounded almost rare and warm just like when I heard it a few nights before. He tried to pull away, but I already messed his hair beyond repair.

When I was satisfied with it, I stopped and rested my chin on his shoulder again. The silence came into the group again, more lighthearted than the one at the beginning.

Lloyd glanced at me, making me catch his gaze. The corners of his eyes crinkled, his green eyes brighter than I had seen it before. Just as he was turning away, a glint of gold came from them.

I blinked, wondering if I had been seeing things or not. It was similar to his waves, but when it didn’t appear again, I just left it be. Probably just seeing things. With a content deep breath out, I just let myself relax.

At the very front, Renge continued to lead, not once joining our conversations—maybe due to her little knowledge of English. Her form had stayed the same as it was from the first time we met her. She had a slight bounce on her steps, easy to miss but there, while her four, golden tails swayed behind her.

She reminded me of a child, and it made me wonder how old she truly was. But there was no doubt she would be older than any of us, especially if she was wearing that armor and had that weapon strapped on her back. Almost like a spear, the same ones those women guards in Byakko Village held.

Continuing on for a few more moments, the trees began to lessen, and something red caught my attention from ahead. I perked up, straightening my back to try and get a better view. Lloyd, seeming to have noticed it as well, picked up his pace. As the trees finally parted, my breath hitched upon the view.

In front stood a red torii gate and a bridge behind it, connecting to the other side. Further in were the sights of full bloomed sakura trees. Their petals slowly descending to the ground in gentle dances.

All of us stared at the beauty, something almost magical that it made me stare in awe. I never knew something like this could exist. The waves of the elements here were calm, swaying slowly like the pace of a lullaby.

Renge stopped, noticing us not following. “Tsuite kite kudasai. Ato sukoshi desu.” She bowed before continuing on.

“What did she say?” Jay asked.

“‘Please follow me. Just a little further,’” Pixal said. “That is what she had said.”

After we crossed the bridge and the not-so-small pond with koi fishes swimming around and a very lush garden, I patted Lloyd to let me down as we came face-to-face in front of yet another large estate. He bent down as I got off, staring at it as the pink petals passed by.

The walkway were surrounded by hanging lanterns, swaying along with the wind. It gave an almost dream-like scenery to the view. I do wonder, who was this Lady? She sure had high taste and a good eye for design.

Renge kept on going, gesturing for us to follow.

“This place seems… relaxing,” Cole whispered.

“Or chilling,” Nya shuddered. “I think I prefer Lord Hakuchi’s estate more than this. But the pond’s nice.”

As we got closer to the entrance, I noticed two statues of foxes on each side of the stairs leading up to the front doors. They were sitting tall, eyes closed with two distinguishable suzu bells on their ears tied with a ribbon, almost making them look like they were earrings.

They reminded me of those statues in temples or on shrines. Now that I thought of it, the estate almost replicated a shrine; instead of those red walls, they were instead dark colored wood and white walls, its tiled roofs a similar shade of charcoal as Uncle Hakuchi’s estate but a tad bit lighter.

Renge went up the stairs, pushing the doors open with a deep creak from it. We climbed up as she stood aside, bowing deeply and holding that position before all of us entered. The inside was as magnificent as the outside, the entrance larger and wider than Uncle Hakuchi’s.

Extravagant, I would say. Polished wooden floors, many closed doors and hallways all around, and yet another statue of the fox in the middle, end wall surrounded by candles. The only difference, there was a pillow with a sphere covered in a silk cloth between its paws.

I squinted my eyes when I noticed it illuminating from the openings below it. They were almost like moving, pulsing like a heart. I shook my head, ignoring it for now but wondered what it was.

On the far wall, I noticed a similar scroll that I had seen in one of Uncle Hakuchi’s hallways—the four children playing to their father. But the other two scrolls were different. Instead of a boy, it was a girl being handed a koto.

And that was when it finally hit me whose estate we were in.

“Satomi,” Lloyd patted my shoulder, making me look up at him. “Come on, we’re going to the next room.”

“I… yeah, of course,” I stammered, causing Lloyd to frown.

“What’s wrong?”

I followed the rest who Renge lead us to another room after shutting the doors behind us. “I think know who this Lady is.”

He seemed to connect it as well, tensing in the process. His expression turned serious. “Then we have to keep vigilant.”

I nodded, fixing my posture and lifting my chin as we came into a large hall.

More and more paintings appeared from one wall to another. Paintings of Shijima and its lands, almost as if telling a story of its history. Vases were there as well, filled with distinct flowers some I recognized and some I didn’t. My ear twitched when I heard the plucking of a sombre tune, and I held my breath.

As we got closer and closer to the doors, the paintings began to show a battle. Lloyd noticed it as well as his jaws tightened, eyes focused on them.

There, I noticed, were paintings of the Oni and Kitsune, about to clash and weapons drawn. Some Kitsune were in their true forms, full fledged majestic foxes, while some had their hands blazing with kitsunebi. A few had orbs floating above their hands with different shades of colors on each.

One of the weapons I recognized was Father’s katana, the same one Miho had taken with her, indicating the man at the front line was him. In his armor and familiar white tails flaring amidst the purple and dark shades of the Oni, and the multiple colors of furs from the Kitsune. He stood out amongst the rest.

On top of a hill, was a woman with a shamisen—instantly recognizing that it was Mom playing Shikisha. Waves of hues radiated out of the strings from her part, looming over the soldiers below as if showing she was leading them. Better yet, supporting them in the fight.

In the next few scrolls, the fight continued on, showing each regions trying to fend for themselves. Some, I noticed, were Kitsune with black tails and was carrying a similar crystal-like vials that Lloyd and Master Wu had.

Sanyu truly held. Those were her vials. Miho and her weren’t kidding, she did had a large impact.

Those dark furred Kitsune were atop of trees, their faces covered, surrounding the Oni who didn’t seem to be aware they were there.

Finally, it showed Mom atop of a cliff, sitting with the shamisen on her lap as it showed the Oni reaching their hands out to the light. My eyes flickered to the next painting, where it showed a wall carved with Oni faces, shaped like a cage, somewhere close by the ocean. Written in Kanji were these words:

永遠に閉鎖。永遠に封印。

“Forever closed. Forever sealed.”

And that very same painting, the woman wasn’t there anymore, except Shikisha resting on the cliff. Then I caught sight of the next few words:

一つの命を賭して、一つの国のために。

“One life given for one realm.”

Mom.

A hand made me look up at Lloyd, who offered a small, sad smile. I patted his hand.

But something else took my attention.

Rather than letting it end on that painting, there were blank scrolls hung up as if a missing part of the history.

A continuation. Waiting for the unknown to happen.

I stared, wondering what was the reason for that at all.

Renge knocked on the door, snapping me out of my thoughts as she waited while the song continued inside. Without stopping, a smooth and mesmerizing voice came from behind.

“Let them in.”

Renge opened the door, and with her limited English, she said, “She is inside.” With a last bow, she left.

We all stood there for a moment, none of us making the first move. To be honest, I was hesitant to meet the person behind that door. After one final look at one another, Lloyd went inside first before I followed.

At the front, surrounded by luxurious-looking pillows and silk blankets, was a woman. In front of her was a koto.

The koto, which was incredibly polished as if it was constantly done, sparkled under the lantern lights. I could see intricate carvings on it; swirls, twisting into indescribable things that it reminded me of dreams. Where everything didn’t made sense and was easily forgotten the moment someone wakes up.

Her finger picks, tsume, didn’t appear to be plastic or bamboo; and when I squinted my eyes, I knew that they were made of ivory. After all, those picks were made from only of those three sources.

The air surrounding her called for attention, the room scented with something floral and almost seductive. She wore an immense amount of layers of her red and white houmongi—it almost made me mistake it for a miko outfit. The only thing that made me realize that it wasn’t was the elegant design of the obi that she wore with its similar, hypnotic patterns at the bottom edges.

Her face was covered with thick make-up, face painted white, and her eyes outlined exaggeratedly to make them sharper. Hair in a tight, voluminous knot with some intricate twists and braids, almost making it appear like a flower. And, adorned on her hair, was a polished jade kanzashi, carved into flowers with a fox poking out. On her ears were suzu bells tied on ribbons like the statues outside.

This room was like her throne room.

“You have come,” the woman said, spreading her nine, golden tails.

She opened her eyes and it locked straight to mine, making my breath hitch.

She was… beautiful.

Radiant, almost like the sun.

A grin came up her face. “As I expected.” Her hands came flat onto the strings, making the vibrations stop and dampened the song.

I took a deep breath in and bowed. “Aunt Asami.”

A surprised voice came from behind me, already making me recognize it as Jay’s. “Wait, Aunt?!”

“Hmm,” a shift came from her as she stood and came down to our level.

She began to circle me, running her hands on my tails as if checking the texture and whether it was groomed. I heard the strings of the shamisen softly plucked making me tense.

After a while, she stopped and tilted my chin up; her touch was gentle and soft. Our eyes locked at one another, her expression unreadable.

“Almost the same fur as Nee-chan, but I suppose Shōgun-dono’s white fur mixed with hers caused yours to be a more lighter silver.” A warm smile came up her lips that surprised me a little, causing me to relax at the sight of it. “And your beauty is extraordinary. That is good.”

She let go of my face, heading for the others this time.

I released a quiet breath out before turning around as I watched her inspect each of them.

She nodded or took their hands, looking at their palms, then the back of their hands. Almost like a fortune teller trying to read their future and who they were deep inside.

Her eyes flickered over to Master Wu, raising a brow as if in recognition before letting out an almost thoughtful hum as she gave him a nod.

“A welcome to see you again, your father’s spirit lies in you. Easily distinguishable. It made me instantly recognize you as his son.”

Master Wu, the ever wise elder he was, just gave a smile and a bow as if in awe of her insight. She did the same, almost in respect.

The others that she had passed by glanced at me in question, and I just shrugged. I don’t get her either. But, it doesn’t seem like she was doing anything wrong.

That didn’t mean letting our guards down. After all, she did send Renge to help us.

The question: how did she know?

She stopped in front of Zane and Pixal, squinting her eyes and touching their faces before tapping it softly. “Interesting. Looks real, yet made of metal.”

She moved on to Misako who she looked up and down, fixing her collar and smoothing it out. Then, she stopped right at Lloyd who had been quietly observing her.

His gaze were unreadable, neutral. Haven’t changed since we were heading to Aunt Asami’s room.

Aunt Asami stared back. “Your eyes, Lloyd-san—” I frowned, how did she know his name? “Is it green due to yours powers as the Green Ninja?”

Lloyd’s brow twitched. “Yes.”

Her eyes flickered down and touched the vial tied to his gi. “Hmm, halfway finished.” She glanced up at him again. “While your uncle’s barely there yet.” She turned and went back to her throne of cusions. “I advise you to just take drops, not large gulps. Unless you want everyone to know your blood.”

How the hell does she know all of this? Lloyd seemed to have stiffened, and the others shifted as if getting ready to summon their elements.

I began to reach for my bachi.

Aunt Asami raised a hand. “I am not here to fight. I know you all are too tired for that, especially after my idiotic brother came to conclusions it would be a splendid idea to march up to Hakuchi-ni’s estate.” She scoffed, shaking her head. “No, that is not my intention. My intention is far away from quareling.”

“Wait. Wait a moment!” Jay cut. “How did you know we needed help?”

A smile came up her lips. “I saw.”

“Huh?”

“Saw?” Master Wu said, running his hand through his beard with his eyes squinted.

Aunt Asami nodded. “Or at least fragments of it.”

“Miho was not able to give us the full details of Asami-san here,” Zane pointed out before turning to Aunt Asami. “Do you mind sharing with us?”

She gave a smile. “I am surprised Miho-sama did not tell you. I would be grateful… but I have noticed she is not with you.”

I looked down, clutching my kimono. “She stayed behind, trying to protect us.”

“Hmm.” She nodded, staring down at her koto, her fingers hovering above the strings. She cleared her throat. “As for my power, I am able to see—or at least some—of the future.”

“So, you do indeed have clairvoyance,” Master Wu said.

She nodded slowly. “Indeed I do, Son of the First. Though, most jumps further than the other. Sometimes out of order. It is up to me how to connect all of them. Due to it, I sometimes paint them to make sense of all of them.”

That was a powerful power, being able to see even a fragment of the future. If that came from Grandfather, gifted to Aunt Asami, that meant he trusted her enough with such power.

Was that how she was surviving this war? Being able to see what was Uncle Hiroshi’s next move?

“Is that how you learned that we needed help?” Lloyd said. “And how you know us?”

Aunt Asami nodded again. “Indeed, Lloyd-san, that is how I knew you all would need my assistance. Upon seeing it, I saw how far the sun was up, where specifically Renge-chan must stand in the forest, and when she must open the portal that I have given her.” She rolled her shoulders, straightening her form. “Quick flashes, small hints—but! They were enough to give me a full story.”

Silence came from our group as her attention went to me again. We locked eyes. “I am glad that you are well, Senritsu. If you had been taken by Hiroshi, it will not end well for Shijima.”

I frowned. “What do you mean?”

She sighed, shaking her head. “For sure by now you all understand that he and I are at war with one another for the throne.” We all give our little agreements before she continued, “As much I care and love Hiroshi, he is not suitable to be the one to sit on the throne.”

“Are you saying that you’re the good bet here?” Kai said, earning a nudge from Nya.

“At first, that was my intention,” she looked down at her koto again. “I care for this realm—for Shijima. I want what is best for it and my people. And this war is not the answer. I want it done that is why I keep fighting as I know Hiroshi would not stop until he made his point that he is strong enough to have the throne. That he is worthy of it.”

She glanced up at us again, mostly glueing on me. “But, now that you are here, niece, perhaps this will end soon.” Her smile came up again, tiny. “That is my intention. Alliance with you to halt this war.”

My breath hitched, not expecting someone who was one of the people to cause the war asking us for alliance. Then again, we needed all the help we could get. But also, how can we trust her when she was one of the causes of this civil war?

“What about the throne?” Nya said. “Who will take it?”

“We shall see. After all, Nee-chan’s daughter is here with us now.”

My lips parted from her words. She has such high faith in me—it was just our first time meeting and she was already saying those things about me.

To meet a family member who I barely knew and only have met for a few hours, and to earn such praise from them was… new.

But it eased me a little. It lifted some of the weight, giving more fuel to my fire. To know that someone besides the Ninja and Miho to know that I could do it. Especially it came from my aunt. It was something I didn’t know I needed.

Maybe… we could trust her. She seemed honest about her words, and she hadn’t done anything to harm us. She even saved our lives, even though she didn’t had to and just let us fall to our faiths.

Aunt Asami stood, heading towards my direction again as she put a hand on my shoulder. “You must be starving, I know your journey here to my home was far. So, in advance, I had instructed my cooks to make you all a meal. Follow me.”

Everyone seemed to hesitate for a moment, but Master Wu just gave a nod to everyone as he began to follow us. I turned my head to look behind, seeing Lloyd at the back of the group with his hands on his chest again. Noticing my gaze, he just smiled and his hand fall to his side again.

Was it the letter?

“There are many options there on the table. I do not know what food you adore, niece, but my favorite—and simply something I could not afford to deny—are the fish dishes. Specifically the eels,” Aunt Asami said, making me smile at the sound of excitement.

I kept quiet on our way there, soon arriving to a grand diner room with food laid out on the table. Steam raised up from the food, indicating that they were recently just finished.

“Go on, do not be shy.” Aunt Asami sat on the head seat, gesturing at the table. “Accompany me. Let us have lunch.”

Chapter Text

Chapter 28

The Sun

The lunch provided for us by Aunt Asami was indeed incredible. The seafood dishes that she talked about—especially unagi donburi and the miso glazed salmon—were the best on the whole table. I even noticed Misako urging Lloyd to try it, which he did and recommended it to the others in the process.

“Everything here are freshly cooked and captured from the ocean,” Aunt Asami said as she ate her own bowl of rice. “The ingredients are grown from the backyard where I have specifically instructed my people to plant. After all, I could not afford anything more but the best for everyone in my estate and guests.”

She served us some sake, which I was hesitant at first as it was my first time trying. Kai didn’t hesitate to have some, including Misako and Master Wu, which surprised me that Master Wu does drink as I’ve only seen him drink tea.

The others soon followed to try it. Cole didn’t like, Jay almost chocked, Nya went for another, and Lloyd. He was hesitant at first, glancing over to his mother and uncle who nodded at him to go on—closed his eyes and tried it. When he took a sip, raised a brow—after a second pause—asked for another.

I have seen my adopted parents drink sake, but I have never tried it due to being underage. But, now that I am eighteen and Aunt Asami gave me permission, the other adults in the room doesn’t seem to mind. So, I tried it.

It burned at first, making me clear my throat and wince; but I couldn’t deny how smooth it went down my throat, how it tasted good. Its fruity and floral scent present in the taste, and how it made my whole body feel warm.

“It tastes better with a hearty meal and splendid company,” Aunt Asami said with a grin, drinking another.

I smiled, but didn’t ask for another after that even how good it tasted with the food. Maybe someday I would get used to it.

As she was about to take another drink, I noticed a subtle look in her eyes. They were a bit glazed, distant, almost as if remembering a nostalgic memory. I wonder what she was thinking at that moment? Her attention flickered to me and it instantly disappeared, she put down her cup and smiled at me with warmth. With a nod, she gestured for me to keep eating. And I did.

By the time the dishes were empty and barely anything was there except fish bones, we stayed together for a moment as Master Wu and Misako asked some questions to Aunt Asami about her estate. She answered each of their question with ease, not once stammering as her posture stayed elegant, straight, and her smile more and more warm as the day continued on. She was the absolute opposite of Uncle Hiroshi, maybe even Uncle Hakuchi combined.

Aunt Asami was more welcoming, and it made me feel at ease being in her estate even at how large the place was. I couldn’t help but wonder if the war wasn’t happening if Uncle Hiroshi wouldn’t be as menacing and frightening as he was when we encountered him? I do wonder what he was like back then before the Oni Invasion happened and when Grandfather Hinoki was still alive.

Suddenly, Cole asked a question that seemed that not only I noticed but the others as well. “Why are you wearing those?” he said, pointing at something atop his head where our, Kitsune, ears would be.

The suzu bells.

“I was introduced to them by Miho-sama,” she said, her tone lighter than before. Aunt Asami paused, a soft, distant look in her eyes. “Long time ago, when she was our Caretaker, when we were kits, I sometimes see her performing the Miko Kagura dance in the garden at night.”

She glanced at me with a small smile. “For sure you have noticed it from her outfit, niece, she indeed used to train in a temple in an island not so far from the palace before she became a Shūei. Our traditions here are slightly different than in Ninjago, for sure, as they are also trained to fight. Though, it was mostly their decisions. Either become a full time Miko in the temple or become a Caretaker.”

She chuckled softly, as if at a private memory. “Besides that point, I became fascinated with the kagura suzu that it became my second instrument. Even though its only purpose is to cleanse and be performed alone. Miho-sama taught me the different kinds of kagura dances, and I know them by heart. Other than that, I simply love the gentle and mystical sounds they sing out. It lets me sleep at night. I have some hanging in my room like wind chimes.”

That seemed to have satisfied Cole enough, even though he asked Zane what was a kagura dance, which Zane explained to him.

Who knew that Aunt Asami and Miho sounded to be close with one another. I wonder if Miho would’ve been ecstatic to see her especially how Aunt Asami sounded so found of her? Now that I think of it, besides from Sanyu, I never knew much of Miho’s past than this and being the Caretaker.

She’d been so quiet with everything and serious that it doesn’t appear like she would take some time to tell everything about herself. Had she been close to the rest of the Hinko siblings like she has with Aunt Asami?

Even so, she didn’t seem so different when she met Uncle Hakuchi again, but she was very protective.

I wonder if she had been like that with Mom.

After that moment of rest and conversations, Aunt Asami stood and waved a hand as the household staff walked closer and bowed. “Please guide our guests to their rooms and prepare a warm bath for them. Clean their current clothes as well, and make sure they are taken care of.”

The staff bowed again and began to lead the others away. I was about to follow when Aunt Asami took my shoulder. “You are going to follow me niece. There is a room that fits you better than the guest rooms.”

I hesitated, glancing as the others began to exit the dinning room. Misako stopped for a moment, her head going from left to right as if noticing I wasn’t there before turning around as we locked eyes.

I opened my mouth, hesitant to be parted with them as I held Shikisha close. It wasn’t because I didn’t trust Aunt Asami, but that I didn’t want to be far from the people I have been traveling with for the past few days. Not especially when Miho has already been separated from us. The thought of separating with the group wasn’t helping, and it made me feel more vulnerable without their constant reassuring presence.

Please, I don’t want to stay away.

As if reading my plea, Misako gave a gentle smile and mouthed, “It’s going to be okay.”

I swallowed the fear inside, just nodding as Aunt Asami rested her hand on my shoulder and began to lead me to another door. I glanced behind, watching as the doors closed behind them and disappeared from view.

Clutching the the shamisen closer, I glanced ahead as a silence came between Aunt Asami and I. The bells on her ears constantly dinged with each step, the only sound I focused on as I tried to put away my anxiety. Her hand was still on my shoulder, making me glance at it.

Only then I noticed more suzu bells wrapped around her wrist, but something else caught my attention. There was a gap on the ribbon, if I would guess, at least two missing suzu bells.

Did she lose them?

“Senritsu-chan, you are very tense” Aunt Asami said, causing me to snap out of my thoughts and look up at her. She stared at me, almost as if assessing me, but that gentle smile was still on her face, easing me a little.

“Gomen nasai, Oba,” I bowed a little as we continued to walk.

“Formal,” she mused. “That is good you have formalities. It is something us Hinoki family must have.”

“Hai.”

We went deeper into the halls, large scrolls filled with traditional paintings hung on the walls. Some showed each region of Shijima and its people, while another showed a village. There was a large tree at the middle with a shimenawa wrapped around it. Villagers surrounded it, seeming to be celebrating some kind of festival as the four siblings were there with their instruments, smiling and playing.

Then, my thoughts went back to what Uncle Hakuchi told me. The Kagaribi Akari Festival. The one where they play that song in my dream together.

“Hinoki Village,” Aunt Asami began, stopping as we faced the painting. “The very first village ever made and the tree the same age as Father. They have dedicated that place to him, and Father himself planted that tree. The tree is believed to harbor the spirits of our ancestors.”

I stared at it for a moment longer, seeing how the four of them appeared to be at peace. Mother sat beside Uncle Hakuchi with Aunt Asami on his left. Uncle Hiroshi stood behind on Mom’s right with an odaiko in front of him, mid bang.

“By that time, Nee-chan was already the Mother. The Kagaribi Akari Festival is the important part of the year, celebrating the ones who has passed and the day where all of Shijima comes to one place to unite.” She gestured at it, pointing at something. “You see those lanterns surrounding it?”

I squinted my eyes, seeing some lanterns around the tree and in people’s hands, flames in different colors as if alive. I nodded.

“We put those for the ones who has passed,” she continued. “It would stay there for days on end, the flames ablaze as we believe that its the spirit of our ancestors’ doing. Letting us know that they are there watching over Shijima.” We began to walk again. I stared at the painting for a moment before focusing on Aunt Asami as she kept talking and her voice almost a whisper, “Natsumi-nee had composed a song for our Father, something we Hinoki children play for him.”

“Chōwa no Uta,” I said.

She raised a brow. “Did Hakuchi-ni tell you of it?”

I nodded. “That Mom composed it for Grandfather’s two-thousand years of ruling and something you guys play in the festival every year.”

She hummed, nodding. “At least Nii-san told you some of our history.”

My eyes went past her, landing on yet another painting. This one showed of two girls, one with silver fur and the other the similar golden fur as Aunt Asami. Noticing my broken attention, she glanced up at it and there was a shift in her eyes. Becoming softer than it already was. We suddenly stopped again and her grip on my shoulder tightened a little as she stared at it. Her lips parted, almost as if holding her breath as her eyes flickered all over it.

“Daijyōbou, Oba?” I raised a hand, hesitating and unsure if I could put a comforting hand on her arm.

She blinked, shaking her head. “Gomen ne, I did not mean to go silent.” With a deep breath, she released my shoulder and went close to it. “This was the first painting that your mother and I painted together.”

I stared at it, only now noticing the difference of both of the girls. The styles of the brush strokes and the coloring different. One was strong, bold, and precise while the other was a bit jagged as if a line was brushed over twice.

Another silence came from Aunt Asami, almost as if she was reliving that moment as she reached a hand over and placed her hand atop of it.

“Your mother wanted us to paint something together. She insisted upon it when Miho told us to paint something as an assignment.” A broken chuckle came from her, still staring at it. “Natsumi-nee was the worst painter there is to ever exist. Well, not in our Father’s eyes.”

I chuckled softly, nibbling at the inside my lip as my chest tightened. At least now I know where I got my artistic skills from. I always did hate drawing since I was a kid, I always try my best to get away from it.

When there’s a project at school that said I had to draw, I would ask the teacher if there was an alternative and take it at an instant when they say that there is. Whatever it was, it didn’t matter from needing to write a three to four page essay from presenting for at least five minutes in front of the class, as long as it wasn’t drawing.

Aunt Asami caressed it with her thumb before she walking back beside me. “I was hesitant at first, but after the amount of pleading from her, I finally agreed. Then, after it, we presented it to Miho-sama.”

“Did she approve of it?”

She scoffed, a playful one as she chuckled. “No. She told us to do another one all over again. Separately.”

I laughed, making her laugh with me. Her shoulders dropped a little as if this conversation was putting her more and more at ease. It was to me, and I’m far more grateful to know I have an aunt who seemed to be very close to Mom. At least I can know more of her through them. Through the stories and the memories that they had together when they were young.

“Though, she did say that it captured the both of us perfectly. Even how strict and serious she is sometimes, Miho-sama has good intentions and means well. She is, in my opinion, the greatest teacher,” she said, another fond smile on her face when she mentioned Miho again.

I wondered if she and Miho were very close. The way she said her name was filled with affection and a hint of admiration.

“We painted one another, not ourselves. So, she let us keep it.” She paused for a moment as if deep in thought. “Everyone always compared us to the sun and moon.”

“Why so?”

She began to walk again and I followed. “Your mother was a very social person, though sensitive to emotions and everything around her. While I stayed mostly inside the palace, trying to perfect my artistic skills and my use of Shingetsu—my koto.”

She paused for a moment, taking a breath then continued, “Before Hiroshi was even born, Mother told us that she had so much energy when she was just a kit and would constantly get her fur dirty in the backyard.”

That made me smile, imagining the ruler of Shijima, my mother, rolling around the dirt for fun. Hard to believe that the Mother of Shijima could be like that. Nonetheless, the one who had stopped the Oni Invasion.

“I have witnessed her do it before, she would try to urge me to join her as well as Hakuchi-ni. But Nii-san and I were more reserved, while her and Hiroshi were the ones always getting into trouble. They are inseparable when it comes to those situations.” She released a sigh, continuing, “Climbing trees, chasing after beetles, causing trouble for the palace staff whenever they get a chance of it.”

“Mom was like that?” I grinned.

“Hard to imagine, ne?” She smirked at me. “But, oh, by our Father’s name, there was this one time that made me embarrassed for something she had done. I believe as well that Hakuchi-ni and Hiroshi—and everyone watching—felt the same as I did.”

I waited, squinting my eyes. What could it possibly be that Mom had done that made them all feel like that?

She leaned closer, whispering, “She tripped and fell into a pond while she was playing her shamisen and singing because she was trying to woo your father.”

I snorted, almost choking in my saliva. “She what?”

She laughed again, her hand dabbing the corners of her eyes with her kimono. “She had been admiring Shōgun-dono for at least a year now. He was quiet, reserved, and fresh out of Byakko Region. The Fuyuhiko Family are quite close with Father. As the best of the fighters in Byakko, and the only son of the late Master Fuyuhiko, your father was sent to the palace and became a royal guard.

“He went up the rank with ease—a patient fighter, determined, and a leader that has that gaze that makes you cower away from him. Your mother absolutely adored it and fell for him.” She chuckled. “The reason why she is always by the pond is because that is where your father always goes to meditate, and sometimes practice on his own.”

I blinked, processing all of that. Mom fell in love with Dad because he was quiet and reserved? “I thought Dad courted Mom?”

“Natsumi-nee works the opposite. Knowing Shōgun-dono, I believe he would have stuck to his training if she had not done something. Because when that happened,” she smirked down at me, “he actually cracked a smile.”

My breath hitched at the reveal, making me more intrigued at my parents’ love story.

“Slowly but surely, the glacier began to melt because of the sun. Father noticed it and gave Natsumi-nee permission to choose Shōgun-dono. Even though your father does not fully show it, he loves Nee-chan as much as she loves him.”

I smiled at that revelation, finally knowing both my parents besides being the Shōgun and the Mother of Shijima. They were like us. Normal people who have their own lives and has their own amusements and embarrassing moments.

My grip on the strap of the shamisen tightened, the thought of them making me tear up. If the Oni Invasion ever happened… I wondered what my life with them would’ve been like? I wonder what Dad will teach me, and what stories Mom will tell me. What she will do, what kind of parents they would be like, how would Shijima be at those times.

If those Oni hadn’t invaded… none of this would’ve happened. I wouldn’t have been sent to Ninjago. The war wouldn’t be happening currently, and my parents would still be alive. I clenched my jaws, trying to hold back the tears.

But we couldn’t change anything.

This was the present, and all we could do was keep moving.

Aunt Asami soon stopped in front of a fusuma door, richly decorated with mountains and waterfalls. I halted as well as she slid it open and went inside. She gestured at me to follow her. With a bow, I went in, only for my breath to hitch upon seeing such a luxurious and well-organized room.

There was a shelf of scrolls on one end of the room, a futon on the other that appeared to be the most comfortable one yet I have seen. More expensive furnitures were there with a small bonsai sitting by the windowsill and some folding screens. A chabudai close by the shelf with a brush, tea set, and an incense letting out a trail of smoke as it filled the room with a calming scent.

I stood frozen there for a moment, surprised for Aunt Asami to let me stay in such a room. Yes, Uncle Hakuchi had let me stay in almost a similar, well-organized room, but this one appeared to be more extravagant and more feminine.

Hesitantly taking a step forward, I browsed around, running my hands on the expensive-looking wood and staring at the healthy bonsai. I placed the shamisen to the side for a moment, letting my shoulder rest as I sat on the futon.

There was a silence as I closed my eyes for a moment, releasing a sigh that made my tense shoulders drop.

Thank goodness, this room felt… comfortable. I felt like sleeping now, the incense not helping me stay awake.

A sudden pluck from the shamisen caused me to straighten up, glancing behind me as I saw Aunt Asami holding it in her arms.

She had a small frown, staring at her hands as if playing it had hurt her. “So, it is true that even us can become drained of it,” I heard her mutter.

“Sorry?” I said, a bit confused on her statement.

She smiled. “It seems to me… we, ourselves, are restricted to playing our siblings’ instruments unless we are given permission by the owner.”

“I thought it only applies to the ones who isn’t blood related? Miho told me,” I said hesitantly.

“That is true as well,” she went to me, sitting down with the shamisen still in her arms. “But we are also limited to it even though we are blood related. We can use it, but only some of its power, not the fullest.”

I stared, still not sure about the full rule of it.

As if sensing my confusion, she kept going, “If I let you play my koto, you would not have the power to see the future like I do, and some other of its power. It is up to me to give you that permission—the fullest of it so that the effect and the power that it possess may also be accessed to you. Of course, the owner may also retract that permission to pull that access away from that person.”

I let out an acknowledged hum, staring at the shamisen as well with new found information. My thoughts suddenly drifted back to the son and father back at the museum. How Aoki demanded Miho to give up both the shamisen and me.

Even though they have the shamisen and gave it to whoever they work for, it wouldn’t have the amount of power that person needed to have the advantage to this war. I tensed a little at the remembrance, making me glance up to my aunt as she ran her fingers through the strings.

Who did they worked for? She did mention back in the museum whether it was Uncle Hiroshi who sent them. But… we have not seen them when they came to Uncle Hakuchi’s estate.

Noticing my stare, she glanced up. “What is it, niece?”

I swallowed the lump in my throat for a moment, hesitant to say the words I wanted to say. If I asked that, it would put us in grave danger. But, I hoped, in the back of my mind, that she wasn’t.

Holding my breath, I asked, “Do you know two Kitsune by the names Isamu and Aoki?”

A silence came in the room as she stared at me. The smile on her face disappeared as her expression became serious. That made me tense, my eyes flickering to the shamisen then back to her. I held my breath as she shifted a little. Maybe I shouldn’t have asked that.

Preparing myself for the worst, she placed the shamisen down. “I know them,” she said. “They were someone who trained with your father. Isamu was a general at the time, Aoki and your father were friends who always spar with one another. The father and son, known Ginko warriors who has a fighting style that protected each other’s weaknesses. They are strong by themselves, but they are formidable when together.”

“Do they—”

“No. They are my idiotic brother’s men,” she cut me off. Her gaze softened again, brows creased. “I have already told you, I am not here to fight you or your friends. I simply want this war finished just like you and your friends have come here for in the first place. And the only way for it to finish is with this.”

She placed a hand on the shamisen. “I hope you will make the right choice, Senritsu. I guided you all here—saved you—because I want us to work together. Not for the throne, but for this war to end. Now that my brother knows you are here, and possibly know that I wast the one who saved you and your friends, I do not doubt he will take drastic measures to do what he can to stop us from becoming allies.”

I released my held breath for a moment, her words letting me relax. She does know them, but it only confirmed that Uncle Hiroshi was the one who sent them. Thank goodness Miho was there to protect us.

But the revelation that Uncle Hiroshi might come here and try to prevent an alliance made me stiffen. I closed my eyes, feeling that tiredness again and the thoughts making me more worried than before.

Maybe it’s my drowsiness that was making me think these things.

As if noticing my fatigue, Aunt Asami guided me to lie down on the futon. I let her guide me as I went under cover and pulled the blanket up, leaving the shamisen beside me.

“Rest for now, niece, you deserve it.” She stood, heading for the door. “I will send some of the attendants to give you bath later.”

I watched her for a moment, unable to let out words as I closed my eyes. My tiredness finally catching up, and I instantly fell asleep.

Chapter Text

Chapter 29

The Moon

The faint sound of a koto caused me to stir as my eyes fluttered open. I blinked a couple of times, my vision hazy as I sat up. A groan escaped me as my head ached, instantly making me shut my eyes again and rub my temple.

I shouldn’t have done that too quickly. As a second passed, everything began to focus—but my surroundings were still a bit fuzzy as if I was in a dream.

I glanced around, remembering everything that had happened and that I was in a room Aunt Asami led me to. The shamisen was still at the side of the futon, just like how we had left it before I went to sleep.

My ears twitched when another pluck from the koto caught my attention, directing my eyes to the door. With another painful pulse in my head and a hiss, I stood and grabbed the shamisen with me.

What was with this headache? I was fine earlier. Maybe it was something I ate or drank. I shouldn’t have tried that sake.

Dragging myself to the door, I slid it open, checking left to right before I went down the hall to my left. The sound of the koto continued, the song now coming together rather than just random plucks. It was mesmerizing, calming, and slow, almost like a lullaby that I wanted to get closer to and listen up front. I followed it, going through the halls aimlessly and merely relying on my ears if I’m getting closer or not. I blinked a couple of times, trying to see more in the darkness. Why was it dark? Was everyone asleep? Don’t foxes have good eye sight in the dark or am I just assuming that they do?

After a couple more turns and long hallways, I soon arrived at the dinning area again. The moment I took a step closer to the table, the music had suddenly stopped, making me alert at the sudden silence. I glanced around, the table empty, and everything so still. A chill ran down my spine, causing me to pull the shamisen closer to me as a closure. There were so many doors, which way was to the main hall again?

All of a sudden, a loud crash made me jump—my heart leaping up to my throat as I turned to the direction of the sound. It was silent, then a scream and more crash came from its direction as if two people were fighting. Without thinking, I broke into a full sprint, my mind racing with possibilities. Are we in danger? Did someone just fall? Was it Uncle Hiroshi? Did they find out who helped us? Did he finally have enough and just want to fight Aunt Asami head-on?

I soon burst into another room, panting as I was now standing in the room where we first met Aunt Asami. I froze as I saw the room in a large mess. The silk sheets tattered and expensive pillows sliced open, vases scattered on the ground, and some splats of red were on the white sheets. It made me gag, making me cup my mouth.

But, what made every part of me cold was Aunt Asami’s koto. My body shook as I went to it, falling to the ground as its strings were broken and the wood scattered into pieces. My breath began to pick up, mind reeling at the thought of something as important as this sacred koto can be broken.

No one told me it can be broken.

I hissed again, grabbing my head as the headache suddenly banged onto my head.

Another scream caught my attention, causing me to become alert and forget about the pain for a moment. It was closer. Louder. I instantly ran, pulling the shamisen closer to me. As I parted the doors, my eyes darted from the broken and tattered paintings of the Oni Invasion. The earlier beauty and story of this hallway as we had seen it at first was all gone and shattered. I tried to ignore it as I kept running, hearing more and more of the clashes and the bangs from the room in front of me.

My headache worsened, causing me to grit my teeth together before bursting yet to another room. Now at the main hall. Just like the rest, it was a mess, the statue broken and pieces on the floor. I tried to steady my breath, heaving as I kept shaking. But then, there was a body lying in the middle of the room, making squint my eyes only for me to recognize it.

“Miho!” I shouted, running to her and kneeling as I rolled her to lie on her back. I gasped, cupping my mouth with my hands as I saw the blood seeping through her miko outfit. The whiteness of her top now pooled with red, spreading more and more on the wooden floor. Her eyes were glazed, lips parted, and her skin paler than before.

My hand shook, unsure what to do. “Miho,” I called, voice cracking as it became harder to breath and the pain in my head worsened.

“Why?” She muttered, making me freeze. “Why did you leave me?”

“Miho-san, I’m sorry. We… we didn’t have a choice,” I said, swallowing the lump in my throat. “Uncle Hiroshi’s men were on us, and we were—”

“You should’ve made your choice.”

“Choice? What choice?”

Her eyes went to me, a painful groan coming from her as she reached for the strap of the shamisen. “Why didn’t you made your choice? How could you abandon us? After everything I had done for you…”

I froze, watching as her breathing started to wheeze. Her grip began to weaken and I reached for her hand, making me flinch at how cold they were. “Miho,” I called, but her eyes stared at the ceiling, her face fully pale. “Miho-san!”

The front door creaked open, making me look up as I heard shouts and familiar clashes of steel from outside. A familiar blonde hair and green gi appeared. I instantly stood, but didn’t leave my spot beside Miho. He panting heavily as I caught a glimpse of him carrying a smaller, unmoving form, but I couldn’t make out who. He closed the heavy doors with all his strength, pushing it with his body, before leaning onto it.

“Lloyd?” I called.

A heavy silence came between us as he kept panting. Nothing came from him, his back still facing me. I took a few steps forward, moving closer to him. Reaching a hand, I asked, “What’s happening? Is everyone fighting? Is Uncle Hiroshi here? Did he finally—”

“Why?” he suddenly said, making me stop as I stared at his back.

“W-what?”

“Why didn’t you just give it?” he muttered, his tone sounded… angry.

“Give what? Give what, Lloyd?”

“The shamisen!” he shouted, making me flinch. The tone echoed inside the grand hall, repeating his words. “Why didn’t you just give it? Why did you have to run away?”

I shook my head, taking a step forward. “I don’t get it. I don’t know what you guys are trying to tell me—”

“If you weren’t so much of a coward none of this would’ve happened!” He turned and faced me. And the sight in front of me made me fully go cold.

Tears swelled up my eyes as in his arms was Misako.

Lifeless.

Bleeding.

Unmoving.

I looked up at him, meeting eyes blazing with an anger I’d never seen cross his face before—an anger that made me instinctively step back.

“If you hadn’t just stood there—if you had just given Asami the shamisen, none of this wouldn’t have happened!”

I flinched again, the headache making me whimper. “I’m sorry…” I tried to say, tears streaming down my face as I walked closer. “I’m sorry.”

He shook his head slowly, tears streaming down his face as that expression stayed. “You’re not.”

“I am.”

“You’re not!” He shouted that his words echoed in the vast room.

I closed my eyes, crying more as I pulled the shamisen closer.

“If you were… you would’ve done something,” he said, voice broken and small now. “Now look what you did.”

He stepped away from the door, going to a corner as he kneeled and hugged his mother. I stared for a moment, jaws clenched as he closed his eyes and just hugged her. With a sniff and looking back at the front, I reached for the door. Hands shaking and with all the might that I had, I pulled the doors open only to be met with fire.

Fighting.

Bodies.

Blood.

The forest we had passed through scorched and gone. The once peaceful Shijima all in ruins. My eyes flickered to the fallen bodies. Some people I didn’t recognize, but the sight of two instantly known figures made me want to puke. Nya lied there dead, pierced by arrows all over her body. One straight to her heart. Jay beside her, holding her hand as blood was trickling down his lips and a deep slash wound was on his back. A familiar pendant of the Yin and Yang was poking out from both their gi.

I shook my head, seeing the couple there.

A movement caught my attention as I looked over to where the pond was.

Cole was still alive and breathing, but he fought with everything he had as he made a wall made of stone in front of the bridge, trying to hold of Uncle Hiroshi’s men in their familiar black armor from trying to break into the estate. Beside him was Kai, shouting orders that I could barely even make out as everything blurred and mixed together. Half of Zane’s face was missing, sparks coming out as he held it but still tried to assist as much as he could. Pixal was kneeling beside Master Wu, putting pressure on his wound where he had been shot.

My breathing began to pick up as I stared, shuddering as I took a step back. I did this?

“That…” I heard from Lloyd again, making me glance at him. He wasn’t looking at me, but he continued, “That is for the decision that you made.”

I took another step back. His words echoing in my head as my headache pounded causing me to groan.

“This is your choice,” he said one more time.

I closed my eyes, falling to the floor as I blocked my ears. Tears upon tears fell from my eyes as it kept repeating and repeating and repeating.

Your choice.

Your choice.

Your choice.

“STOP IT!” I screamed.

* * *

I gasped, sitting up. Breath heavy and quick as my eyes flickered everywhere.

I was in the room Aunt Asami gave.

The shamisen was beside me.

I looked out the window, seeing the moon and the heavy clouds.

My breathing began to calm down, letting a shaky breath out.

It was just a nightmare.

Unable to hold it back, I cupped my face and cried. I don’t if it was relief or something else, but my body shook as the images of my friends and the chaos imbedded itself in my head. Even how much I tried to get it out of my head… it just resurfaced again. I was thankful it wasn’t real. But the chances of it happening…

Miho…

Misako…

Jay…

Nya…

I cried more, curling into myself while the moon watched me and a ringing, somewhere I couldn’t point out, faded into the night.

Chapter Text

Chapter 30

Night's Revelations

I had found myself outside surrounded by the sakura trees and staring at the glittering waters of the pond. The earlier beauty of the scene now gone as it kept being replaced by that nightmare and the elemental waves a bit dull as if reflecting my current emotions.

Those vivid images kept resurfacing, so much so that even the smallest brush of wind made me panic and I’d turn around, expecting to see Uncle Hiroshi at the bridge. But, nothing. It was just a continued silence and I just hugged the shamisen closer.

On my way here, I tried my best to stay away from the others as possible to the point that I almost got lost inside the estate just to find another way out. For some reason, that place was suffocating to me, even though Aunt Asami had tried her best to settle us in and had been a generous host to us.